JP2024028586A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can improve a player's interest.
SOLUTION: When left and right wing members 520L, 520R are in an open state, bulging portions 524L, 524R are formed on side surfaces 526L, 526R on which game balls flowing down a game area roll. The respective bulging portions 524L, 524R are formed at different positions along the planes of the side surfaces 526L, 526R in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball rolls. As a result, when a game ball is thrown to one of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, the game ball is moved to the bulges 524L, 524R side of the other left and right wing members 520L, 520R by the bulges 524L, 524R. It can be biased. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling and passing through the side surfaces 526L and 526R.
[Selection diagram] Figure 26

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball into the ball entrance and is movable. Gaming machines are known. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members that have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, are disposed across the ball entrance, and have their proximal ends rotatably supported. Patent Document 1 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one wing member, and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other wing member.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-164598

However, the game machine described above has a problem in that the game ball cannot be biased sufficiently.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can bias a game ball.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide surface that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, and is formed to be displaceable. The guide member includes a pair of protruding portions that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the guide surface. A pair of protrusions are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members that are disposed across the ball entry hole and whose base end side is rotatably supported. , by rotating the pair of wing members in a direction in which the tip sides approach or separate, a closed state through which a game ball cannot pass or an open state through which a game ball can pass is formed; , the protruding portion of one of the pair of wing members and the protruding portion of the other wing member protrude from the guide surface of each of the pair of wing members; They are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction along which the game ball is guided.

The gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in which the protruding portion is provided to protrude from the guide surface at a position closer to the proximal end side than the distal end side of the wing member.

According to the game machine according to the first aspect, the game ball can be biased.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the game ball can be biased.

According to the gaming machine according to the third aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, it is possible to cause the ball to smoothly enter the ball entrance.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. FIG. 3 is a perspective front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. (a) is a front view of the winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning a prize opening unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a base member and a 1st electric accessory. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit. (a) and (b) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XVII-XVII of FIG. 10(a). (a) and (b) are front views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the XXb-XXb line in FIG. 18(b). be. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). (a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member. (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 24(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27(a). (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit in range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in range XXIX in FIG. 2. FIG. (a) is a front view of the decorative pattern display device, and (b) is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative pattern display device. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative pattern display device. (a) is a front view of the inner reel developed, and (b) is a front view of the outer reel developed. 30(a) is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative pattern display device in range XXXV in FIG. 34. FIG. 36(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 36(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). FIG. 3 is a front view of the segment display device. FIG. 3 is an exploded view of the segment display device. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the second segment unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second segment unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit. 42(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along the line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a). FIG. It is a side view of a base member. 42(a) is a sectional view of the second segment unit taken along the line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42(a). FIG. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the displacement member, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member. 51(a) is a sectional view of the displacement member taken along the line LIII-LIII in FIG. 51(a). FIG. It is a front view of a displacement member. It is a front view of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. (a) to (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit. 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a 4th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). It is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device in a 5th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member, and (b) is a sectional view of the annular member taken along the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70(a). It is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device in a 6th embodiment. 72(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 72(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line LXXIIb-LXXIIb in FIG. 72(a). (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 73(a). (a) is a front view of a rotating member in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member. (a) to (c) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) to (c) are front views of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in an 8th embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in a ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of a displacement member in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit in the range XCI of FIG. 90. It is a schematic diagram of the vertical displacement unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 96(a). (a) is a perspective front view of a left wing member in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member taken along the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the left wing member in FIG. 98(b). FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc of FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 99. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the Cb-Cb line in FIG. 100(a). (a) is a front view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross section of the first electric accessory and the drive unit 8530 taken along the CIb-CIb line in FIG. 101(a). 101(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit taken along the line CIc-CIc in FIG. 101(b). (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit in a seventeenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a partially enlarged view of a rotating member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a decorative pattern display device in an 18th embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 63, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 2 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 2. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used, for example, when changing the presentation mode displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 (see FIG. 2), or when changing the presentation content of Super Reach. operated by a person.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize winning machine. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 76 formed of The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (top left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change or time saving period, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140 is opened is changed, and it is longer than during the normal period. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state (open state), the access to the second prize opening 140 is greater than when the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, one winning A change may be made in which the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened is increased compared to the normal number of times. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and the first electric accessory At least one of the number of times 520 is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140 is released and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is released in one win are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased compared to the normal one.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. A second symbol display device (not shown) is composed of a segment display device 600 and a decorative symbol display device 800 that display symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 66. ) is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 are made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 of this embodiment are different from the fact that the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). , performs decorative display and displacement operations according to the display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. In addition, instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, for example, a liquid crystal display may be used to display the game status.

The second symbol display device alternately displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the first electric accessory 520 of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second winning hole can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the first electric accessory 520 per win, etc. 140, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the first electric accessory 520 may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as by displaying the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, and segment display. This may be performed using part of the device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

A first electric accessory 520 is attached to the second prize opening 140. This first electric accessory 520 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 520 It becomes an open state (enlarged state) and becomes a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving period, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change or time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 140 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 520 as in the second winning hole 140, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second prize opening 140 is likely to be in an open state. Since the ball is easy to hit, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R jackpot by opening the first electric accessory 520 and winning the second prize opening 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or 37B so as to represent the symbol, and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the segment display device 600 and decorative symbol display device 800. It will be done. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, for example, It may also be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the pachinko machine 10 to perform jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, segment display device 600, and decorative symbol display device 800, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Performs the main processing of

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, which are performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110. The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The audio lamp control device 113 also monitors the input from the frame button 22, and changes the mode displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. The controller 114 instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the performance during super reach. When the display mode is changed, information regarding the changed display mode is included so that the segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800 display decorations corresponding to the changed display mode. A rear image change command is sent to the display control device 114. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 in accordance with the commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. It also controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 , the segment display device 600 , and the decorative pattern display device 800 , and controls the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 . This controls the display of the third symbol's variable effect, etc. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby controlling the display of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 and the audio from the audio output device 226. It is possible to match the output.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 13, a state in which the winning a prize opening unit 500 is disassembled from the game board 13 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning opening unit 500 is a game machine formed by dividing two rails 76 and 77 planted on the front surface of the game board 13 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. It is inserted from the front side into an opening 13a formed below the area. In addition, the detailed structure of the winning a prize opening unit 500 will be described later.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operating unit 300. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit 300. Moreover, FIGS. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300.

8 shows a state in which the displacement members 670 disposed in pairs on the upper and lower sides of the segment display device 600 are respectively retracted on both upper and lower sides, whereas in FIG. A state in which the provided displacement member 670 is extended to the vertically central position is shown in each figure.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 includes a box-shaped rear case 400, and the inner space of the rear case 400 includes a decorative pattern display device 800, a segment display device 600, and a decorative unit 700. is accommodated.

The back case 400 includes a bottom wall portion 401 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 402 that stands from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 401 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 401a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 401, and the segment display device 600 is disposed from the back side of the back case 400 through the opening 401a.

Three decorative pattern display devices 800 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the opening 401a of the bottom wall portion 401 of the back case 400. The decorative symbol display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that are rotatably displaced in the vertical direction, and the outer peripheral surfaces of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are decorated. The player is configured to be able to visually recognize the manner in which the symbols change (rotate). Note that a detailed description of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be given later.

The segment display device 600 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 401 of the back case 400 and is configured to cover the decorative pattern display device 800. A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative pattern display device 800, and by disposing the decorative pattern display device 800 between the gaps, it is possible to , the decorative pattern display device 800 is made visible.

In addition, the segment display device 600 is provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) that can be displaced in front of the gap between the opposing base members 660, and the displacement member 670 is moved between the decorative pattern display device 800. By displacing it forward, it is possible to create a presentation form in which the decorative symbol display device 800 is made invisible to the player. Note that a detailed explanation of the segment display device 600 will be given later.

The decoration units 700 are formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular box when viewed from the front, and are arranged in pairs above and below the segment display device 600. The decoration unit 700 is made of a transparent resin material and has a shape that resembles the logo, title, etc. of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, an LED base for emitting light is disposed inside the decoration unit 700, and is configured to be able to emit light to the player side.

Next, the winning a prize opening unit 500 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29. First, the configuration of the winning a prize opening unit 500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13.

FIG. 10(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 10(b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 510 and the first electric accessory 520.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the winning slot unit 500 includes a base member 510 disposed on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 5), and a shaft rotatably mounted inside the base member 510. It is formed mainly of a supported first electric accessory 520 and a drive unit 530 that applies a driving force to the first electric accessory 520.

The base member 510 is formed by fastening a front base 511 disposed on the front side and a back base 512 disposed at a predetermined distance from the front base 511.

The front base 511 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is also formed from a transparent resin material. The front base 511 includes a first protrusion 511a that protrudes from the upper end of the center portion in the left-right direction toward the back side, a second protrusion portion 511b that protrudes from the lower end portion of the center portion in the left-right direction toward the back side, and the second protrusion portion 511b. 511b and a third protrusion 511c that protrudes at a position separated by a predetermined gap in the left-right direction.

Also. The front base 511 is disposed at a position where its front surface is visible from the player side, and a pattern is formed by unevenness on the front side.

The first protruding portion 511a is attached to the back base 512 when the first electric accessory 520, which will be described later, is in a closed state (a state in which the tips of the wing members 520L and 520R are located above the rotating shaft (shaft member JB1)). This is a plate member for preventing the game ball from being thrown into the second winning hole 140 that is formed.

That is, the first protrusion 511a is formed at the upper part between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R facing each other in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric accessory 520 and the first protrusion 511a is equal to the diameter of the game ball. is set smaller than.

Further, the first protruding portion 511a is formed such that its upper surface is inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward both left and right ends. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the 1st protrusion part 511a can roll the upper surface and fall (flow down) below.

The second protruding portion 511b is formed to protrude from the back side of the front base 511 in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the position of its upper end surface in the vertical direction is lower than the bottom surface of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. Set. In addition, the second protruding part 511b includes an upright part 511b1 that is erected in front of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512, an engaging part 511b2 that protrudes from both left and right ends of the upright part 511b1, and a bottom part. 511b3.

Furthermore, a base member 511f including an LED that irradiates light onto the lower side of the upright portion 511b1 is disposed on the second protruding portion 511b. The LED of the base member 511f is arranged in such a manner that it emits light upward. Therefore, the area around the second winning hole 140 can be illuminated by the LED.

The upright portions 511b1 are formed to stand upward from the upper end of the second protruding portion 511b, and two of the upright portions 511b1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and their upright tips are connected to each other. In addition, the upright portion 511b1 is formed so that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the second winning opening 140 (back side), and the vertical position of the end on the second winning opening 140 side is The height is set to match the bottom of the Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 can be rolled toward the second winning opening 140 side. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 can enter the second winning hole 140.

Further, the connecting portions of the upright portions 511b1 arranged in parallel are formed in a shape in which the circumferential center position is recessed downward. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 can easily stay at the center position in the left and right direction of the upright part 511b1. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning opening 140 side. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 can be prevented from colliding with the game ball thrown later and being pushed outward, making it easier to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 140. can.

The engaging portions 511b2 are portions that engage with left and right wing members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, and are formed to protrude from both left and right sides of the base end portion of the upright portion 511b1 toward the center of the shaft support 511d, which will be described later.

The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512. Thereby, a screw can be inserted into the through hole 511b4 formed through the side surface on the back side of the recessed portion 511b3.

The third protruding portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball into the first out opening 71 formed on the back base 512, and the third protruding portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball into the first out opening 71 formed on the back base 512. It is formed adjacent to both outer sides of the 1-out port 71 in the left-right direction. In other words, the third protrusion 511c is formed at a position spaced apart in the left-right direction by the width of the second protrusion 511b and the first outlet 71 in the left-right direction.

The bottom surfaces of the third protrusions 511c are formed to be inclined downward toward the adjacent first outlet 71 (toward the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10(a)), The lowermost position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first outlet 71. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the third protrusion 511c can be rolled toward the first out port 71 and entered into the first out port 71.

The pivot supports 511d are formed to protrude in an annular shape from the back side of the front base 511, and are formed in two at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10(a)) with the standing portion 511b1 in between. . The inner diameter of the shaft support 511d is formed to be larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1, which will be described later. Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted into the shaft support 511d.

The back base 512 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped body that is larger in front view shape than the front base 511 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the player can directly view the front surface of the back base 512 that does not overlap with the front base 511 in the front-rear direction.

Moreover, since the front base 511 is formed from a transparent material, the rear base 512 can be visually recognized through the front base 511 in the portion where the front base 511 overlaps with the front. Furthermore, the player can visually recognize the game ball thrown between the back base 512 and the front base 511 through the front base 511.

The back base 512 has a first winning opening 64 formed at the upper end of the front side, a second winning opening 140 formed below the first winning opening 64, and a second winning opening 140 formed on both sides of the second winning opening 140. The main winning hole 63 is formed mainly of a first out port 71, which is a first out port 71, and a general winning port 63 formed above the first out port 71 on the right side when viewed from the front.

The first prize opening 64 is recessed downward from the upper end of the front base 511 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10(a)), and protrudes in both front and back directions along the recessed edge. It is formed. Further, the protruding tip on the front side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 10(a)) is closed by a plate member.

The concave shape of the first prize opening 64 is formed to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted inside, and the bottom surface (inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed to be inclined toward the back side. Thereby, the game ball that entered the first prize opening 64 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13.

The second winning hole 140 is formed to penetrate below the first winning hole 64 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 10(a)). The second prize opening 140 is formed in a square shape that is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 via the second prize opening 140. In addition, the second winning opening 140 includes a recessed portion 140a recessed on the left and right inner side surfaces.

The recess 140a is curved around the axis of the shaft hole 512a. Thereby, the projections 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, which will be described later, can be housed inside thereof. That is, the inside of the second winning a prize opening 140 is made into a state where the game ball can pass through and the protrusions 523L, 523R are inserted.

The shaft hole 512a is recessed from the front to the back side on both left and right sides of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. The shaft hole 512a is a groove into which a shaft member JB1, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

The first out port 71 is formed to penetrate both left and right sides of the second winning port 140. The first out port 71 is a hole for collecting game balls that have flown down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a width in the vertical direction (short direction). The dimensions are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first out port 71 is formed so that its bottom surface (inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined toward the back side. Therefore, the game ball that entered the first out port 71 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13.

A guide wall 512b is formed in the first out port 71, which is connected to the bottom surface of the first out port 71 and protrudes toward the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area on its upper surface and sending the ball to the first out port 71, and the upper surface thereof is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side.

Furthermore, a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged in parallel on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b, it is possible to suppress the guide wall 512b from being damaged.

The front base 511 and the back base 512 are fastened together by the above-described through hole 511b4 and a fastening hole 512c formed through the back base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, with the front base 511 and the back base 512 assembled in the front-rear direction, a screwdriver is inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. This can be done by

The first electric accessory 520 is formed of a left wing member 520L arranged on the left side of the second winning opening 140 when viewed from the front, and a right wing member 520R arranged on the right side when viewed from the front as one unit.

In addition, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R differ only in the positions of bulges 524L and 524R, which will be described later, and the other members are formed symmetrically across the second winning opening 140, so the bulges are different. Regarding the parts other than the projecting portions 524L and 524R, only the left wing member 520L will be described, and a detailed explanation of the right wing member 520R will be omitted.

Further, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are in a first state (closed state) in which a corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is located upward in the direction of gravity by driving a solenoid 531 of a drive unit 530, which will be described later. It is possible to displace the second state (open state) in which the corner on the far side from the through hole 521L is displaced to a position spaced outward in the left-right direction of the second prize opening 140, and unless otherwise specified, the first state is shall be explained. Further, in the first state, the opposing side surfaces of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R will be described with reference signs 526L, 526R.

The left wing member 520L is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed around the through hole 521L from the front side to the back side, and a recess 522L extending from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back side. A protrusion 523L that protrudes from the side, a recessed portion 525L that is recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface of the through hole 521L, a bulging portion 524L that protrudes from the side surface 526L, and an inside of the through hole 521L. The shaft member JB1 is inserted into the shaft member JB1. Note that a detailed explanation of the bulging portion 524L will be given later.

The shaft member JB1 is a cylindrical rod member formed from a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, respectively, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 521L.

Further, the length of the shaft member JB1 in the axial direction is approximately equal to or slightly shorter than the distance from the recessed end surface of the shaft hole 512a to the back side of the front base 511. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, one end of the shaft member JB1 (the end on the back base 512 side) is inserted into the shaft hole 512a, and the other end (the end on the front base 511 side) is inserted into the shaft hole 512a. ) is inserted inside the shaft support 511d, thereby allowing the shaft member JB1 to be held between the front base 511 and the back base 512.

The left wing member 520L has a dimension in the front-rear direction that is set to be smaller than the distance between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, by inserting the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L, the wing member 520L can be rotatably held between the front base 511 and the back base 512 facing each other. .

The recess 522L is formed around the axis of the through hole 521L from the front side, and the recess dimension is set smaller than the protruding distance of the shaft support 511d. Further, the distance from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner circumferential surface is set larger than the radius from the axis of the shaft support 511d to the outer circumferential surface.

Therefore, when the wing member 520L is disposed between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other, it is possible to suppress the front surface of the wing member 520L and the back surface of the front base 511 from coming into contact with the ground, and also to prevent the front surface of the wing member 520L and the front surface from coming into contact with the ground. The grounding portion with the base 511 can be the recess 522L and the pivot support 511d. Therefore, the wing member 520L and the front base 511 can be partially grounded. As a result, when the wing member 520L is rotated by driving the solenoid 531, which will be described later, the resistance acting on the wing member 520L is reduced, making it easier to rotate the wing member 520L.

Further, since the pivot support 511d can be housed inside the recess 522L, the distance between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other can be reduced. As a result, the distance dimension of the winning a prize opening unit 500 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

Here, there has conventionally been a gaming machine in which the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L of the wing member 520L.

However, in conventional game machines, since the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L, if the wing member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing the parts. be. Therefore, there was a problem that the cost of parts increased.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shaft member JB1 is only inserted into the through hole 521L formed in the feather member 520L, and the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 are separately attached to the winning opening unit 500. can be placed. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, only the wing member 520L can be replaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in component costs.

Furthermore, as described above, the front base 511 can be fastened to the rear base 512 from the front side of the front base 511. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, the front base 511 can be removed from the back base 512 with the winning slot unit 500 attached to the game board 13. As a result, parts of the wing member 520L can be easily replaced.

That is, when removing the front base 511 from the back side of the back base 512, it is necessary to remove the winning slot unit 500 from the game board 13 and then remove the front base 511 from the back base 512. Since it is formed so that it can be removed from the side, the front base 511 can be easily removed. As a result, parts of the wing member 520L can be easily replaced.

Here, if the front base 511 is made removable from the front side of the back base 512, the heads of screws etc. that connect the front base 511 and the back base 512 will be visible from the player side (front side), and the player , visual recognition of the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512 may spoil the player's interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front base 511 and the back base 512 are fastened together using the space of the recessed portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511. That is, by inserting a screwdriver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, a screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c via the through hole 511b4. Therefore, even when the front base 511 is located on the front side of the through hole 511b4, the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be fastened together by inserting a screwdriver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the heads of screws or the like that connect the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be difficult to see from the player's side (front side). As a result, the player's interest can be prevented from being lost due to the player visually recognizing the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512.

Further, normally, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600, which are visible through an opening formed in the center of the game board 13, are set at the level of the player's eye level. Therefore, the winning a prize opening unit 500 is arranged below the player's eye level. As a result, the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512 are difficult to see from the player's side, and it is more interesting for the player to see the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512. can be prevented from being damaged.

Note that since the front base 511 is made of a transparent resin material, the heads of the screws can be visually recognized through the front base 511, but as described above, the front base 511 also has unevenness on the front side. Since a pattern is formed, light can be emitted in different directions depending on the thickness of the plate. Thereby, the heads of the screws that are visible through the front base 511 can be obscured. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

Next, the drive unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. 15(a) and 15(b) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. 16(a) and 16(b) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520.

Note that FIGS. 15(a) and 16(a) illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, and FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b) illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state. A state in which the accessory 520 is located in the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, and a rotating member 533 and a sliding member 533 connected to the sliding member 532. It is formed mainly of a first case member 534 in which a member 532 is movably disposed, and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534.

The solenoid 531 includes a main body 531a that has an electric wire inside and generates electromagnetic force when electric power is passed through the wire, a movable body 531b that is slidably disposed inside the main body, and the movable body. The engagement portion 531c is attached to the distal end portion of the holder.

The main body portion 531a is formed in a prismatic shape that is elongated in the front-rear direction, and has electric wires disposed therein. A recessed portion recessed toward the back side is formed on the front side of the main body portion 531a, and a movable body 531b formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed inside the recessed portion.

The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can slide toward the back side (inside the main body 531a) by applying electric power to the electric wire of the main body 531a and generating electromagnetic force.

The engaging portion 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b on the opposite side to the main body portion 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed into a disk shape with an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b, and is disposed such that its axis is located approximately in the same line as the axis of the movable body 531b.

The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of a sliding member 532, which will be described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 15(a)) as the movable body 531b is displaced.

The sliding member 532 is formed into a substantially E-shape when viewed from above, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction, and two first pieces protruding toward the front from both left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a. It is formed mainly of a protrusion 532b and a second protrusion 532c located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding toward the front side.

In the sliding member 532, the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension between opposing sides in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential surface of a first case member 534, which will be described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534.

The connecting portion 532a includes a recess 532a1 recessed on the back side, an engagement groove 532a2 connected to the front side of the recess 532a1 and recessed from the upper surface side, and formed on both left and right sides of the base end of the second protrusion 532c. It is formed mainly with a notch 532a3.

As described above, the recess 532a1 is a recess that prevents the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a when the engaging portion 531c of the solenoid 531 is inserted into the engaging groove 532a2. That is, the recessed portion 532a1 has a recessed surface formed in an arc shape larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. This can prevent the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a.

The engagement groove 532a2 is formed to be connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the depth of the recess in the direction of gravity from the upper surface side is set to be larger than the diameter of the engagement part 531c. Further, the engagement groove 532a2 has a width dimension in the left-right direction set to be larger than a diameter of the engagement part 531c, and a width dimension in the front-rear direction is approximately the same as a thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement part 531c, or The thickness is larger than the thickness of the portion 531c in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the engaging portion 531c can be inserted inside the engaging groove 532a2.

The cut portion 532a3 is a cut for making it easier to elastically deform the sliding member 532 when connecting the first protrusion 532b to the rotating member 533, which will be described later. It is formed on both sides, and a cut is formed toward the back side.

The first protrusion 532b includes an engagement hole 532d formed to penetrate in the left-right direction. The engagement hole 532d is formed in the shape of an elongated hole that is long in the front-rear direction, and has a first opening 532d1 recessed downward in the direction of gravity from the end on the front side and downward in the direction of gravity from the end on the back side. The second opening 532d2 is formed in a recessed manner. Note that detailed explanations of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be given later.

The engagement hole 532d is set such that the width in the vertical direction at the central portion in the front-rear direction (portion other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is larger than the width in the vertical direction of a protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, which will be described later. be done. Thereby, the protrusion 533b can be arranged inside the engagement hole 532d.

The second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b as described above, and is also formed to protrude from the front side. Further, the second protrusion 532c includes an upright wall 532c1 erected downward on the distal end side opposite to the connecting portion 532a. Note that a detailed explanation of the erected wall 532c1 will be given later.

The rotating member 533 is formed by two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and connecting the opposing ends on one end side by a connecting part 533a. Ru. The gap between the two opposing plate-shaped bodies of the rotating member 533 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. Ru. Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532.

The rotating member 533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both left and right sides from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes to both left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and The driving portion 533d is formed in a recessed manner at the tip of the other end of the L-shape.

The rotating shaft 533c is formed to protrude from both left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces thereof is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Further, the protruding dimension of the rotating shaft 533c is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Therefore, by receiving the rotating shaft 533c inside a recess 534a of the first case member 534, which will be described later, and assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534, the rotating member 533 can be connected to the first case member 534 and the second case member 534. It can be held in a rotatable state relative to the second case member 535.

The protrusions 533b are formed to protrude on both left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces is equal to the distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. The dimensions are set to be approximately the same. Further, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 533b is set larger than the width dimension in the left-right direction of the first protrusion 532b. Therefore, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected by inserting the protrusion 533b into the engagement hole 532d of the first protrusion 532b.

Note that the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected by elastically deforming the two first projections 532b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the distance between the two first projections 532b. can. In this case, as described above, since the notch 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, the distance between the two first protrusions 532b facing each other can be easily widened. As a result, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be easily connected.

Furthermore, the distance between the opposing inner surfaces in the left-right direction of the first case member 534 is approximately the same as the distance between the opposing outer surfaces of the first protrusions 532b, or the outer surfaces of the first protrusions 532b are opposite to each other. The distance dimension is set slightly larger than the distance between the two. Thereby, in a state where the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are arranged inside the first case member 534, it is possible to suppress the first protrusion 532b from elastically deforming outward in the left-right direction. As a result, disconnection between the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be suppressed.

The drive portion 533d is formed in a concave manner from the front side toward the back side. The drive portion 533d can house the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing member 520L inside. That is, the driving portion 533d is set to have a larger dimension in the vertical direction than the projections 523L and 523R. By accommodating the protrusions 523L and 523R in the drive part 533d, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced between the first state and the second state as the drive part 533d is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be given later.

The first case member 534 is formed into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front with an open interior, and is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The first case member 534 has a cutout formed on the lower side of the back side, and a second case member 535 can be disposed in the cutout portion.

The first case member 534 is formed to mainly include a recess 534a recessed toward the front in a notch on the back side, and an upright portion 534b erected on the bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

As described above, the recess 534a is a recess that accommodates the rotating shaft 533c of the rotating member 533 inside, and is recessed in a shape larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 533c. Therefore, by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 with the rotating shaft 533c housed inside, the rotating member 533 can be disposed inside the first case member 534.

The upright portion 534b is formed so that the lower inner circumferential surface of the second prize opening 140 of the back base 512 and the upright end surface thereof are set at the same height, extend toward the back side, and slope downward. be done. As a result, when the drive unit 530 is placed on the back surface of the back base 512, the game ball that has entered the second winning hole 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper surface of the upright portion 534b. .

The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. The second case member 535 includes a through hole 535a formed vertically.

The through hole 535a has an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball, and as described above, the game ball thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling with the upper part of the upright portion 534b is passed through the through hole 535a. The ball can be thrown downward through the ball. Thereby, the game ball that has flown down the game area and entered the second prize opening 140 can be collected.

Next, the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

As shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 16(a), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is disposed around the movable body 531b. At the same time, it is pushed out to the front side (to the left in FIG. 15(a)) by the biasing force of a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a.

In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is located on the back side (second opening 532d2 side) of the engagement hole 532d. Further, the center of gravity of the rotating member 533 in a side view is located between the drive portion 533d and the rotating shaft 533c. That is, a rotational force is always applied to the rotating member 533 around the rotating shaft 533c in a direction that pushes down the driving portion 533d.

Therefore, even when the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is located on the back side of the engagement hole 532d (on the second opening 533d2 side), the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 remains inside the second opening 533d2 (below the engagement hole 532d (see FIG. 15(a)). ) can stagnate above it without being guided by the lower side )).

Further, since the driving portion 533d is pushed down, the respective protrusions 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R housed inside the driving portion 533d are pushed down. As a result, the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are placed in a state in which the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L, 521R are located above the through holes 521L, 521R (first state (see FIG. 16(a))). Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b), when electric power is applied to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531, the movable body 531b is pulled into the main body 531a by the electromagnetic force generated in the main body 531a. It will be done.

Therefore, as the movable body 531b is displaced, the sliding member 532 connected to the distal end side of the movable body 531b is slid rearward (to the right in FIG. 15(b)). As described above, since the rotating member 533 is always subjected to a rotational force around the rotating shaft 533c in the direction of pushing down the driving portion 533d, the engagement hole 532d of the sliding member 532 The protrusion 533b accommodated inside the second opening 533d2 is slid inside the second opening 533d2 without being caught in the proximal end portion thereof.

At the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, the protrusion 533b that slides inside the second opening 533d2 comes into contact with the end of the engagement hole 532d on the front side (first opening 532d1 side) and on the back side (FIG. 15). (b) right side). In this case, since the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the axis of the rotating shaft 533c, the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

Further, since the rotating member 533 rotates around the rotating shaft 533c, the driving portion 533d can be displaced upward (to the upper side in FIG. 15(b)). As a result, the wing member 520L is rotated around the axes of the through-holes 521L, 521R, and the corner portions on the far side from the through-holes 521L, 521R are displaced to the left and right outside (second state (FIG. 16(b)). ))).

On the other hand, the displacement from the second state to the first state is performed by cutting off the supply of power to the main body portion 531a of the solenoid 531. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body part 531a disappears, so that a biasing spring (not shown) disposed around the movable body 531b and interposed between the main body part 531a and the connecting part 532a is activated. Due to the biasing force, the movable body 531b is extended to the front side (left side in FIG. 15(a)). As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the position of the first state.

As described above, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape that corresponds to the displacement of the protrusion 533b, so that the recess depth of the first opening 532d1 toward the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 15(b)) is reduced. It is formed deeper toward the back side (right side in FIG. 15(b)).

As a result, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 collides with the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b is moved in the direction of gravity. It can be easily displaced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the operation of the second protrusion 532c will be described. 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 10(a). In addition, FIG. 17(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, and FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the second state. .

As shown in FIG. 17(a), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the far corners of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are connected to the first protrusion 511a. placed nearby. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down between the left and right wing members 520L, 520R facing each other.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b protrudes from the inside of the main body portion 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engaging portion 531c) is positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 17(a)). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is arranged near the second winning opening 140.

In this case, the distance dimension from the erected tip of the erected wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17(a))) to the upper end surface of the erected part 534b formed on the first case member 534 L1 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, even if the first electric accessory 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes forward, the game ball can flow between the opposing left and right wing members 520L and 520R. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second prize opening 140 and rolling. That is, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 collides with the upright wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, even if the player continues playing the game when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged, it is possible to prevent the store from being at a disadvantage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sensor device SE1 that detects that a game ball has entered the second winning a prize opening 140 is arranged in the downstream path of the game ball of the second case member 535. Therefore, in order to detect that the game ball has passed through the inside of the second winning opening 140, it is necessary to roll the game ball to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the game ball inside the first case member 534, it is possible to suppress the pachinko machine 10 from detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 140.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the far corners of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are in the first state. The ball is also spaced apart from the first protrusion 511a, and the distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right feather members 520L, 520R, and can be rolled into the second prize opening 140. That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 140.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b is drawn inside the main body portion 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engaging portion 531c) is positioned on the back side (right side in FIG. 17(b)). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is arranged at a position farther away from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

In this case, the distance dimension from the erected tip of the erected wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17(b))) to the upper end surface of the erected part 534b formed on the first case member 534 L2 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are displaced to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the second prize opening 140. At the same time, the game ball entered into the second winning hole 140 can be sent to the second case member 535 by rolling the upright portion 534b formed on the first case member 534.

Furthermore, since the displacement direction of the standing wall 532c1 can be slid in a direction that substantially coincides with the rolling direction of the game ball entering the second winning hole 140, the feather member 520L, When 520R is damaged (or due to fraudulent activity) and released, the game ball that collided with the standing wall 532c1 and stopped is pushed out in the opposite direction to the rolling direction due to the displacement of the standing wall 532c1. can be suppressed. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened by the drive of the solenoid 531 and the game ball can enter the second winning port 140, the game ball is prevented from becoming clogged in the second winning port 140. can. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the game ball can be smoothly guided inside the second winning opening.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, a case will be described in which the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state due to a fraudulent act by a player. 18(a) and 18(b) are front views of the winning a prize opening unit 500. 19(a) and 19(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.

Note that in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent in order to facilitate understanding. Further, in FIG. 19(a), the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state are illustrated, and in FIG. 19(b), when only the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state The state of is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state due to a cheating act by the player , the projections 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are displaced inside the second opening 532d2 of the engagement hole 532d. That is, since a space is formed in which the protrusions 523L and 523R can be displaced, it is possible to suppress damage to the first electric accessory 520 when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly displaced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 20(a) and 11(b), a description will be given of the displacement of the upright portion 523c1 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced due to a fraudulent act by the player. 20(a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the player's energizing action, the solenoid of the drive unit 530 531 and the sliding member 532 are not displaced, and only the first electric accessory 520 and the rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

As described above, when the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, the first electrically-driven accessory 520 is located at A distance L1 from the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, conventionally, a second winning hole 140 formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members 520L and 520R arranged across the second winning hole 140, and a pair of wing members 520L and 520R are provided. When a pair of wing members 520L, 520R is opened by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) that applies a driving force to open or close the driving means (solenoid 531), the second prize opening 140 is opened. When the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), the game ball enters the second prize opening 140. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means disposed at a regulating position for regulating a ball.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so for example, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from the outside, the regulating means is displaced from the regulating position to the permissible position. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of regulating game balls from being illegally entered into the second winning hole 140 was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement of the standing wall 532c1 is maintained at the restricted position when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside. Since the erected wall 532c1 can be formed so as to be able to be formed, it is possible to suppress the erected wall 532c1 from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the second winning hole 140.

That is, in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are closed or in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to The distance dimension L3 from the lower side (lower side in FIG. 20(b)) to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. . Therefore, even if the first electric accessory 520 is allowed to throw a game ball into the second winning hole 140 due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball will enter the second winning hole 140 and roll. can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the upright wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (a game ball can be thrown to the second winning hole 140) due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning hole 140. It is possible to easily control the ball being thrown into the ball.

In addition, in this case, since the standing wall 532c1 that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the second prize opening 140 can be formed in series with the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the second There is no need for a separate member to prevent balls from being illegally entered into the prize opening 140. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and an increase in manufacturing costs can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a case will be described in which the second protrusion 532c is further pushed into the back side when the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the second state due to a fraudulent act by the player. . 21(a) and 21(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 22(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and FIG. 22(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, a protrusion 532d3 protruding from the inner surface on the front side (left side in FIG. 22(a)) is formed inside the second opening 532d2. Further, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is formed with a notch 533b1 formed by cutting the outer circumferential surface in a side view.

The protrusion 532d3 and the notch 533b1 are formed to have corresponding outer diameters. That is, the protruding shape of the protrusion 532d3 and the notch shape of the notch 533b1 in side view are substantially the same.

Therefore, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed into the back side from the state where only the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state due to fraudulent activity, as shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 22(a). Then, the projection 532d3 is accommodated inside the notch 533b1, and the displacement of the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) toward the back side is restricted. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the second state due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball enters the second prize opening 140 and the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 This can prevent the ball from rolling and being thrown.

Further, in this embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined upward toward the back side (see FIG. 22(a)). Thereby, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1.

That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined upward toward the back side, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further moved toward the back side while the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the notch 532b1. When a pushing force is applied to the notch 532b1, the direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the protrusion 532d3 and the notch 532b1 can be set to the direction in which the protrusion 532d3 enters the inside of the notch 532b1. Therefore, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball enters the second prize opening 140 and the upright part 534b of the first case member 534 It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from rolling and being thrown.

In other words, it is equipped with a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and the transmission mechanism is moved to the open slide position (FIG. 17) by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531). The sliding member 532 is slid between the position shown in FIG. 17(a)) and the closed sliding position (the position shown in FIG. a rotating member 533 that is rotated to the position to open the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and rotated to the closed rotation position by sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closed slide position to close the pair of wing members 520L, 520R; The standing wall 532c1 is disposed on the sliding member 532, and when the sliding member 532 is slid to the open sliding position, the standing wall 532c1 is placed in the permissible position, and the sliding member 532 is closed. When the standing wall 532c1 is slid to the slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is placed in the restriction position, and when the rotating member 533 is placed in the open rotating position with the sliding member 532 being placed in the closed sliding position, the rotating member 533 By engaging the sliding member 532 with the sliding member 532, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is restricted, and therefore illegal entry of game balls into the second prize opening 140 is restricted. It's easy to do.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside, the rotating member 533 rotates to the open rotating position while the sliding member 532 is placed in the closed sliding position. be done. In this state, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position, so that the restricting means can be maintained at the restricting position (restricting means can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are forcibly opened from the outside and a game ball is passed through between the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, the game ball enters the second prize opening 140. Balling can be regulated by regulatory means.

Furthermore, an engagement hole 532d is provided extending in one of the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533, and a protrusion 533b is protruded from the other, and the protrusion 533b is slid along the engagement hole 532d. The sliding displacement of the member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size and make it difficult for regulations to be lifted.

That is, a means for regulating the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position is provided by utilizing the engagement hole 532d and the protrusion 533b for transmitting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the rotating member 533 for rotation. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, by adopting a structure in which the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, unauthorized access to the engagement portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the restriction (engagement) can be released accordingly. It's difficult to do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R will be described in detail. FIG. 23(a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and FIG. 23(b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 24(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 24(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 24(a).

Note that in FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b), the left-right direction when viewed from perspective is reversed between FIG. 23(a) and FIG. 23(b). Further, in FIG. 24(a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent. Furthermore, in FIG. 24(b), the front base 511, which was seen as transparent in FIG. 24(a), is shown as opaque. Further, in FIG. 24(b), the rolling direction of the game balls rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the through hole 521L side, and on the front side (FIG. 24(b) arrow F side). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed at the end on the through hole 521R side, and is continuous with the end surface on the back side (arrow B side in FIG. 24(b)). be done.

That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 24(b)).

Furthermore, a first region is formed on the side surfaces 526L, 526R, which is continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, and has a size that does not abut the game ball guided through the first region. The bulges 524L, 524R are formed, and the first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R of one of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) and the other wing are formed. The first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. Ru.

In addition, the end of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L is inclined toward the through hole 521L from the front side (lower side in FIG. 24(b)) to the back side (upper side in FIG. 24(b)). It is formed by On the other hand, the end of the bulging portion 524R on the far side from the through hole 521R is formed so as to be inclined from the back side toward the front side toward the through hole 521R side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, a description will be given of a case where a game ball is thrown to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R. FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. 26(a) and 26(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit 500.

In addition, FIG. 25(a), FIG. 25(b), FIG. 26(a), and FIG. 26(b) correspond to the sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 500 in FIG. 24(b). Further, in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown from both sides of the first electric accessory 520 are sequentially illustrated. In FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown only to the left wing member 520L are sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), when the game ball is thrown to both sides of the first electric accessory 520, it rolls on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R. The game ball can be rolled to different positions in the front and back direction by the bulges 524L and 524R.

To explain in detail, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed to be connected to the front end surface. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is rolled toward the back side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L.

In this case, the end of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L extends from the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) to the back side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)). Since it is formed to be inclined, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulging portion 524L, it is possible to suppress the resistance in the rolling direction from increasing and the rolling of the game ball to be stopped.

On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is connected to the end surface on the back side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is rolled toward the front side by rolling on the side surface 526R while contacting the bulged portion 524R.

In this case, the end of the bulging portion 524R on the far side from the through hole 521R extends from the back side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)) to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) toward the through hole 521R side. Since it is formed to be inclined, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R comes into contact with the bulging portion 524R, it is possible to suppress the resistance in the rolling direction from increasing and the rolling of the game ball to be stopped.

Therefore, the game ball rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be brought to the back side, while the game ball rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be brought to the front side. As a result, when the game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on.

Here, conventionally, it has a ball entrance (second prize opening 140) that is formed to allow the game ball to enter, and a guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, and also has a displacement A gaming machine is known that includes a guide member (first electric accessory 520) that is configured to be movable. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members (wing members 520L, 520R) that have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, are disposed across the ball entrance, and have their base ends rotatably supported. ) is exemplified.

In addition, a first groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R), and the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of the other wing member A technique is disclosed in which second grooves are provided on the entire surface of each of the two grooves. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) on one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) And even if the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R), the game balls are guided (rolled) in different directions ( One side is on the glass plate side and the other side is on the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the second winning hole 140.

However, the above-described conventional technology has a problem in that the game ball cannot be biased sufficiently. In addition, a game ball that enters from one side of the guide member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) and passes through the other side of the guide member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R). In this case, the game ball is not entered into the ball entry hole (second winning hole 140), so there is a problem that the player's interest is lost.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 has a pair of bulges that protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R. 524L, 524R, and the pair of bulges 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R. By bringing the game ball guided (rolled) into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, the pair of bulges 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, so that the pair of wing members 520L, 520R A game ball entering from one side can be brought into contact with the bulges 524L and 524R. Therefore, a game ball that enters from one side of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) passes through the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (to the other of the wing members 520L, 520R). can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, the first electric accessory 520 is formed as a pair of wing members 520L, 520R that are disposed across the second prize opening 140 and whose base end sides are rotatably supported, and a pair of bulges 524L, 524R. are protruding from the respective side surfaces 526L, 526R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and are connected to the bulges 524L, 524R of one wing member 520L, 520R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R and the other wing member. Since the bulging parts 524L and 524R in 520L and 520R are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are guided (rolled). By bringing the game ball to be moved) into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, the bulges 524L, 524R in one wing member 520L, 520R and the bulges 524L, 524R in the other wing member 520L, 520R are arranged in the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R (wing By arranging the members 520L, 520R at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction from the distal end side to the proximal end side, a game ball that enters the side surfaces 526L, 526R of one wing member 520L, 520R will be disposed of on the other side. When reaching the side surfaces 5.26L, 526R of the wing members 520L, 520R, the game ball can be brought into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R of the other wing member 520L, 520R. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L, 526R of one wing member 520L, 520R can be prevented from passing through the side surface 526L, 526R of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the second winning hole 140, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In other words, the bulges 524L, 524R are formed on the left and right wing members 520L, 520R at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that game balls rolled from the left and right can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction. can be moved. Therefore, when game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of time it takes for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

In other words, by setting the collision positions of the game balls at different positions in the front and back direction on the left and right sides, the left game ball that has been brought to the back side will be moved to the back side (Fig. 25(b) upper side). On the other hand, the game ball on the right side that has been brought to the front side tends to bounce back to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) due to the collision.

Therefore, one of the game balls (in this embodiment, rolling the left wing member 520L) can easily enter the second winning hole 140, and the other game ball can be bounced back to the front side, thereby preventing collision. When doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being too far away from the second winning hole 140. Therefore, the second game ball that enters the second winning hole 140 later can enter the second winning hole 140 quickly. As a result, when game balls are thrown to both the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 520, the time required for the game balls on both sides to enter the second prize opening 140 can be shortened, and the game progresses smoothly. You can proceed.

In addition, since the bulging portions 524L, 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at positions closer to the proximal end side (through hole 521 side) than the distal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L, 526R. A rolling area can be ensured before the game ball comes into contact with the bulges 524L and 524R. Therefore, the reduction in the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed to that extent, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the second prize opening 140.

Further, since the bulging portions 524L, 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at positions closer to the proximal end side than the tip side of the wing members 520L, 520R, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are biased by contacting the bulging portions 524L, 524R. It is possible to suppress the path of the game ball from returning to the path before deflection before it reaches the ball entrance (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the side surfaces 526L, 526R to the ball entry hole while keeping it in the biased state.

In addition, as described above, the side surfaces 526L, 526R are formed with first regions that are continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, and the game ball guided through the first region does not come into contact with the wing members 520L, 526R. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed with a size such that when a game ball that enters the side surfaces 526L and 526R rolls in the first area, it is assumed that the rolling speed of the game ball will decrease. This can be avoided and the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning hole 140.

In this case, the first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R of one of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) and the other wing member (either of the wing members 520L, 520R) Since the first regions of the side surfaces 526L, 526R on the side surfaces 526L, 526R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, The game ball simultaneously guides the first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R on the other wing member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) and the first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R on the other wing member (the other wing member 520L, 520R). (Rolling) Even when the game balls are rolled, the game balls can be biased in different directions from each other, and the balls can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), when the game ball is thrown to one of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, the other left and right wing members 520L, 520R By bringing the game ball into contact with the bulging portion 524L or 524R, the game ball is prevented from rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other left and right wing members 520L, 520R and falling from the tips thereof. can.

To explain in detail, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed to be connected to the front end surface. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is rolled toward the back side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be brought closer to the bulging portion 524R formed on the right wing member 520R.

In other words, the bulges 524L, 524R formed on the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, so either the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R is The game ball rolling toward the winning opening can be rolled (pushed) to a position that matches the bulges 524L, 524R formed on either the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. .

Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled toward the back side (pushed together) and substantially coincides with the bulge 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. It can be made into a position. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball is rolled toward the front side (pushed together) and approximately coincides with the bulge 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. It can be made into a position.

This prevents the game ball from riding on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other left wing member 520L or right wing member 520R when the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on either the side surface 526L or the side surface 526R is high. It can be suppressed.

Here, in the conventional winning a prize opening unit 500, since the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the first electric accessory 520 are formed as smooth surfaces, the game ball thrown from one of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown from the other one. There is a problem in that the ball rides on the wing members 520L, 520R and is thrown from the tip of the other wing member 520L, 520R into the downstream region.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is formed with bulges 524L and 524R at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball rolled from one wing member is It can be rolled to a position that substantially coincides with the bulges 524L and 524R formed on the other wing member in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by causing the game ball rolling on one wing member 520L, 520R to collide with the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the other wing member 520L, 520R, the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L, It is possible to prevent the ball from riding on the ball 526R and being thrown into the game area from the tips of the wing members 520L and 520R.

Next, the recessed portion 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27(a). FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). Note that in FIG. 28(a), the first electric accessory 520 is shown in the first state, and in FIG. 28(b), the first electric accessory 520 is shown in the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portion 511b2 formed on the second protruding portion 511b of the front base 511 is arranged inside the recessed portions 525L, 525R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, respectively. .

Further, in the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the concave portions 525L, 525R on the side of the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are in contact (see FIG. 28(a)). In the second state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the recessed portions 525L, 525R on the side opposite to the bulged portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are in contact with each other.

That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 comes into contact with the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R. By doing so, the amount of displacement can be regulated.

Furthermore, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axes of the through holes 521L, 521R causes the corners of the feather members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R to move toward the second prize opening 140 side due to their own weight. It is considered to be the direction of rotation. Therefore, the engagement portions 511b2 and the ends of the recessed portions 525L, 525R on the side of the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are brought into contact, so that the wing members 520L, 520R rotate by their own weight. In addition, the wing members 520L and 520R can be held in the first state.

In addition, in the first state, since the ends of the concave portions 525L, 525R on the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side are brought into contact with the engaging portions 511b2, the bulging portions of the wing members 520L, 520R The side surfaces of 524L and 524R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Therefore, the rigidity of the abutting portions can be increased by the amount that the bulging portions 524L, 524R are formed, so it is possible to suppress damage to the wing members 520L, 520R due to abutting the engagement portions 511b2.

That is, this embodiment includes a base member 510 that rotatably supports the wing members 520L and 520R, and the base member 510 prevents the rotation of the wing members 520L and 520R by coming into contact with the wing members 520L and 520R. Since the regulating engagement portion 511b2 is provided, and the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the wing members 520L, 520R are brought into contact with the engagement portion 511b2 of the base member 510, damage to the wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed. That is, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are portions that protrude from the wing members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R), the portions of the wing members 520L and 520R whose rigidity is relatively high are connected to the base member 510. Since it can be used as a stopper that is brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are formed such that their side surfaces are substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the wing members 520L, 520R, and in the closed state, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the wing members 520L, 520R. Since the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R that are formed together are in contact with at least the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the portion (the bulging portion 524L) that is far from the rotation axis (through holes 521L and 521R) , 524R) can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the reaction force input from the engaging portion 511b2 to the wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. Also, for example, the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is spaced apart from the second prize opening 140, compared to the case where the protruding tip surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. This makes it possible to secure a space that serves as a flow path to the second winning opening 140. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the proximal side surfaces of the wing members 520L and 520R may also be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and damage to the wing members 520L, 520R can be further suppressed.

When the wing members 520L, 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are arranged below the upright portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (lower in FIG. 28(a)). In other words, the upright portion 511b1 is arranged between the opposing bulges 524L and 524R.

Here, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are arranged at a position where the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L, 526R in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the bulging portions 524L, 524R are provided protruding from the side surfaces 526L, 526R, the height of the bulging portions 524L, 524R is increased to prevent the game ball from being caught between the bulging portions 524L, 524R. It becomes necessary to arrange the pair of wing members 520L, 520R further apart, and the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R increases.

On the other hand, this embodiment includes an upright portion 511b1 located between the opposing bulges 524L and 524R in the closed state, and the pair of wing members 520L and 520R have the bulge 524L when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. , 524R are not formed, the opposing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the bulges 524L and 524R is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced.

That is, even if the pair of wing members 520L, 520R begin to close (start to transition to the closed state) while the game ball is guided (rolling) along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, the bulging portions 524L, By positioning the upright portion 511b1 between the opposing bulges 524R, the game ball can be discharged from between the bulges 524L and 524R, and the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the bulges 524L and 524R. . The game ball ejected from between the opposing bulges 524L and 524R by the upright portion 511b1 is located between the opposing sides 526L and 526R in a region where the bulges 524L and 524R are not formed. Since the opposing interval at such a position is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball will not be pinched (see FIG. 27(a)). As a result, the spacing between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced. In other words, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be disposed in a space equivalent to the space required for a conventional product in which the bulging portions 524L, 524R are not protruded from the side surfaces 526L, 526R.

On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 521L521R rotates the corners of the wing members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R downward in the direction of gravity due to their own weight. be done. Therefore, the engagement portion 511b2 and the ends of the concave portions 525L, 525R on the side opposite to the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) come into contact with each other, so that the wing members 520L, 520R are free from their own weight. Rotation can be suppressed and the wing members 520L and 520R can be held in the second state.

Therefore, the displacement of the wing members 520L, 520R can be regulated at locations other than the above-mentioned drive section 533d and projections 523L, 523R, so damage to the drive section 533d and projections 523L, 523R can be suppressed. Therefore, since there is no need to make the parts large in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533, the rotating member 533 can be made smaller. As a result, the drive unit 530 can be downsized.

In addition, in the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is located lower in the direction of gravity than the lower ends of the side surfaces 526L and 526R, and is located higher in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the second winning opening 140, so the side surfaces 526L, The game ball guided by 526R can be thrown to the upper surface of the upright portion 511b1, and by rolling the upper surface of the upright portion 511b1, the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 (FIG. 28(b) )reference).

Furthermore, as described above, the base member 511f equipped with an LED that irradiates light to the wing members 520L, 520R side (second winning opening 140 side) is arranged on the second protrusion 511b. As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the first state, the recessed portions 525L and 525R are located on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 511f can be easily made to enter the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R.

That is, by irradiating the LED light onto the recessed portions 525L and 525R, it is possible to suppress the LED light from being reflected on the outer surfaces of the wing members 520L and 520R. As a result, it is possible to easily allow light to enter the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the inside of the wing members 520L, 520R toward the player can be increased. As a result, the wing members 520L and 520R can be easily seen by the player even through the front base 511 formed from a transparent material.

Furthermore, when the wing members 520L, 520R are in the second state shown in FIG. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning hole 140 can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f.

That is, the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L, 525R are located at substantially the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L, 521R, thereby increasing the gap between the opposing first electric accessories 520. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning opening can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f. As a result, even through the front base 511 formed from a transparent material, the game ball entering the second prize opening 140 can be easily recognized by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the manner in which the prize opening unit 500 is arranged on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in range XXIX in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, the winning a prize opening unit 500 is arranged at a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76.

A first out port 71 is formed inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 to collect game balls flowing down the conventional game area. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 is formed with a curved portion 76a that is curved with a larger curvature than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to facilitate gathering of game balls.

Therefore, the gap between the winning opening unit 500 and the inner rail 76 is increased at the lower end portion of the inner reel (the portion where the curved portion 76a is formed). As described above, the front base 511 and the back base 512 of the winning a prize opening unit 500 are fastened together by diagonally inserting a screwdriver or the like into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511.

The through hole 511b4 is formed in the second protrusion 511b formed at approximately the center position of the front base 511 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 can be located above the curved portion 76a (upper side in FIG. 29). Therefore, when inserting a screwdriver or the like diagonally into the recessed part 511b3 from below the front base 511, the gap between the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved part 76a can be used, so the front base can be inserted from the front side of the game board 13. 511 can be easily attached and detached from the rear base 512.

In addition, since the interior of the recessed portion 511b3 is made difficult for the player to see due to the inner rail 76, the player's interest may be reduced if the player sees the screws etc. that connect the front base 511 and the back base 512. can be restrained from doing so.

Next, the decorative pattern display device 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36.

First, the configuration of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. 30(a) is a front view of the decorative pattern display device 800, and FIG. 30(b) is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative pattern display device 800, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative pattern display device 800. 33(a) is a front view of the inner reel 811 developed, and FIG. 33(b) is a front view of the outer reel 821 developed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative symbol display device 800 includes an inner reel unit 810 configured to be rotatable, an outer reel unit 820 that accommodates a part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. and a housing unit 880 that houses the outer reel unit 820 therein, a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the housing unit 880 and rotates the inner reel unit 810, and a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the housing unit 880 and drives the outer reel unit 820. It mainly includes a drive motor KM2 that rotates and a backlight unit 830 disposed inside the inner reel unit 810.

The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 disposed at one end of the opening of the inner reel 811 (on the left side in FIG. 30(a)), and a rotating member 812 of the inner reel 811. and an annular member 813 disposed on the other end side of the opening (right side in FIG. 30(a)).

The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a belt-shaped sheet made of transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the inner reel 811 has decorative symbols arranged at equal intervals with the longitudinal direction oriented vertically. Note that the inner reels 811 of the three decorative symbol display devices 800 arranged in parallel have different arrangements of decorative symbols.

The rotating member 812 connects a hub 812a formed in a substantially disk shape, a rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape with a larger diameter than the hub 812a, and an outer circumferential surface of the hub 812a and an inner circumferential surface of the rim 812b. It is formed mainly of spokes 812c.

The hub 812a and the rim 812b have respective axes formed in the same straight line, and are arranged at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spokes 812c are formed to be inclined in the axial direction toward the radially outer side of the hub 812a.

The rim 812b is a portion to which one end side of the inner reel 811 is attached to its outer circumferential surface, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner reel 811. In other words, the distance dimension in the circumferential direction at the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812b is set to be approximately the same as the dimension in the longitudinal direction of the unfolded inner reel 811. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be disposed (attached) on the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without any gaps.

The hub 812a is arranged inside the inner reel 811. That is, the spokes 812c that connect the hub 812a and the rim 812b are formed so as to be inclined toward the other end of the opening of the inner reel 811 (an annular member 813, which will be described later) as they go radially inward. Thereby, the hub 812a can be placed inside the inner reel 811. Furthermore, the spokes 812c are formed from a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and include inner openings 812c1 that open between circumferentially adjacent spokes 812c.

The hub 812a is located at approximately the same position in the axial direction as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. Thereby, a space closer to the annular member 813 than the hub 812a can be secured. A drive motor KM1 that applies rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810 is connected to the hub 812a.

In the drive motor KM1, the thickness of the inner reel 811 in the axial direction is approximately half of the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. As described above, the hub 812a is located at approximately the same position in the axial direction as the center position in the left-right direction of the inner reel 811, and is located at the inner portion of the opening of the inner reel 811 on the other end (ring member 813) side. Since the space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be disposed inside the inner reel 811. As a result, the dimensions of the inner reel unit 810 and the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

Further, the drive motor KM1 has a rotating shaft coaxially arranged in a straight line with the axis of the hub 812a. That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As described above, since the axis of the hub 812a and the axis of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the inner reel 811 can be rotated about the axis of the inner reel 811 by rotation of the drive motor KM1. Thereby, the symbols decorated on the inner reels 811 can be visually recognized by the player as being displaced in the vertical direction.

The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape with an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the rim 812b. The inner peripheral surface of the annular member 813 on the other end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (the right side in FIG. 30(a)) is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.

Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed from a transparent resin sheet as described above, its rigidity is relatively low. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it may be deformed by the centrifugal force or wind pressure of the rotation, making it impossible for the player to accurately recognize the symbols decorated around it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the inner reel 811 has the rim 812b of the rotating member 812 connected to one end and the annular member 813 connected to the other end, so that the inner reel unit 810 can rotate. In this case, the centrifugal force and wind pressure make it difficult to displace. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, the player can accurately recognize the symbols decorated around the inner reel 811.

Furthermore, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the load on the inner reel 811 can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor KM1 when rotating the inner reel unit 810 can be reduced. As a result, rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can be started smoothly.

The outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape, a hub 823 formed in a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer reel 821, and one end side of the opening of the outer reel 821 (FIG. 30(a)). ) left side) and spokes 822 that connect the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

The outer reel 821 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the inner reel 811 and a width dimension in the axial direction to be larger than the axial direction dimension of the inner reel 811 . Furthermore, the inner reel 811 is made of a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. Note that the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 is decorated with a pattern, and the decoration mode will be described later.

The hub 823 is arranged so that its axis is coaxial with the outer reel 821 and is arranged at approximately the center of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. Further, a drive motor KM2 that provides rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820 is connected to the hub 823.

The spokes 822 are formed to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the radially outer side of the hub 823, so that one end side of the opening between the spokes 822 and the outer reel 821 (left side in FIG. 30(a)) A space can be created between the two. Furthermore, the spokes 822 are formed from a plurality of rod-like bodies extending from the hub 823 to the edge 824, and include openings 822a that open between spokes 822 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction.

In the drive motor KM2, the thickness dimension of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction is approximately half of the axial dimension of the outer reel 821. As described above, the hub 823 is located at approximately the same position in the axial direction as the center in the left-right direction of the outer reel 821, and has a space at one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left in the left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)). , most of the drive motor KM2 can be disposed inside the outer reel 821. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

The housing unit 880 is formed into a box-like body with an open front side, and can house the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 therein. The storage unit 880 mainly includes a pair of left and right side walls 881, and an upper wall 882, a lower wall 883, and a back wall 884, which are disposed at the edges between the pair of side walls 881 facing each other. It is formed.

The side wall portion 881 is formed from a plate-shaped body that is substantially rectangular in side view, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30(a)), and has a larger outer diameter than the outer diameter in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 30(b)). It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the left-right direction).

A drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 is disposed on the right surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 30(a)), and on the right side in front view (left side in FIG. 30(a)). ) A drive motor KM1 that drives the inner reel unit 810 is disposed on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 (right side). That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced with respect to the side wall portion 881.

Further, the side wall portion 881 includes a bulge portion 881a that bulges out in a curved shape corresponding to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 on the front side surface. Thereby, light emitted from the backlight unit 830 (described later) can be prevented from escaping from the left and right outer sides of the inner reel 811.

Moreover, the side wall portion 881 is formed from a metal material. Thereby, the rigidity of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. Further, by being formed from a metal material that generally has higher thermal conductivity than a resin material, heat generated inside the accommodation unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the accommodation unit 880. As a result, it is possible to prevent parts from being broken due to heat accumulating inside the housing unit 880.

The upper wall part 882 and the lower wall part 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the storage unit 880, and the upper part (upper part in FIG. 30(b)) of the side wall part 881 and the lower part (in FIG. 30(b)) along the edges of the lower part).

The width dimension of the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is smaller than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction (axial direction). Thereby, the distance dimension between the opposing sides of the side wall portions 881 can be secured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be arranged between the opposing sides.

Further, a plurality of through holes are formed in the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883, which penetrate in the radial direction with respect to the axis of the outer reel 821. Thereby, the fluidity of air between the inside and outside of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from accumulating inside the accommodation unit 880, and it is possible to suppress parts from being broken due to the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

The back wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms the side surface on the back side of the storage unit 880, and is disposed along the edge of the back side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)) of the side wall portion 881.

The back wall portion 884 has an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position intersecting the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(b)), and both left and right end portions where the opening 884a is formed. and an upright portion 884b bent toward the front side.

The width of the opening 884a in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is larger than the width of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. Thereby, when the outer reel 821 moves (swings) in the front-rear direction due to the inertia of rotational movement, vibration, etc., it is possible to suppress the outer reel 821 from colliding with the back wall portion 884.

That is, when the outer reel 821 is operating (swinging) in the front-rear direction due to the inertia of the rotation operation, vibration, etc., a part of the rear side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)) of the outer reel 821 is closed to the opening 884a. can be inserted inside. As a result, the outer reel 821 can be prevented from colliding with the rear wall portion 884.

Further, the opening 884a can improve the fluidity of air between the inside and outside of the housing unit 880. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from remaining inside the accommodation unit 880, and it is possible to prevent parts from being broken due to the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

Here, if an opening 884a that is larger than the width in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 is formed in the back wall portion 884, the rigidity of the back wall portions 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a becomes low. Therefore, there was a risk that the rear wall portion 884 would bend.

Further, in this case, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a by increasing the distance between the opposing sides of the side wall portions 881. There was a problem in that the unit itself of the device 800 became large.

In contrast, in this embodiment, upright portions 884b are formed on both left and right sides of the rear wall portion 884 at the position where the opening 884a is formed. Thereby, the rigidity of the rear wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, bending of the rear wall portion 884 can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, the back wall portion 884 is formed of a metal material, and the distance from both left and right ends of the opening 884a to both left and right ends of the back wall portion 884 is made sufficiently small. Therefore, the rate of plastic deformation when forming both the left and right ends of the back wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, rigidity can be increased.

The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from inside the inner reel 811 in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the symbols on the inner reel 811, and is disposed on the front inner side of the inner reel 811.

The backlight unit 830 is formed into an arc shape when viewed from the side, and the axis of the arc is coaxial with the axis of the inner reel 811. Further, the width dimension of the backlight unit 830 in the axial direction is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the inner reel 811 in the axial direction.

Further, the length L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to have a length equivalent to three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, which will be described later.

Further, in the backlight unit 830, three recesses 831 are arranged in parallel in the circumferential direction on the outer circumferential surface and are recessed inward in the radial direction. Therefore, between each of the recesses 831, a partition plate 832 is formed, which stands upright on the outside of the backlight unit 830 in the radial direction.

A base member 833 including an LED for emitting light is disposed on the radially inner side surface of each recess 831, and the LED can emit light toward the outer side of the backlight unit 830 in the radial direction.

Electric power can be supplied to each base member 833 independently, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, each base member 833 is arranged in a region (recess 831) surrounded on four sides, so that the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 enters the front region of the other base member 833. can be restrained from doing so. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause the inner reel 811 to partially emit light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be explained. 33(a) is a front view of the inner reel 811 developed, and FIG. 33(b) is a front view of the outer reel 821 developed.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), a plurality of symbols are drawn on the inner reel 811 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). Note that, as described above, the circumferential dimension L5 of one symbol is set to one third of the circumferential length L4 of the backlight unit 830 (L5×3=L4).

Furthermore, the inner reel 811 is entirely formed of a material that can transmit light. In particular, the light transmittance of the pattern portion (for example, the display of "7") is set higher than that of the surrounding blank area. Therefore, by irradiating light from the LED of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811, the light from the LED can pass through the inner reel 811 and make the symbol part stand out. Therefore, if the LEDs of the backlight unit 830 are set to emit light, the inner reels 811 can be illuminated even if the inner reels 811 are not irradiated with outside light (light inside the store or light from other LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10). The symbols can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, ten symbols of five types are drawn consecutively in the circumferential direction, and a maximum of three symbols can be visually recognized from the player side by a segment display device 600, which will be described later. As described above, each decorative symbol display device 800 is decorated with symbols arranged in a different manner, and the player can see up to nine symbols.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3×3 symbols using the inner reel 811, thereby setting a total of 5 active jackpot lines, 3 horizontally parallel and 2 diagonally crosswise. be done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three "7" symbols line up on any of the active lines, the player can be informed of the occurrence of a jackpot state.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the outer reel 821 includes a non-decorative surface 821a that is not decorated, and a non-transparent surface 821b that is decorated so as not to transmit light.

The non-decorative surface 821a is not decorated so that light can pass therethrough. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (in this embodiment, a transparent resin material), a non-decorative surface 821a through which light can pass is formed. Note that the non-decorative surface 821a only needs to be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and for example, may be provided with a semi-transparent decoration that can transmit light.

The decorative symbol display device 800 allows the player to visually recognize the symbols on the inner reel 811 arranged inside the outer reel 821 by rotating the outer reel unit 820 and turning the non-decorative surface 821a toward the player. can. That is, the player can visually recognize the symbols on the inner reels 811 through the non-decorative surfaces 821a of the outer reels 821.

The non-transparent surface 821b is made non-transparent to light by applying black decoration to the outer circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 (on the near side in FIG. 33(b)). Further, the non-transparent surface 821b is formed so that its length in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)) is equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811.

As described above, in this embodiment, three symbols on the inner reel 811 can be displayed on the player side. Therefore, by setting the length of the non-transparent surface 821b in the circumferential direction to be equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, the player can rotate the outer reel unit 820 to expose the non-transparent surface of the outer reel 821 to the player. By arranging it on the side, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side.

Note that the length of the non-transparent surface 821b in the circumferential direction is not limited to three or more symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, but is limited to a length in the circumferential direction that makes the decoration of the inner reel 811 invisible from the player side. It is sufficient if the length is formed. That is, it is sufficient that the non-transparent surface 821b is formed for the circumferential length of the inner reel 811 that can be viewed from the player side.

Further, the non-transmissive surface 821b includes a transmissive region 821b1 that can partially transmit light, and a pattern 821b2 decorated with a pattern.

The transmission area 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 33) when viewed from the front. The transmission area 821b1 is a part that displays 7 segments by being combined with a segment display device 600 to be described later, and can partially transmit the light passing through the inner reel 811 to the player side. This makes it possible to form part of a 7-segment display to be described later.

The symbols 821b2 are formed with a circumferential length equal to three of the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, and the outer reel is arranged so that three symbols 821b2 of each decorative symbol display device 800 are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. By stopping 821, the player can be informed of the occurrence of a jackpot condition.

Further, as described above, since the area around the symbol 821b2 is non-transparent, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the symbols on the inner reel 811 stop on the active line while producing an effect in which three symbols of the symbols 821b2 line up. Therefore, after the player is made to look at the outer reel 821 due to the rotation performance of the outer reel 821, the player can be made to look at the inner reel 811 almost at the same time as the performance on the outer reel 821 ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in range XXXV of FIG. 34. 36(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and FIG. 36(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 812 taken along the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the opposing inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820. Further, a predetermined gap is formed between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 protruding radially from one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 (left side in FIG. 34). A gap is formed.

A hub 812a of the rotating member 812 is formed with a protrusion 812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, they are formed on an extension line of the spokes 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a chevron shape with both sides inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the protrusion 812a1.

Here, conventionally, a first reel (outer reel unit 820) formed to be rotatable and a reel arranged approximately concentrically inside the first reel (outer reel unit 820) and formed to be rotatable. A gaming machine equipped with a second reel (inner reel unit 810) (that is, equipped with a double reel structure) is known. There is also a known technique for cleaning the display surface of the reel by removing dust attached to it by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. There is.

However, the dual reel structure has a problem in that it is difficult to clean. That is, in the double reel structure, there is a space between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)) to arrange the rotating brush described above. Therefore, the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel and the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

That is, since the opposing space between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 is formed narrowly, in order to remove dust (dust) that has entered and stuck between the opposing surfaces, it is necessary to display a decorative pattern. The device 800 is difficult to clean because it requires disassembly.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the protrusion 812a1 can push out air and generate wind. The pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the opposing gap between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

In this case, the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 is narrower than the space on the inner circumferential side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a. 824 and the space on the inner circumferential side of the hub 812a to the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the present embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape and an edge 824 projecting radially inward from one side of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. 810 is formed into a cylindrical shape and has an outer surface facing the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined interval. It includes a hub 812a whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the edge 824 at a predetermined interval, and the protrusion 812a1 is erected from the outer surface of the hub 812a toward the inner surface of the edge 824, so that the inner surface of the edge 824 and Wind pressure is generated by displacing the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction between the outer surface of the hub 812a and the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 is made to flow using this wind pressure. be able to. Thereby, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

Here, if an opening is formed in at least one of the edge 824 or the hub 812a, or if a part of the circumferential direction is partially separated, there is a gap between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes from the openings and the divided parts, which weakens the wind pressure and causes the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 to flow accordingly. It becomes difficult to do so.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the edge 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a continuous surface in the circumferential direction, so that the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a are By displacing the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction between the two, the wind pressure generated can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be made to flow more easily. As a result, the gap between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 is created by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. This allows the air to flow more easily.

Further, the protrusion 812a1 partially narrows the opposing distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811. Therefore, the projection 812a1 can easily change the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate wind by utilizing changes in atmospheric pressure, and the wind is caused to flow between the opposing surfaces of the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, thereby causing the inner reel 811 to generate wind. Dust (dirt) stuck to the outer circumferential surface or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

To explain in detail, air has a property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure, and by narrowing the distance between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820, the pressure is partially increased. be able to. Therefore, the air pressure in the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, where changes in air pressure are less likely to occur, is reduced between the opposing tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. is lower than the atmospheric pressure of As a result, air can be easily sent to the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, and dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. can.

Furthermore, since the atmospheric pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 facing each other can be increased, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 812a1 from displacing (wobbling) toward the edge 824 or the edge 824 toward the protrusion 812a1. It can be suppressed.

Further, since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in the spoke 822 that supports the edge 824 and the spoke 812c that supports the hub 812a, the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 can be used to Air between the inner surface of the portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be exhausted to the outside (or air can be drawn in from the outside between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a). That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air can flow (outflow or inflow) between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a accordingly. As a result, the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 are connected by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. This allows the air between them to flow more easily.

Further, a protrusion 812a1 is provided upright on the hub 812a (crotch edge 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820), and the spoke 822 (or spoke 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed in the outer opening 825, the effect of reducing flow resistance by taking in (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825 can be easily achieved. That is, when rotating one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 on which the protrusion 812a1 is erected, the other one on which the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 is formed is stopped. , resistance to air flow (exhaust or intake) through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

The outer reel 821 is formed to be slightly inclined radially outward (with its diameter expanded) from the edge 824 (one end) side to which the spokes 822 are connected toward the other end side. Therefore, it is possible to easily send air flowing from one end side to the other end side between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of air flowing between the opposing surfaces of the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped. can prevent sticking.

Furthermore, the inclination angle θ1 of the spokes 812c from the axis of the inner reel 811 to the outside in the radial direction is made larger than the inclination angle θ2 of the spokes 822 from the axis of the outer reel 821 to the outside in the radial direction (θ1>θ2). Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) where they overlap in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 34), they face each other outward in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 34). The dimension in between is increased.

Therefore, by rotationally displacing one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the difference in the distance between the opposing spokes 812c and 822 causes the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to The wind can be easily generated between the inner circumferential surface and the opposing inner circumferential surface.

To explain in detail, the distance between opposing spokes 812c and spokes 822 is increased toward the radially outer side of inner reel 811 and outer reel 821. Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position where they overlap in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is higher between the opposing spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the radially inner portions of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. be made expensive.

As mentioned above, air has the property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure. Therefore, it is possible to form a flow of air from the radially inner portion toward the radially outer portion. That is, an air flow can be formed from the shaft side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the side between the hub 812a and the edge 824 facing each other. Therefore, air can be easily sent to the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In addition, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the fluctuations in the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, that is, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which rotates more often than the outer reel unit 820. In the production by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

Note that by rotating the inner reel unit 810, the timing for cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is determined without any operation by the player (the game ball is not launched into the gaming area). It is preferable to perform this when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at high speed to generate wind, the switching of the symbols on the inner reel 811 can attract the player's interest.

Further, the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while performing the effect of rotationally displacing the non-transparent surface 821b of the outer reel 821 toward the player. In this case, since the inner reel 811 is made invisible to the player, cleaning can be performed without making the cleaning state visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Further, since cleaning can be performed during the gaming state, the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned even when the game is continued for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dirt such as dust from accumulating on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 63. First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side in front view, a vertical displacement unit 600R disposed on the right side in front view, and left and right vertical displacement units 600L. , 600R are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and the connecting member 601 is fastened and fixed from the back side.

In addition, since the configurations of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R are almost the same, in the following, only the vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side when viewed from the front will be described, and the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R will be explained. Detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be explained with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG. 39(a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39(b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

Note that FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 illustrate a state in which the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable, and a first segment unit 610 and a second segment unit 620 disposed on the left and right sides of the displacement unit 650. The system will be equipped with:

Note that the first segment unit 610 is a unit that can display one segment in the left-right direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit that can display two segments in the left-right direction. be. Furthermore, since the first segment unit 610 is formed by simply halving the second segment unit 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below, and the configuration of the second segment unit 620 will be explained below. A code is similarly given to the first segment unit 610.

Each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R is formed with a first segment unit 610 and a second segment unit 620 arranged differently, and the vertical displacement unit 610C has a second segment unit 620 only on the right side when viewed from the front. In the vertical displacement unit 610R, a second segment unit 620 is disposed on the right side when viewed from the front.

Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the left side when viewed from the front, and display two segments on the right side when viewed from the front. Further, the vertical displacement unit 600C can display two segments only on the right side when viewed from the front. Further, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment only on the right side when viewed from the front. In other words, one segment can be formed on both left and right sides of each vertical displacement unit 600L, 600C, and 600R.

Next, the second segment unit 620 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. 42(a) is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 42(b) is a rear view of the second segment unit 620. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmitting member 621 disposed on the front side, a partition member 622 disposed on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, and a partition member 622 disposed on the rear side of the light transmitting member 621. Mainly includes a plurality of diffusion members 623 disposed on the back surface of the camera, a base member 624 disposed between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and reflection members 625 disposed on both sides of the base member 624. It is formed by

The light transmitting member 621 is made of a translucent light transmitting resin material through which light can pass. The light transmitting member 621 mainly includes a light transmitting portion 621a formed in the shape of an arcuate plate convex toward the front side, and a flat portion 621b continuously formed above and below the light transmitting portion 621a. Ru.

The light transmitting part 621a includes an erected wall 621a1 erected from the left and right ends to the back side, a fastening part 621a2 projecting in an annular shape from the top and bottom ends to the back side, and a fastening part 621a2 extending in the vertical direction at the left and right center position on the front side. The decorative portion 621a3 is formed continuously from the decorative portion 621a3, which is recessed on the back side.

The standing wall 621a1 is formed to stand up from the left and right ends of the light transmitting part 621a on the back side. The dimension between the facing walls 621a1 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of the partition member 622, which will be described later. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a, it is possible to restrict the partition member 622 from moving from side to side.

The fastening part 621a2 is a protrusion that forms a hole in which a reflecting member 625 (described later) is fastened with a screw, and is formed to protrude in an annular shape from the back side of the light transmitting part 621a. Therefore, the reflective member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of the screw into the inner edge of the fastening portion 621a2.

As described above, the decorative portion 621a3 is recessed continuously in the vertical direction at the horizontally central position of the light transmitting portion 621a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the light that passes through the left side when viewed from the front from being reflected inside the decorative portion 621a3 and emitted from the right side when viewed from the front. Note that a detailed explanation of the light passing through the decorative portion 621a3 will be given later.

The plane portion 621b is a plate member for fastening to a base member 660 of a displacement unit 650, which will be described later. The plane part 621b is formed into a plate-shaped body having substantially the same shape in front view as the base member 660, and the displacement unit 650 and the second segment unit 620 are fastened by fastening a screw through the plane part 621b. can do.

Furthermore, an elastic piece 621b1 is formed to protrude from the plane portion 621b and protrudes from the opposite side. The elastic pieces 621b1 are formed to protrude from opposing side surfaces of the pair of upper and lower plane parts 621b, and protrude in a curved shape convex toward the front side. Further, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape with a smaller radius than the light transmitting part 621a, and its protruding tip is attached to the upper wall part 882 or the lower wall of the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside the displacement unit 650. 883. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven, it is possible to suppress the decorative symbol display device 800 from vibrating.

The partition member 622 is made of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is formed into a curved plate shape when viewed from the side. The radius of the curved outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the width in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42) is equal to the width in the vertical direction of the light transmitting portion 621a. is set smaller than. Therefore, the partition member 622 can be disposed with the outer circumferential surface of the partition member 622 in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the light transmitting portion 621a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the partition member 622 has a first recessed portion 622a that is recessed toward the center from both left and right end surfaces (left and right in FIG. 42), and a first recessed portion 622a that is recessed toward the center from the upper and lower end surfaces (top and bottom in FIG. 42). It is formed mainly of a second recessed part 622b provided therein, and a protrusion part 622c projected from the left and right center position on the back side.

Two first recessed portions 622a are formed in parallel in the vertical direction on both left and right sides. That is, the first recessed portions 622a are formed at four locations in the partition member 622.

The second recessed portion 622b is formed by being recessed from both upper and lower ends. The dimension between the opposing ends of the second recessed portions 622b is set to be approximately the same as the vertical separation distance of the fastening portions 621a2 formed on the light transmitting member 621. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting member 621, by inserting the fastening part 621a2 inside the second recessed part 622b, it is possible to suppress the partition member 622 from moving in the vertical direction. .

The protruding portion 622c is formed at the horizontally central position of the partition member 622 and extends in the vertical direction. Further, the protruding portion 622c includes a recessed portion 622c1 formed in the distal end surface of the protruding portion. The width of the recess 622c1 in the left-right direction is larger than the thickness of the base member 624, which will be described later. Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 on the partition member 622, the distal end side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside the recess 622c1. As a result, when arranging the base member 624, the base member 624 can be positioned, and the base member 624 can be prevented from moving in the left-right direction.

The diffusion member 623 is made of a cloudy-white resin material and can diffuse light that enters inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed into a curved plate shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of its outer peripheral portion (front side) is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner peripheral portion (back side) of the partition member 622. Therefore, the diffusion member 623 can be placed on the back side of the partition member 622 in a grounded state.

Further, two diffusion members 623 are arranged vertically in parallel, and two are arranged horizontally at a predetermined distance apart. That is, four diffusion members 623 are arranged on the back side of the partition member 622.

The width dimension of the diffusion member 623 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the dimension between the facing wall 621a1 of the light transmitting member 621 and the protruding portion 622c of the partition member 622. Thereby, when the diffusion member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the diffusion member 623 from moving from side to side.

Further, the diffusion member 623 is formed with a protrusion 623a that protrudes toward the front side, and a recessed portion 623b that is recessed on the back side of the protrusion 623a.

The protruding part 623a is formed in a protruding manner at a position corresponding to the first recessed part 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is inserted into the first recessed part 622a. will be established. Thereby, when the diffusion member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the partition member 622 from shifting in the left-right and up-down directions.

Furthermore, the protrusion distance of the protrusion 623a is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622. That is, the protruding portion 623a is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the protruding tip surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

The recessed portion 623b is formed on the opposite side of the protruding portion 623a (on the back side of the diffusion member 623) in a shape that is slightly smaller than the shape of the protruding portion 623a when viewed from the front. is formed. Thereby, the thickness of the plate of the diffusion member 623 can be made substantially constant, and distortion when molding the diffusion member 623 can be suppressed. Further, by forming the recessed portion 623b in a slightly smaller shape than the protruding portion 623a, the area on the back side of the end of the protruding portion 623a can be increased. Therefore, more light can be incident on the diffusion member 623 from the LED 624a, which will be described later, at the end of the protrusion 623a. As a result, the mode of light that is visible to the player via the diffusion member 623 can be made clearer, and the player's interest can be prevented from decreasing.

The base member 624 is formed from a crescent-shaped plate whose front side is curved, and includes an LED 624a that irradiates light on the side surface. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the recessed end surface of the recessed portion 622c1 formed in the partition member 622. Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 on the back side of the partition member 622, by inserting the base member 624 inside the recess 622c1 of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the base member 624 from shifting in the left-right direction. can.

A plurality of LEDs 624a are disposed on both left and right side surfaces of the base member 624, and the irradiation direction thereof is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624. That is, the direction of light emitted from the LED 624a is the left-right direction. Note that a detailed explanation of the light irradiation from the LED 624a will be given later.

One reflecting member 625 is disposed on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624. The reflective member 625 is made of a white resin material and has an arcuate shape convex toward the front side. Further, the radius of the arc of the reflecting member 625 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the diffusing member 623. Thereby, when the reflecting member 625 is disposed on the back side of the diffusing member 623, the reflecting member 625 and the diffusing member 623 can be grounded.

The reflective member 625 is formed in a plate-like body that is spaced from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the back side toward the front side, and includes an inclined portion 625a that is inclined from the back side toward the front side, and the inclined portion 625a. It mainly includes a plurality of recesses 625b formed in the front side in the vertical direction, and wall parts 625c formed protruding toward the front side at the upper end, lower end, and middle part of the recess 625b. It is formed by

The front side of the inclined portion 625a is a reflective surface 625a1 that reflects the light from the LED 624a of the base member 624 toward the front side, and is formed to be inclined at approximately 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624. As described above, the light irradiation direction of the LED 624a is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624, so the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined with respect to the side surface of the base member 624, so that the LED 624a It is possible to reflect the light emitted from the front side. Note that the manner in which the light from the LED 624a travels will be described later.

The recessed portion 625b is formed in a convex curved shape on the back side. Further, the recessed portion 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, thereby making it possible to make the amount of light from the LED 624a visible to the player via the diffusion member 623 uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the progress of the light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along the line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a). Note that in FIG. 45, a part of the mode of light emitted from the LED 624a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Further, the outer shape of the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed on the left and right rear sides of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 45, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflective surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle). The direction of reflection can be directed outward. In this case, since the reflecting member 625 is formed from a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the space on the opposite side of the reflecting surface 625a1 (the back side of the reflecting member 625) can be increased. Thereby, the end portion of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be placed on the back side of the second segment unit 620.

Here, a rotation device (decorative pattern display device 800) is formed to be rotatable and a plurality of rotation cylinders are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and at least one of the rotation cylinders is arranged along between the plurality of rotation cylinders. A decorative member (light transmitting member 621) whose portion is light transmitting, and a substrate (base member 624) disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted. A game machine is known in which a board is arranged with a surface on which means is mounted substantially perpendicular to the back surface of a decorative member. According to this gaming machine, not only can the space between the spinning drums be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern can be formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light from the light emitting means that has passed through the decorative member. It is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to visually recognize the pattern of the decorative member integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, the board is arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member, so the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently directed onto the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there was a problem that the production effect was insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means is made small while the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is made large, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotation drum will be hindered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflecting member 625 that reflects the light emitted from the LED 624a to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is provided, so that the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. Even if the base member 624 is disposed in the same orientation, it is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 with the light emitted from the LED 624a. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Further, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that a sense of unity can be created between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side of the outer circumferential surface of the decorative pattern display device 800, and extends its outer edge to a position overlapping the outer circumferential surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 when viewed from the front. Since the decorative pattern display device 800 is formed to extend, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible). Further, since the pattern of the light-transmitting member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be brought closer to each other, the pattern of the light-transmitting member 621 It is possible to easily create a sense of unity between the display device 800 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Furthermore, the reflecting member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, thereby forming a region on the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and a pattern on the light transmitting member 621. Since the back surface of the reflective member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 as it goes from the light transmitting member 621 toward the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a The back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is brought close to the outer circumferential surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 while ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed). The decorative pattern display device 800 can be moved to the back side (the decorative pattern display device 800 can be brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible), and a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Further, since the LED 624a is mounted on both the one side surface and the other side surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on one side surface and the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on the other side surface are different from the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on the one side surface. Different patterns can be independently formed (displayed) on the light transmitting member 621 depending on the light emitted from the LED 624a.

In this case, the number of base members 624 disposed between the decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged in parallel can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the base member 624 can be suppressed, the decorative pattern display device 800 can be moved deeper into the back side of the light transmitting member 621 (the decorative pattern display device 800 can be moved closer to the base member 624). be able to) As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible), and a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Furthermore, as described above, since the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflective surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle), The direction of reflection can be directed outward. Thereby, the reflective member 625 can be made smaller (compared to the case where the reflective surface 625a1 is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624). Therefore, the space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 can be secured accordingly. As a result, the second segment unit 620 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be placed close to each other, so that it becomes easier to form a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a side view of the base member 624. FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along the line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42(a).

As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed into a square shape when viewed from the side, and can emit light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged at intervals of an inclination angle θ1 in the circumferential direction about an axis that is substantially the same as the curved axis on the front side of the base member 624. Thereby, the heat accumulated in the base member 624 due to the irradiation of the LED 624a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base member 624 from becoming partially heated and damaging the LED 624a.

Note that in this embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are distributed in the circumferential direction. Further, the LED 624a is arranged in such a direction that one side of the square light emitting surface is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the base member 624.

Here, a substrate (base member 624) on which a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted, and a transmitting member (light transmitting member 621) that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are conventionally provided. A gaming machine is known in which a light transmitting portion 621a) of a transmitting member 621 is formed in a curved manner and a plurality of light emitting means are arranged along the curve of the transmitting member. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals when the transparent member is viewed from the front. That is, the light emitting means are equally spaced along the direction of the line segment (chord) connecting both ends of the curved line (arc) formed by the plurality of light emitting means. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the distance between some of the plurality of light emitting means and adjacent light emitting means is narrowed, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. Therefore, heat is concentrated on some light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the LEDs 624a are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between each LED 624a and the adjacent LED 624a can be constant, and the distribution of the heat emitted by the LEDs 624a can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on some of the LEDs 624a, thereby increasing the lifespan of each LED 624a.

As shown in FIG. 47, one recess 625b is formed on the back side (right side in FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. Further, the separation distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of the first recess 625b is set to be the same.

Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of inclination θ1. Therefore, the distance between the LEDs 624a in the vertical direction is narrower on the center side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) than on the outer side in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light reflected by the reflective member 625 and irradiated to the player side increases toward the center in the vertical direction (the center in the vertical direction becomes darker), making the light uniformly visible to the player. The problem was that it could not be done.

In other words, when a plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals along the curve of the light transmitting portion 621a (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction), the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at unequal intervals when the light transmitting portion 621a is viewed from the front. It will be arranged as follows. That is, in a front view of the light transmitting portion 621a, a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is narrow and a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a reflecting member 625 is provided that reflects the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmitting portion 621a, and the reflecting member 625 has a plurality of recesses 625b partitioned corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. Since the division widths of the plurality of recesses 625b in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a are set to be approximately the same, the amount of light of each recess 625b visually recognized in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a can be approximately the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a can be made uniform.

That is, since the separation distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of the first recess 625b is set to be the same, the player The area of light emitted to the side can be made substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light irradiated to the player side can be suppressed from increasing toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, the light can be uniformly visible to the player.

In addition, since the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular shape (square) when viewed from the front, it is possible to ensure light diffusivity (light can be emitted at a wider angle) than when the light emitting surface is circular, for example. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in the first concave portion 625b.

Note that the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the light emitting surface having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front means that the shape of the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front) is rectangular.

Furthermore, at least a part of the plurality of LEDs 624a is arranged in such a direction that one side of the light emitting surface is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the light transmitting portion 621a, so that the light emitted from the LED 624a is transmitted to the light transmitting portion 621a. This makes it easier to spread the particles uniformly along the curvature of the surface. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

Further, the recess 625b is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the light transmitting section 621a and is recessed toward the side away from the rear surface of the light transmitting section 621a, so that the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is located between the opposing light transmitting section 621a and the recess 625b. Since the base member 624 faces the light transmitting portion 621a, it is possible to arrange the base member 624 in a position perpendicular to the light transmitting portion 621a. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit including the light transmitting portion 621a, the base member 624, and the reflecting member 625 can be increased. In this case, since the recess 625b is arranged to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED 624a from a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the recess 625b is transmitted to the back surface of the light transmitting part 621a. can be made uniformly incident on the target. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the mode of light emitted by the LED 624a will be described. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In addition, in FIG. 48, the light irradiated by the LED 624a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and is also illustrated with the reference numeral of irradiation region SR1.

As shown in FIG. 48, by emitting light from the LED 624a, the first segment unit 610 is irradiated with light from two irradiation regions SR1 arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). Further, the second segment unit 620 is irradiated with light from the irradiation areas SR1 arranged in a 2×2 pattern vertically and horizontally. Note that the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light transmitting member 621.

Therefore, by using the irradiation area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620, it is possible to display both the left and right sides of numbers in a 7-segment display. Note that the upper, lower, and center positions of the numbers in the 7-segment display will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Note that FIGS. 49 and 50 show the disassembled state of the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 includes a pair of left and right base members 660, a displacement member 670 rotatably supported by the base members 660, and a displacement member 670 disposed on the base member 660. The displacement member 670 mainly includes a drive means 680 for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.

The base member 660 is formed from a pair of left and right plate members having a space in the center that is larger than the decorative pattern display device 800 described above. Furthermore, a first segment unit 610 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front, and a second segment unit 620 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the right side when viewed from the front. Note that the base members 660 are arranged vertically and horizontally oppositely on the left and right sides, and in this embodiment, only the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front will be described, and a description of the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front will be omitted.

The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the side, and includes a protrusion portion 661 that curves and protrudes from the front side surface in a convex shape toward the front side. The base member 660 also has a through hole 662, through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 is inserted, which is disposed at one end (upper end) in the vertical direction, and a connection hole 662, which is disposed at both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction. An insertion hole 663 through which a rod 681 is inserted, a recess 664 in which a displacement member 670 (described later) is supported, a sliding groove 665 formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the recess 664, and a sliding groove 665 located above and below the recess 664. and an engaging portion 666 that protrudes into the venue.

The radius of the protruding tip of the protruding portion 661 is set to be smaller than the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the reflecting member 625 described above, and its curved axis is set to be substantially colinear with the curved axis of the reflecting member 625. Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are arranged on the base member 660, it is possible to suppress the protrusion 661 and the reflective member 625 from coming into contact with each other, and the heat of the base member 624 is Intrusion between the opposing base members 660 can be suppressed. As a result, the temperature of the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside the opposing base member 660 increases, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that rotationally drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be prevented from being broken.

The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and the gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. Set. Therefore, the drive motor KM3 can be disposed on the base member 660 with the gear 682 connected to the drive motor KM3. Note that the drive motor KM3 is attached to the base member 660 from the opposing side of the base members 660 arranged to face each other.

The through hole 662 is a hole into which a connecting rod 681 of a driving means 680 to be described later is inserted, and is formed larger than the external shape of the connecting rod 681 and is formed at both upper and lower ends of the base member 660.

The recessed portion 664 is formed in a circular shape recessed outward from the opposing side of the base member 660 . The recess 664 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of a connecting protrusion 671b of a displacement member 670, which will be described later. Thereby, the connecting protrusion 671b can be inserted and disposed inside the recess 664.

By inserting the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 into the sliding groove 665, the displacement member 670 and the driving means 680 disposed outside the pair of base members 660 can be connected. Further, by inserting the connecting protrusion 671b into the sliding groove 665, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided. Therefore, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposite side of the base member 660 so that its tip has a gap larger than the diameter of the opposite side surface of the base member 660 and one end of a torsion spring SP1 to be described later. Thereby, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engaging portion 666.

The displacement members 670 are arranged in opposite directions in a pair of upper and lower positions. The displacement member 670 is formed from an extending member 671 whose one end is pivotally supported by the base member 660, and a decorative unit 672 connected to the other end of the extending member 671.

The extension members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape, and are arranged in pairs with left and right opposite directions. The extension member 671 has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction at one end of the longitudinal side, a connecting protrusion 671b protruding leftward and rightward at a substantially central position on the longitudinal side, and a shaft support hole 671a extending from the side surface of the longitudinal side. The extension member 671 mainly includes a protrusion 671d projecting in the circumferential direction, and an elastic member 671f made of an elastic material and disposed on the side surface of the extension member 671.

The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. Therefore, by inserting the collar C into the shaft support hole 671a and fastening and fixing the collar C inside the recess 664 of the base member 660 with a screw, the displacement member 670 is rotatably connected to the base member 660. can.

Further, by arranging the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 on the same axis, and by inserting the collar C into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastening and fixing it to the base member 660, the upper and lower A displacement member 670 is arranged to be rotatable on the same axis.

Furthermore, the left and right extending members 671 are formed with a bulging portion 671a1 that bulges outward in the left-right direction around one of the shaft support holes 671a. The outer diameter of the bulged portion 671a1 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the recessed portion 664 of the base member 660. Further, the bulging portions 671a1 are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670.

That is, in this embodiment, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the right shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side, the right shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side is formed. , is placed inside the bulge 671a1. On the other hand, the left shaft support hole 671a has a bulging portion 671a1 formed in the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side, so that the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side supports the left shaft support hole 671a. The hole 671a is placed inside the bulge 671a1 (see FIG. 49).

Thereby, the collar C allows the bulge 671a1 to be inserted into the recess 664 when the displacement member 670 is disposed on the base member 660. As a result, when a force is applied in the radial direction of the shaft of the shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670, the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner peripheral surface of the recessed portion 664 come into contact with each other, so that the shaft support hole 671a or Damage to the collar C can be suppressed.

That is, in this embodiment, since the pair of displacement members 670 are disposed coaxially with the base member 660, the axial length of the collar C is increased accordingly. Therefore, when a force is applied in the radial direction to the rotating shaft of the displacement member 670, a large force tends to act on the rotating shaft. Therefore, although the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is easily damaged, the force acting in the radial direction on the rotational shaft of the displacement member 670 is maintained by the contact between the bulged portion 671a1 and the recessed portion 664. can do. As a result, damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

A through hole 671d1 that penetrates in the longitudinal direction of the extending member 671 is formed in the protrusion 671d. The through hole 671d1 is a hole into which torsion springs SP1 and SP2, which will be described later, are inserted, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

The elastic member 671f is disposed on a side surface of an extending member 671 on the side in which a pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, which will be described later, approach each other. Further, when the upper and lower extending members 671 are disposed close to each other, the sizes are set so that the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f are in contact with each other. Thereby, it is possible to absorb the impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to adjacent positions.

The drive means 680 is means for transmitting the power of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670. The drive means 680 includes a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, a large-diameter gear 683 that meshes with the gear 682, and a rod-shaped body with one end connected to the side surface of the large-diameter gear 683 and the other end. a first link member 684 that is connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 that transmits power to the opposite side through the base member 660, and a cam member 685 that is connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotates; The second link member 686 is formed into a rod-shaped body, one end of which is rotatably connected to the cam member 685, and the other end of which is connected to the displacement member 670.

As described above, the gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

The large-diameter gear 683 is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the side, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface that meshes with the gear 682, and a protrusion 683b that protrudes in an annular shape from the side surface in the rotation axis direction. It is formed by Since the gear surface 683a of the large diameter gear 683 meshes with the gear 682, the large diameter gear 683 is rotated when the gear 682 is rotated. That is, it is rotated by rotationally driving the drive motor KM3.

The protrusion 683b is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683. Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The first link member 684 is formed into a rod-shaped body, and insertion holes 684a and 684b are formed at both ends thereof to pass through in the left-right direction.

The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 683b. A protrusion 683b is inserted into the insertion hole 684a, and the tip of the protrusion 683b is fastened with a screw whose head has a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a, so that the first link member 684 can be rotated into the large diameter gear 683. Can be linked in the state.

The insertion hole 684b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The first link member 684 can be rotated to the displacement member 670 by inserting the connecting projection 671b into the insertion hole 684b and fastening the tip of the connecting projection 671b with a screw whose head has a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in a state.

Therefore, when the large diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced around the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683 due to the rotational displacement of the large diameter gear 683, and the projection 683b is rotated. The first link member 684 connected to one end is displaced, and the displacement member 670 connected to the other end of the first link member 684 is displaced.

One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted into the insertion hole 663 of the base member 660 disposed on the left side in front view, and is fitted into the rotating shaft portion of the large diameter gear 683. On the other hand, the other end of the connecting rod 681 is connected to a cam member 685. Therefore, the connecting rod 681 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3, and the cam member 685 is rotated.

The cam member 685 is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the side, and the connecting rod 681 is fitted into the shaft portion thereof. The cam member 685 also includes a protrusion 685a that protrudes outward in an annular shape from its axial side surface. The protrusion 685a is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis of the cam member 685. Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The second link member 686 is formed to have the same shape as the first link member 684, which is horizontally reversed. The second link member 686 includes insertion holes 686a and 686b at both longitudinal ends thereof.

The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the protrusion 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 685a. The protrusion 685a is inserted into the insertion hole 686a, and the tip of the protrusion 685a is fastened with a screw whose head has a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a, so that the second link member 686 can be rotated by the cam member 685. You can connect with .

The insertion hole 686b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670 by inserting the connecting projection 671b into the insertion hole 686b and fastening the tip of the connecting projection 671b with a screw whose head has an outer diameter larger than the inside diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in a state.

Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced around the rotational axis of the cam member 685 as the cam member 685 is rotated, and one end is attached to the protrusion 685a. The connected second link member 686 is displaced, and the displacement member 670 connected to the other end of the second link member 686 is displaced.

That is, this is performed by displacing the displacement member 670, the first link member 684, and the second link member 686. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, it is possible to suppress tilting when the displacement member 670 is displaced. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

Next, the displacement member 670 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. 51(a) is a front view of the displacement member 670, and FIG. 51(b) is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member 670 taken along the line LIII-LIII in 51(a).

As described above, the displacement member 670 includes an extension member 671 rotatably supported by the base member 660 and a decoration unit 672 connected to the extension member 671.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extension member 671 includes a connecting portion 671c formed in a plate shape on the shorter side (the connecting side of the decorative unit 672). A stepped portion 671c1 that partially protrudes in a step-like manner is formed on the surfaces of the pair of left and right extension members 671 where the connecting portions 671c face each other. The stepped portions 671c1 are formed alternately on the left and right, and the stepped portions 671c1 are engaged with each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Thereby, dimensional errors can be absorbed when the extending member 671 is molded.

The decoration unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that emits light inside and emits light to the player side. The decoration unit 672 includes a back cover 673 disposed on the back side, a front cover 676 covering the back cover 673 and disposed on the front side of the back cover 673, and the back cover 673 and the front cover 676. It is formed mainly of a base member 674 disposed between opposing sides of the base member 674, and a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 disposed between the base member 674 and the front cover 676.

The back cover 673 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a connecting portion 671c of the extension member 671 is fastened to the back side. Thereby, the decoration unit 672 and the extension member 671 can be fastened together.

Further, the back cover 673 is made of a resin material that is difficult to transmit light (non-transparent). The back cover 673 includes a reflecting portion 673a that is recessed and formed on the back side at a position facing a diffusion member 675, which will be described later.

The reflective portion 673a is formed at the lower edge of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and its inner surface is painted white with high light reflectivity. Thereby, the light irradiated to the inside of the reflection part 673a can be reflected inside the reflection part 673a and irradiated to the diffusion member 675 side.

The front cover 676 has substantially the same shape as the rear cover 673 when viewed from the front, and is disposed to cover the front side of the rear cover 673. Further, the front cover 676 is made of a resin material that can transmit light, and can emit light emitted from a first LED 674a and a second LED, which will be described later, to the front side (player side).

The base member 674 is formed into a laterally elongated rectangular plate-shaped body that is smaller than the back cover 673 when viewed from the front. On the front side of the base member 674, there are first LEDs 674a that are arranged side by side on the lower edge in the left and right direction and emit light to the diffusion member 675 side, and are arranged above the first LED 674a and emit light to the lens member 677. A second LED 674b that emits light.

The first LED 674a is disposed at a position facing the upper end of the diffusion member 675, and is disposed so as to be able to irradiate light downward to the base member 674. Thereby, the light emitted from the first LED 674a can be suppressed from entering the lens member 677, which will be described later. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side via the diffusion member 675 and the light emitted to the front side via the lens member 677, thereby preventing the player's interest from being lost. It can be suppressed.

The second LED 674b is arranged above the first LED 674a. Therefore, the light from the second LED 674b can be made to enter the lens member 677 disposed above the diffusion member 675.

The diffusion member 675 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the lower end of the front cover 676 on the back side. The diffusion member 675 is made of a cloudy-white resin material that can diffuse the light incident therein. Thereby, the light emitted from the first LED 674a and incident on the diffusion member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform throughout and emitted to the front side (player side).

The lens member 677 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the upper end of the front cover 676 on the back side. The lens member 677 is made of a transparent resin material and has a plurality of protrusions formed on the back side (not shown). Thereby, the light emitted from the second LED 674b can be easily made to enter the inside through the protrusion on the back side. As a result, even if the amount of light emitted from the second LED 674b is reduced, the light can be made to enter the lens member 677, and the light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the mode of light emitted by the first LED 674a to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 will be described. FIG. 54 is a front view of the displacement member 670. In addition, in FIG. 54, the area of light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and is also illustrated with the reference numeral irradiation area SR2.

As shown in FIG. 54, the area of light emitted toward the player by the first LED 674a has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction at the lower end of the decoration unit 672 (front cover 676). Since the displacement member 670 is disposed at both the upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, the displacement member 670 forms the irradiation region SR2 at a position separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Therefore, the irradiation areas SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 can display upper and lower numbers in a 7-segment display.

Next, the seven segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. In addition, in FIGS. 55 and 56, a state in which the transparent area 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated toward the player side is illustrated, and the irradiation area SR1, the irradiation area SR2, and the transmission area 821b1 are illustrated with two-dot chain lines. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 55, the irradiation areas SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are formed in two lines in the vertical direction and six lines in the left and right direction. It is said to be in a state of

The irradiation area SR1 is formed as a set of four lights with the decorative pattern display device 800 sandwiched between them, and three sets of the lights are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Between one set of irradiation regions SR1, irradiation regions SR2 are arranged above and below, and a transmission region 821b1 is arranged at an intermediate position between the upper and lower sides. Therefore, the seven irradiation regions SR1, SR2 and the transmission region 821b1 can display numbers in seven segments.

As described above, three sets of four radiation areas SR1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, so each set forms a 7-segment display. That is, three 7-segment displays are arranged side by side in the left and right direction.

Therefore, numbers can be displayed on the 7-segment displays arranged in parallel in the left-right direction as valid lottery lines for jackpots in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the segment "7" can be displayed on all 7-segment displays). ) Thereby, it is possible to display not only the jackpot by the above-mentioned decorative symbol display device 800 but also the jackpot by the 7-segment display. As a result, the player can view a plurality of display formats, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Here, the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are curved in a convex shape toward the front side, so that the player cannot visually recognize the display of the seven segments. At this time, the display at the center in the vertical direction closer to the player becomes larger, and the display at both ends in the upper and lower direction farther from the player becomes smaller. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was not possible for the player to clearly see the display of the numbers in seven segments.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the width of the 7-segment display in the left-right direction is gradually increased from the vertical center position toward the upper and lower ends. This makes it possible to uniformize the overall display of the seven segments at the upper and lower ends and at the upper and lower center positions. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment numbers displayed.

Further, the 7-segment display formed on both the left and right sides is formed such that the center portion in the vertical direction is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. This allows the player to clearly see the seven segment displays formed on both the left and right sides.

That is, the player's viewpoint is normally located at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the segment display device 600 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is located in front of the seven segments displayed in the center. Therefore, due to the curved shapes of the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620, the 7-segment display is viewed by the player in a curved manner as the distance from the player's viewpoint to the left and right increases. Since the center portion of the 7-segment display in the vertical direction is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction, the 7-segment display is curved and difficult to visually recognize from the player's viewpoint. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment display.

Next, the displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIGS. 57(a) to G01(c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 58(a), FIG. 59(a) and FIG. 60(a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 58(b), FIG. 59(a) and FIG. 60(b) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG.

Note that in FIGS. 57(a), 58(a), and 58(b), the displacement member 670 is shown in a retracted state, and FIGS. 57(b), 59(a), and 59 In (b), the displacement member 670 is shown in an intermediate state, and in FIGS. 57(c), 60(a), and 60(b), the displacement member 670 is shown in an extended state. The condition is illustrated.

In addition, the retracted state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the displacement members 670 disposed in a pair of upper and lower sides are spaced apart from each other upwardly and outwardly, and the extended state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the displaceable members 670 disposed in an upper and lower pair are separated from each other. The member 670 is in contact with each other at an intermediate position between the upper and lower sides, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed between the retracted state and the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, in the position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state, the displacement member 670 disposed in the upper part (upper part in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower By positioning the link member 684 and the second link member 686 upward, the decorative unit 672 is positioned upward with the shaft support hole 671a as the rotation axis.

Further, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above is engaged with the through hole 671d1 at the base end portion on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). It is said that Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the displacement member 670 to maintain the state in which the decoration unit 672 is disposed on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

On the other hand, the displacement member 670 arranged in the lower part (lower part in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower parts has the shaft support hole 671a because the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are located in the lower part. The decorative unit 672 is positioned below as a rotating shaft.

Further, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed below is engaged with the through hole 671d1 at the base end portion on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). It is said that Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, the decorative unit 672 can be easily displaced upward in the direction of gravity by the displacement member 670.

In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the opposing decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player's side in the vertical direction.

When rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM3 from the state shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, the large diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. As a result, the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are displaced to approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Therefore, the displacement member 670 connected to the insertion holes 684b and 686b of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 671a, and the state shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 59 is displaced to the states shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60.

As shown in FIG. 57(b) and FIG. 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the intermediate state position, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above passes through the displacement member 670. The engagement position with the hole 671d1 is an intermediate position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP1, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than at the engaged position in the retracted state.

Further, similarly to the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is set on the other end side (the position where the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is inserted into the through hole 671d1). side). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP2, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than at the engaged position in the retracted state.

In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than that in the retracted state is formed between the facing decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. . In this case, one symbol decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed to the player.

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 670 from the retracted state in which three symbols are displayed vertically to be decorated on the inner reel 811, to the intermediate state in which one symbol is displayed in the vertical direction to be decorated on the inner reel 811. , it is possible to create a plurality of performance modes, thereby increasing the player's interest. Further, by displaying one figure side decorated on the inner reel 811 in the vertical direction, it is possible to draw the player's attention to one symbol. Therefore, it is possible to clarify the part to which attention should be drawn, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

As shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above passes through the The engagement position with the hole 671d1 is the tip position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP1, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the intermediate engagement position.

Further, similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side has its engagement position with the through hole 671d1 on the other end side (inserted into the through hole 671d1). This is the tip position of the opposite side). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP2, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the intermediate engagement position.

That is, the biasing force of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear with the displacement of the displacement member 670. Thereby, depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670, the necessary biasing force can be easily applied from the torsion springs SP1 and SP2. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

In the extended state, the decoration units 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are brought into contact with the vertical displacement unit 600L at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. In this case, the decorative unit 672 is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 800, and the display of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be made invisible from the player side (front side).

Therefore, by setting the displacement member 670 in the extended state, rotating and displacing the inner reel unit 810 and outer reel unit 820, and then displacing the displacement member 670 to the intermediate state or the retracted state, the symbols are aligned to the player ( It is easy to create a sense of anticipation (a lottery was held for a jackpot). As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

Note that in the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair of upper and lower positions are displaced by the same amount, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the two drive motors KM3 provided is rotated. In this way, only one side of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 can be displaced to an intermediate position or an extended position.

Further, the maximum displacement amount of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is not set at an intermediate position, but can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. 60. That is, it can be vertically displaced while the pair of displacement members 670 are in contact with each other.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. 61 to 63 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Note that in FIGS. 61 to 63, transition states of the displacement member 670 are sequentially illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the displacement member 670 disposed above the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670 are given a suffix U, and The displacement member 670 disposed on the side and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670 will be described with a letter D added to the end of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the vertical displacement unit 600L, extending members 671 of the displacement member 670 are disposed on both left and right sides. The pair of extension members 671 have a driven side to which the driving force of the drive motor KM3 is transmitted via the connecting rod 681, and a driving side to which the driving force of the drive motor KM3 is transmitted by the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683. connected to either one.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the displacement members 670 arranged vertically are displaced, the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, the decorative units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction with their side surfaces in contact with each other. .

Here, a first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) and a first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) which are disposed facing each other and are formed to be movable in the direction toward or away from each other, and are also formed to be movable in the same direction with opposing sides in contact with each other. A gaming machine equipped with two displacement members (decoration unit 672D) is known. According to this gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to each other to a position where their opposing sides abut, an object located on the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, , a liquid crystal display device or a presentation member) and displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be visually recognized. You can perform a performance that In addition, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is possible to maintain the shielding of the object. , it is also possible to perform a presentation (a presentation that draws attention to the operation of removing the mask) before the mask is removed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is difficult to bring the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other due to the dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members, and the space between the opposite sides There was a problem that a gap may be formed between the two. When a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can see the object on the back side through the gap, which impedes the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base member 660 is provided with a driving means 680U and a driving means 680D that displaceably support the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D, respectively, and the driving means 680U is supported. The opposite side of the decorative unit 672D is biased toward one side of the opposite side of the decorative unit 672U and is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the decorative unit 672D that is in contact with one side of the opposite side of the decorative unit 672U. Since the supporting manner of the driving means 680D is biased to one side, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, the supporting manner of the driving means 680U and the supporting manner of the driving means 680D are different. They can be biased to opposite sides (sides rotated by 180 degrees around the centers of one side and the other side of the opposing sides). Thereby, the opposite sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides (see FIG. 63).

In this embodiment, since the number of disposed components is different on one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction), the driving force transmitted to the left and right sides of the decoration unit 672 is different, and the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are , one's more rigid side (lower side) can face the opponent's less rigid side (higher side). Therefore, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other on the side with higher rigidity, and pushes the other on the side with lower rigidity. Then, you can create a state of accepting (retreating) the other person. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

The drive means 680U is a drive motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that connect the decorative unit 672U to the base member, and transmits the drive force of the drive motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U, respectively. The driving means 680D includes a first link member 684U and a second link member 686U that have different configurations from each other. The decoration unit 672U and The opposing sides of the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of gaps between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D may be on the side where the driving force is larger or on the side where the driving force is transmitted earlier, for example. In addition to pushing the opponent (moving forward), it is possible to create a state in which the opponent is accepted (retreating) on the side where the driving force is smaller or when the driving force is transmitted later. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Further, the extension member 671U and the extension member 671D are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D, and the other end side rotates coaxially with the base member 660. Since the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other, even if the bias of the support mode is used, the opposing sides are not in contact with each other. This makes it easier to maintain contact.

Further, an elastic member 671f made of a rubber-like elastic material is provided on the extending member 671U or 671D, and when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other on opposite sides, the elastic member 671f is made of a rubber-like elastic material. Since the body is interposed between the extending member 671U and the extending member 671D in an elastically compressed state, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. Even when using bias in the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

Further, as described above, the driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extending members 671U that are driven by the driving motor KM3U and connects the decorative unit 672U to the base member 660, and The driving means 680D includes two torsion springs SP1 that apply different urging forces to the pair of extension members 671U, and the driving means 680D is driven by a driving motor KM3D that generates driving force and a decorative unit 672D. and two torsion springs SP2 that apply different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671D, so that the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are opposed to each other. The sides can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of gaps between opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other party on the side where the urging force is large, and also The side with less power can form a state of accepting (retreating) the other party. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Note that the two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration. That is, the biasing forces applied to the pair of extension members 671U may be made different by different positions where the biasing forces are applied or by different amounts of elastic deformation. The same applies to the two torsion springs SP2.

Further, the drive means 680U includes a drive motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that are driven by the drive motor KM3U and connects the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and the pair of extension members 671U. The driving means 680D includes a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the decorative units 671U, and a drive motor KM3D that generates a driving force. 660, and a second biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of extension members 671D, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are connected to each other. can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of gaps between opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D, for example, pushes (advances) the other on the side where the biasing force is applied, and , it is possible to form a state in which the side to which the biasing force is not applied accepts (retreats) the opponent. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

As described above, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671U, and the other leg is connected to the base member 660, and exerts a biasing force in the direction of bringing the decorative unit 672U closer to the decorative unit 672D. Since the torsion spring SP1 is provided, when displacing the decoration unit 672U in the direction approaching the decoration unit 672D, the driving force of the drive motor KM3U required to rotate the extension member 671U is applied to the torsion spring SP1. It can be assisted by a biasing force. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position where it is separated from the decoration unit 672D to the contact position where it is in contact with the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be smoothly started.

In this case, as the extending member 671U is rotated in a direction that brings the decorative unit 672U closer to the decorative unit 672D, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extending member 671U or the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 changes. Since at least one of the connection positions with the base member 660 is spaced apart from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where force is applied becomes longer, and the decoration unit 672U is attached in the direction closer to the decoration unit 672D. power can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when stopping the decoration unit 672U brought close to the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be reliably stopped, and damage caused by a collision can be suppressed. Furthermore, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, thereby increasing the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement. It is possible to improve the production effect.

On the other hand, the torsion spring is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671D, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and applies a biasing force in the direction of bringing the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U. As the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction of bringing the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connecting position of one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other position of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. Since at least one of the connection positions between the leg and the base member is spaced apart from the winding portion, the torsion spring SP2 exhibits the same effect as the torsion spring SP1. In particular, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed in both, which is particularly effective. Furthermore, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are arranged at the same height (arranged in the direction of gravity), and the position where they contact each other is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity, and the position where they are separated from each other. (Retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the direction of gravity, the configurations of torsion spring SP1 and torsion spring SP2 are particularly effective.

Since the decoration unit 672U is brought closer to the decoration unit 672D by being displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the lower the decoration unit 672U is located in the direction of gravity, the more the biasing force is applied in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity. can be made stronger (that is, the higher the decoration unit 672U is located in the direction of gravity, the weaker the urging force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity can be).

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the decorative unit 672U from a stopped state upward in the direction of gravity, the displacement (raising) can be smoothly started, and when stopping the raised decorative unit 672U, can reliably stop the displacement not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the urging force. As a result, damage to the decoration unit 672D due to collision can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the decoration unit 672U that has been displaced (descended) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened to counteract the action of gravity that attempts to continue the downward movement. I can do it. As a result, the decoration unit 672U can be reliably stopped.

A torsion spring SP2 is formed as a torsion spring, has one leg connected to the extension member 671D, and the other leg to the base member 660, and applies a biasing force in a direction to separate the decoration unit 672D from the decoration unit 672U. Since the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, when the decoration unit 672D is displaced in the direction away from the decoration unit 672U, that is, the decoration unit 672D is moved upward in the direction of gravity. When it is necessary to displace (raise) the extension member 671U, the driving force of the drive motor KM3D necessary to rotate the extension member 671U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671D is rotated in a direction that brings the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 changes. Since at least one of the connecting positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where force is applied becomes longer, and the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U (in the direction of gravity) is The biasing force in the upward direction can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement is reduced. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

Next, the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a chevron shape that slopes on both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. The formed protrusion 2812a is formed in a curved hemispherical shape. Note that the same parts as in the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

64(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 2812 taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64(a). Note that FIG. 64(a) corresponds to FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIG. 64, a protrusion 2812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 2812a1 is curved into a bowl shape. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, thereby flowing into the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Furthermore, since the protrusion 2812a1 of the second embodiment is curved into a bowl shape, its rigidity can be higher than that of the protrusion 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated and wobbles and the tips of the protrusions 2812a1 come into contact with the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820, damage to the protrusions 2812a can be suppressed.

Next, the outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812, but in the second embodiment, the protrusion 3824a is formed on the edge 824. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the third embodiment, FIG. 66(a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66(b) is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the third embodiment. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 taken along the line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, a protrusion 3824a that protrudes toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810 is formed on the edge 824 on the extension line of the spoke 3822 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusion 3824a is formed at the outer end (on the outer reel 821 side) of each spoke 3822.

The protrusion 3824a is formed so that both sides thereof are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Furthermore, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the opposing inner reel unit 810, thereby flowing into the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. However, the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment The protrusion 4812a formed on the hub 812a is formed to be inclined with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67 is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 68(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 4812, and FIG. 68(b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 4812 taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a projection 4812a1 that projects toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is formed in such a manner that its longitudinal direction intersects with the radial direction of the hub 812a. That is, the protrusion 4812a1 is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end to the radially inner end of the hub 812a. Further, the direction of inclination is inclined toward the normal rotation direction of the inner reel unit 810.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Further, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed so as to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end to the radially inner end of the hub 812a, and the direction of the inclination is the same as the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810. Since the inner reel unit 810 is positioned on the direction side, wind can be easily generated by the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, since at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810, Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the fluctuations in the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, that is, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which rotates more often than the outer reel unit 820. In the production by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Next, the inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. In the first embodiment, the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are formed to be inclined toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward, but in the fifth embodiment In this case, the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are formed to be inclined toward the opposite side from the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment. 70(a) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70(b) is a sectional view of the annular member 813 taken along the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70(a). Note that in the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment, the backlight unit 830 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in the inner reel unit 5810 in the fifth embodiment, the spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 are inclined toward the opposite side from the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward. It is formed by Therefore, the inclination direction of the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the inclination direction of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetrical.

Further, a protrusion 5813a is formed to protrude from the surface of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810 that faces the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 70). A plurality of protrusions 5813a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813.

The protrusion 5813a is formed in a mountain shape that slopes on both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Furthermore, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, thereby flowing into the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800, the distance between the opposing sides (between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820) As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 cannot be sufficiently cooled, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 break down. There was fear.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the protrusion 5813a can generate a flow of air flowing between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel. This makes it easier to take in air from both the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800. Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, so that failure of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be suppressed.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 812a1 is formed only on the inner reel unit 810, but in the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 6812a1, 6824a is formed on the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. . Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 71 is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device 800 in the sixth embodiment. 72(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG. 72(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 6812 taken along the line LXXIIb-LXXIIb in FIG. 72(a). 73(a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73(b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 73(a).

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, a protrusion 6812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Further, the protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a chevron shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

A protrusion 6824a that protrudes toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed on the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Further, the protrusion 6824a is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.

The protrusion 6812a1 is formed on the inner side of the rotating member 6812 in the radial direction than the protrusion 6824a. This can prevent the protrusion 6812a1 from colliding with the protrusion 6824a when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, wind can be generated by the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a. That is, wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820.

Further, in this case, the air pushed out by either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can collide with the other of the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the air flow can be further restricted. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the flow of air flowing between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a are provided on the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a at different positions in the radial direction, so that the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 Regardless of which of the two is rotated, wind pressure can be generated by displacing the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. Therefore, when the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Slanted surfaces are formed on surfaces of the projection 6812a1 and the projection 6824a that face each other in the radial direction. Thereby, air resistance when air flows in the radial direction can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to easily blow away the dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick.

Further, the circumferential spacing of the protrusions 6812a1 and the circumferential spacing of the protrusions 6824a are different. Thereby, the position where the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction can be shifted. Therefore, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction, so that the positions where air is compressed can be distributed to a plurality of positions. As a result, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction and air is compressed, so that the rotational speeds of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be prevented from being slowed down.

Next, the rotating member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. In the first embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is driven symmetrically in the same manner, but in the seventh embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is driven differently on the left and right sides. Ru. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 74(b) is a side view of the rotating member 7533.

As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 has two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, which are arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and a connecting portion 533a between opposing ends of the rotating member 7533. It is connected and formed by. Further, the plate-like bodies disposed at both the left and right ends are bent at substantially L-shape in a side view at different bending angles. In the seventh embodiment, the bending angle of the L-shape of the plate-like body formed on the left side when viewed from the front is set larger than the bending angle of the L-shape of the plate-like body formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

Therefore, the driving portion 7533d formed in a recessed manner on the other end side of the rotating member 7533 (left side in FIG. 74(b)) is formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right sides. Further, the driving part 7533d has a concave width (width in the vertical direction on the left side of FIG. 74(b)) larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 523 formed on the first electric accessory 520, and the inside of the driving part 7533d The protrusion 523 is formed to be slidable.

In addition, the width dimension of the rotating member 7533 in the left and right direction when viewed from the front (the dimension between opposing sides of the outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. Set. Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the rotating member 7533 is set so that the dimension between the opposing left and right plate members is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 7533 (between the two plate members facing each other).

The rotating member 7533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both left and right sides from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes to both left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and The driving portion 7533d is formed by being recessed at the tip of the other end of the L-shape.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 76, a driving mode of the first electric accessory 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 75(a) to 75(c) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520.

In addition, FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a) show the first state of the first electric accessory 520, and FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) show the second state of the first electric accessory 520. FIG. 75(b) and FIG. 76(b) each illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located between the first state and the second state. Further, in FIGS. 75 and 76, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the inside of the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is on the front side (see FIG. 75(a)). left side), and the driving portion 7533d is placed in a lower position. Thereby, the protrusion 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed down, and the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state.

In this case, a gap is created between the inside of the right drive portion 7533d and the upper side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (upper side in FIG. 75(a)). This is because the center of gravity of the right wing member 520R is switched to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521R) when viewed from the front while the protrusion 523R is pushed down to a certain position by the drive unit 7533d to bring the right wing member 520R into the first state. , is formed by rotating the right wing member 520R by its own weight to the first state.

Further, a gap is formed between the inside of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side in FIG. 75(a)).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is ) on the right side), and the drive section 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by pushing the protrusion 523 upward.

In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side in FIG. 75(a)). When the rotating member 533 is rotated (the driving part 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left driving part 7533d and the protrusion 523L is delayed by the gap. Therefore, the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the second state is started earlier.

Next, through the states shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further drawn into the main body portion 531a, the rotating member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the driving portion 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward, and the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the second state shown in FIGS. 76(c) and 76(c).

In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (lower side in FIG. 75(c)). This is because the center of gravity of the left wing member 520L is switched to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521L) when viewed from the front while the projection 523L is pushed up to a certain position by the drive unit 7533d and the left wing member 520L is placed in the second state. , is formed by rotating the left wing member 520L by its own weight to the first state.

Further, a gap is formed between the inside of the right drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (lower side in FIG. 75(a)).

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 520R can be started first, and the left wing member 520L can be displaced to the second state. It can be placed after the right wing member 520R.

The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(c) is the displacement from the first state to the second state described above. Since it is only the opposite, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L can be started first, and the right wing member 520R can be displaced to the first state. It can be placed earlier than the left wing member 520L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the winning hole unit 500 of the seventh embodiment. FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in FIG. 24(b). Moreover, in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L is started first, and , the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the first state is made slower than that of the left wing member 520L.

That is, it is possible to instantaneously create a state in which only the right wing member 520R of the first electric accessory 520 is opened. At this time, when a game ball enters from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is moved to the front side (lower side in FIG. 77(a)) by the bulging portion 524R. will be guided to. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause the game ball to collide with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

Since the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the front side, the game ball that collides with the bulging portion 524L is likely to bounce back toward the back side. Therefore, the game ball entering from the right wing member 520R can be easily entered into the second winning hole 140.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the first state, the left wing member 520L on the side where the bulging portion 524L is formed on the front side and the right wing member 520R on the opposite side By making the displacement later than the left wing member 520L, the game ball that enters during the displacement to the first state can be smoothly thrown to the second winning hole 140.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) is placed in a position forming a closed state, and the timing when the other wing member (The other of the wing members 520L, 520R) is placed at a position that forms the closed state at a different timing, making it difficult to pinch the game ball between the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (side surfaces 526L, 526R). , the distance between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced.

Next, the rotating member 8533 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82. In the first embodiment, the sliding member 532 is provided with the second protrusion 532c that restricts the entry of the game ball, but in the eighth embodiment, the rotating member 8533 restricts the entry of the game ball. A second protrusion 8533e for regulation is formed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532. It mainly includes a first case member 534 in which a member 8533 and a sliding member 8532 are movably disposed, and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534. It is formed.

The sliding member 8532 is formed into a substantially E-shape when viewed from above, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction, and two first pieces protruding toward the front from both left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a. It is formed mainly of a protrusion 532b and a third protrusion 532e located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding toward the front side.

The sliding member 8532 is formed such that the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension between opposing sides in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential surface of the first case member 534. Thereby, the sliding member 8532 can be housed inside the first case member 534.

The third protrusion 8532e is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, which will be described later, so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state can be restricted. That is, the third protrusion 8532e has a lower end surface formed above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

The rotating member 8533 is formed by two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and connected by a connecting part 533a between opposing sides on one end side. Ru. The gap between the two opposing plate-like bodies of the rotating member 8533 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 8533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 8533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is set smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. Ru. Thereby, the rotating member 8533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 8533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both left and right sides from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped in side view, a projection 533b that protrudes to both left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and It is formed mainly by a driving part 533d formed in a recessed manner at the tip of the other end of the L-shape, and a second protrusion 8533e protruding from the left-right center position of the connecting part 533a toward the front side. .

The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending toward the front side, and includes an upright wall 8533e1 bent downward and erected at its protruding tip. The standing wall 8533e1 is curved in a convex shape toward the front when viewed from the side, and its curved axis is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533.

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. 79(a) and 79(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 80(a) and 80(b) are front views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that in FIGS. 79 and 80, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state. 79(a), FIG. 80(a), and FIG. 81(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is different from that in FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. (b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. Further, FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pushed toward the front side (left side in FIG. 79(a)). , the drive section 533d is positioned below. Thereby, the protrusion 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed down and brought into the first state.

Further, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the tip of the upright wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned below. In this case, the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82(a)) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being thrown to the second case member 535.

Further, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is operated to shift to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third protrusion 8532e.

In other words, it is equipped with a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and the transmission mechanism is moved to the open slide position (FIG. 79 ( The sliding member 8532 is slid between the position shown in FIG. 79(a)) and the closed sliding position (the position shown in FIG. Rotation to open the pair of wing members 520L, 520R by being rotated to the closed rotation position by sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the closed slide position, so that at least the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be closed. The standing wall 8533e1 is disposed on the rotating member 8533, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the open rotation position, the standing wall 8533e1 is placed in the allowable position, and the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the closed position. When the standing wall 8533e1 is rotated to the position, the standing wall 8533e1 is placed in the regulating position, the sliding member 8532 is placed in the closed sliding position, and the rotating member 8533 is placed in the closed rotating position. By engaging the member 8532, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted, so it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from entering the second prize opening.

That is, from the closed state of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, for example, by forcibly opening the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from the outside, or by directly operating the rotating member 8533, the rotating member 8533 can be closed. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating member 8533 to the open position, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 restricts the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotating position, thereby restricting the standing wall 8533e1. position (that is, it is possible to prevent the standing wall 8533e1 from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). As a result, the erected wall 8533e1 can prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

Further, a third protrusion 8532e protruding from the sliding member 8532 (or rotating member 8533), and a connecting portion 533a formed on the sliding member 8532 (or rotating member 8533) so as to be able to engage with the third protrusion 8532e. Since the third protrusion 8532e is projected along the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532, the engagement between the third protrusion 8532e and the connecting portion 533a and its It is possible to switch between disengaging and disengaging, and the structure can be simplified.

Note that the engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533) that the third protrusion 8532e can abut, or a hole or a recess into which the third protrusion 8532e can be inserted ( It may be a hole or a recess formed in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533. That is, any structure may be used as long as it can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position by the third protrusion 8532e coming into contact with the connecting portion 533a. In this case, it is preferable that the connecting portion 533a be a hole or a recess. Since the third protrusion 8532e is inserted into the connecting part 533a, the space required for disposing the third protrusion 8532e can be suppressed and the size can be reduced, and by being inserted into the connecting part 533a, This is because the third protrusion 8532e can be shielded from the outside, making it difficult for unauthorized access to the third protrusion 8532e from the outside.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pulled toward the back side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the drive portion 533d is moved upward. Displaced. Thereby, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state in which the protrusion 533b is pushed upward.

Furthermore, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located on the back side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the restriction on rotation of the rotating member 8533 is released. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced by rotating the rotating member 8533.

Therefore, the driving portion 533d of the rotating member 8533 has an open side contact portion 8533d1 that contacts and opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when rotated toward the open rotation position, and an open side contact portion 8533d1 that rotates toward the closed rotation position. Since it is provided with a closing side contact portion 8533d2 that contacts and closes the pair of wing members 520L, 520R when the wing members 520L, 520R are opened, it is possible to suppress the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from being illegally forced open from the outside, and prevent rotation. Unauthorized access to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are externally displaced in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotating member 8533 is pressed by the wing members 520L and 520R, and the rotating member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. Try to turn it towards it. In this case, according to the present invention, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position. It can be regulated by the contact portion 8533d2. That is, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, making it difficult to illegally access the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside.

When the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the rotating member 8533 is rotated to extend from the tip of the upright wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534. The distance dimension L7 (see FIG. 82(b)) is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a description will be given of a case where the first electric accessory 520 is damaged. FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. Note that FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17. Further, FIG. 14(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 14(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first electric accessory 520 are broken from the base end due to fraud or deterioration over time, and the first electric accessory 520 is When the state changes from the state to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, so that the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward. Ru. Therefore, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being thrown to the second case member 535.

Therefore, the arrangement of the upright wall 8533e1 can be maintained at the restricted position in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are closed or in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are opened from the outside. It is possible to suppress the wall 8533e1 from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the second winning hole 140.

That is, in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are closed or in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated to The distance dimension L6 from the lower end (the lower end in FIG. 20(b)) to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. . Therefore, even if the first electric accessory 520 is allowed to throw a game ball into the second winning hole 140 due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball will enter the second winning hole 140 and roll. can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the upright wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (a game ball can be thrown to the second winning hole 140) due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning hole 140. It is possible to easily control the ball being thrown into the ball.

In addition, in this case, since the standing wall 8533e1 that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the second prize opening 140 can be formed in series with the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, the second There is no need for a separate member to prevent balls from being illegally entered into the prize opening 140. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and an increase in manufacturing costs can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, a second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of a game ball and a third protrusion 8532e that suppresses displacement of the second protrusion are integrally attached to the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. Therefore, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

Next, a drive unit 9530 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the movement of the first electric accessory 520 is restricted when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, but in the ninth embodiment, the solenoid When the movable body 531b of 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is movable. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a rotation member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532. It mainly includes a first case member 534 in which the member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 are movably disposed, and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534. It is formed.

The rotating member 9533 is formed by two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and connected by a connecting part 533a between opposing sides on one end side. Ru. The gap between the two opposing plate bodies of the rotating member 9533 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 9533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 9533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. Ru. Thereby, the rotating member 9533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 9533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both left and right sides from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes to both left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and It is formed mainly of a protruding portion 9533d that protrudes toward the front side at the other end of the L-shape, and a second protrusion 8533e that protrudes toward the front side from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 533a.

The protruding portion 9533d is formed to protrude from the front end, and has a length on its upper (upper part in FIG. 84(a)) side surface to which the protrusions 523L, 523R of the wing members 520L, 520R can abut. is set to

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. 84(a) and 84(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 85(a) and 85(b) are front views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that in FIGS. 84 and 85, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state. In addition, in FIGS. 84(a), 85(a), and 86(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is different from that in FIG. 84(b), FIG. 85(b), and FIG. (b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. Furthermore, FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pushed toward the front side (left side in FIG. 84(a)). , the protruding portion 9533f is positioned downward. Thereby, the protrusion 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed down and brought into the first state.

In the ninth embodiment, a biasing spring (not shown) is disposed on the rotating shaft of the first electric accessory 520, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the first electric accessory 520 to move to the first state side. A biasing force for rotational displacement is constantly applied. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state by a force other than the drive of the solenoid 531 (for example, shaking of a pachinko machine), it can be suppressed from remaining in the second state.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pulled toward the back side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the protrusion 9533f is moved upward. is displaced. Thereby, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state in which the protrusion 533b is pushed upward.

In this case, the protruding portion 9533f and the protrusions 523L, 523R of the first electric accessory 520 are always in contact with each other, so that the first electric accessory 520 can be maintained in the second state.

In addition, by projecting the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from the main body 531a from the second state and displacing the protruding portion 9533f downward, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring and 1 state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of a case where the first electric accessory 520 is fraudulently operated. FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. Note that FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17. Further, FIG. 87(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 87(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is operated by a fraudulent act by the player. When changing from the first state to the second state, only the first electric accessory 520 is rotationally displaced.

Therefore, since the tip of the erected wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward, the erected wall 8533e1 causes the game ball to roll on the upper end surface of the erected portion 534b, and the second case member This can prevent the ball from being thrown to 535.

In this case (the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a), the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, as described above. . Therefore, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from operating the standing wall 8533e1. As a result, it is possible to suppress disadvantages to the store due to fraudulent activity by the player.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of game balls and the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses displacement of the second protrusion are integrally attached to the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532. Therefore, the number of parts of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from being damaged due to fraudulent activity by the player. As a result, losses to the store due to fraudulent activity by players can be suppressed.

That is, the ninth embodiment includes a biasing spring that biases the pair of wing members 520L, 520R in the closing direction, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the open rotation position, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R 520R, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the wing members 520L, 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R do not come into contact with the rotating member 9533, and external force due to such forced opening is prevented from being applied to the rotating member 9533. can. As a result, damage to the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, the rotating member 9533, or the sliding member 8532 can be suppressed.

In addition, as a biasing means that constantly applies a biasing force that rotationally displaces the first electric accessory 520 toward the first state, a spring (torsion) that biases the pair of wing members 520L, 520R in the closing direction by an elastic recovery force Examples include not only springs and coil springs, but also magnets that bias the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction with attractive force.

Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is small (or large) displaced in a non-linear manner as the displacement member 670 is displaced, but in the tenth embodiment, the rotating member 10678 is displaced. By doing so, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88(b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of displacement member 10670.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment includes an extending member 671, an extending member 10671 disposed opposite to the extending member 671, and the extending member 10671. The decorative unit 672 is connected to the extending member 671, and the rotating member 10678 is rotatably disposed on the extending member.

The extension member 10671 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 671a that penetrates in the left-right direction when viewed from the front at the end of the longitudinal side, and a shaft support hole 671a that extends outward from the left and right at the approximately central position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side. The rotating shaft 10671e is formed in a cylindrical shape and projects from the connecting projection 671b toward the shaft support hole 671a.

The rotating member 10678 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is disposed on the extending member 10671 so that its longitudinal direction intersects the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side of the extending member 10671 at a substantially right angle when viewed from the side.

The rotating member 10678 has a shaft support hole 10678a penetrating in the left-right direction, a through hole 10678b formed to penetrate in the circumferential direction of the shaft support hole 10671a of the extending member 10671 on one end side in the longitudinal direction, and a through hole 10678b on the other end side in the longitudinal direction. It is formed mainly with an inclined surface 10678c formed by cutting out a side surface of the slanted surface 10678c.

The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotating shaft 10671e of the extending member 10671 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 10671e. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 10671e into the shaft support hole 10677a and screwing it to the rotating shaft 10671e, the rotating member 10678 can be rotatably disposed on the extension member 10671.

The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

Next, the operation of the rotating member 10678 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. FIG. 90 is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91(a) and 91(b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG. 90.

Note that FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 58(b). Moreover, FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b) illustrate the state when the displacement members 670, 10670 are displaced, and FIG. 91(b) shows the state where the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are in contact with each other. A cross section of is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 90, the vertical displacement unit 600L in the tenth embodiment includes a displacement member 670 on the upper side, a displacement member 10670 on the lower side, and the shafts of the displacement members 670, 10670. The axes of the supporting holes 671a are arranged coaxially. That is, in the first embodiment, of the pair of displacement members 670 arranged vertically in opposite directions, the lower displacement member 670 is changed to the displacement member 10670. Note that the driving means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 in the first embodiment, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decoration units 672 of the displacement members 670, 10670 arranged above and below are displaced in a direction toward each other, the extending members 671, 10671 are brought closer to each other.

In a state where the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are in contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91(b), the inclined surface 10678c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extending member 671. As a result, the rotating member 10678 is rotated about the shaft support hole 10678a so that the inclined surface 10678c is approximately parallel to the side surface of the extension member 671 (in FIG. 91(b), the rotary member 10678 is (rotated counterclockwise about hole 10678a).

Therefore, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 10678c and the shaft support hole 10678a is also rotated in the same manner. By displacing the position of the through hole 10678b, the position where the through hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side of the torsion spring SP2 to the base end side. Therefore, the biasing force acting on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are brought into contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670, 10670 are displaced with the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the contact between the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from coming away from each other.

Further, since the extending member 10671 on which the rotating member 10678 is disposed is on the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the driving means 680 that drives the displacement member 10670, the extending member 10671 is driven by the driving motor KM3. When the force is transmitted to the drive side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683), the driving force is reduced, and the displacement of the rotating member 10678 increases the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, thereby increasing the driving force. It can compensate for the lack of power. As a result, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from coming into contact with each other.

Next, a vertical displacement unit 11600L of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. In the first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 670 from both the left and right sides, but in the eleventh embodiment, the driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 11670 from only one side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in FIGS. 92 to 94, similarly to FIGS. 61 to 63, U is added to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 disposed above the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670. At the same time, the displacement member 670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670 will be described with a letter D added to the end of the symbol.

The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. 92 to 94 are schematic diagrams of a vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment. Note that in FIGS. 92 to 94, transition states of the displacement member 11670 are sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is disposed only on one side. That is, in the first embodiment, a pair of extension members 671 are arranged symmetrically on the displacement member 670, but in the eleventh embodiment, the extension members 671 are arranged only on one side. Ru.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the driving means 680 is formed only on the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683), and the extending member 671 is connected to the driving means on the driving side. Therefore, the extension members 671 of the displacement members 11670 arranged in the upper and lower pairs in the vertical displacement unit 11600L are arranged horizontally oppositely in the upper and lower directions.

As shown in FIG. 93, when the displacement members 11670 disposed vertically are displaced, the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing both from the state shown in FIG. 93 in the same direction, the decorative units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction with their side surfaces in contact with each other.

In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, the driving of the decoration unit 672 on the opposite side to the driving side becomes slow, and there is a risk that a gap may be formed between the two decoration units 672. In some cases, the extending members 671 are disposed vertically and horizontally oppositely, so that the end of one decorative unit 672 on the opposite side to the driving side is pushed by the end on the driving side of the other decorative unit 672. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672.

In this case, it is preferable to delay the timing of driving the displacement member 11670 on the side in the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672. By delaying the timing of driving the displacement member 11670 on the side in the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

To explain in detail, the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 is advanced, so that the drive side end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven first becomes the decoration unit that is driven later. The end of 672 opposite the drive side can be pushed out. On the other hand, the end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven first on the opposite side to the drive side is brought into contact with the end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven later on the drive side with a stronger force. As a result, when the two displacement members 11670 are displaced with the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the extending member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is provided on one side, so that the displacement member 11670 (extending member 671) can be easily deformed. Therefore, by advancing the driving timing of the displacement members 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672, the displacement members 11670 (extension members 671) are deformed, and the elastic force when the displacement returns is By using this, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the winning opening unit 500 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the thickness of the front base 511 and the back base 512 of the winning opening unit 500 are formed to be substantially constant has been described, but in the eleventh embodiment, the thickness of the front base 511 and the back base 512 is Partially modified. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 95(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). Note that in FIG. 95(a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent, and in FIG. 95(b), the front base 511 is shown as being opaque. Further, in FIG. 95(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed with partially different thicknesses in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) on the left and right sides with the second winning opening 140 in between. That is, the front side bulge part 12511f that bulges out to the back side is provided at the upper right side of the second winning opening 140.

Further, the back base 512 is formed so that the thickness in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) is partially different on the left and right sides with the second winning opening 140 in between. That is, a back side bulging part 12512d that bulges out to the back side is provided at the upper left side of the second winning opening 140.

The front bulge 12511f and the back bulge 12512d are formed outside the displacement area of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. This prevents the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from colliding with the front bulge 12511f and the back bulge 12512d.

In addition, the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d have their ends in the left-right direction (FIG. 95(b) left and right direction) located on the outside. Thereby, the game ball that flows down from the upstream side of the first electric accessory 520 and may be thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R can surely collide with the front side bulge part 12511f and the back side bulge part 12512d. I can do it.

The front bulge 12511f is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524R in the front-rear direction. In other words, the front side bulge 12511f is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524R in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the rear side bulge 12512d is formed on the side surface of the left wing member 520L opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524L in the front-rear direction. In other words, the back side bulge 12512d is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524L in the front-rear direction.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the front side bulging part 12511f and be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be brought to the back side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R can easily collide with the bulging portion 524R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down on the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the back side bulging part 12512d and be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be brought to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can easily collide with the bulging portion 524L.

Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolling) along the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, if the game ball that entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R), , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the protrusion on the other wing member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) can be prevented from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the ball throwing speed can be slowed down by causing the game balls thrown by the wing members 520L and 520R to collide with the front side bulge portion 12511f and the back side bulge portion 12512d. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the wing members 520L, 520R can be slowed down. As a result, the impact upon collision with the bulges 524L, 524R can be reduced, and damage to the wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a protrusion that protrudes between the opposing front base 511 and rear base 512 of the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 96(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 96(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. 96(a). Note that in FIG. 96(a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent, and in FIG. 96(b), the front base 511 is shown as being opaque. Further, in FIG. 96(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 is formed with a protrusion 13511g on the left side of the second winning opening 140 that protrudes toward the back base 512 side. In addition, the rear base 512 is formed with a protrusion 13512e that protrudes toward the front base 511 on the right side of the second winning opening 140.

The protrusion 13511g and the protrusion 13512e are formed outside the displacement area of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. This prevents the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from colliding with the projections 13511g and 13512e.

The protrusion 13511g is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R on the same side as the formation position of the bulging portion 524R in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512e is formed on the side surface of the left wing member 520L that faces the formation position of the bulging portion 524L in the front-rear direction.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13511g and be guided to the front side. Therefore, when a game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be brought to the front side. As a result, when a game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R, it is difficult to collide with the bulging portion 524R. As a result, damage to the wing member 520R can be suppressed.

Moreover, the game ball thrown from the right side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526R of the wing member 520R is thrown to the side surface 526R without colliding with the protrusion 13511g formed above the wing member 520R. . In this case, the game ball can be guided to the back side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13512e and be guided to the back side. Therefore, when a game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be brought to the back side. As a result, when a game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L, it is difficult to collide with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, damage to the wing member 520L can be suppressed.

Moreover, the game ball thrown from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526L of the wing member 520L is thrown to the side surface 526L without colliding with the protrusion 13512e formed above the wing member 520L. . In this case, the game ball can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L when rolling the side surface 526L.

Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolling) along the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, if the game ball that entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R), , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the protrusion on the other wing member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) can be prevented from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the number of game balls colliding with the bulges 524L, 524R of the wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced by the projections 13511g and 13512e, the durability of the wing members 520L, 520R can be improved.

Next, wing members 14520L and 14520R (first variable device 14520) of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The wing members 14520L and 14520R of the fourteenth embodiment are formed so that the width dimensions of the bulging portions 524L and 524R in the front-rear direction are different from those of the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 97(a) is a perspective front view of a left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member 520R. 98(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500, FIG. 98(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member 520L taken along the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 98(a), and FIG. 98(c) ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member 520R taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 98(b).

Note that, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the perspective directions in the left-right direction are shown reversed. Further, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24(b). In FIG. 98(a), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 14520L has a through hole 521L that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower end in the gravity direction, a recess 522L that is recessed around the through hole 521L from the front side to the back side, and a recess 522L that extends from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back side. A protrusion 523L that protrudes from the side, a recessed portion 525L that is recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface of the through hole 521L, and side surfaces of the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state. 14526L and a bulging portion 14524L protruding from the side surface 14526L.

The side surface 14526L includes an inclined surface 14526L1 that is formed to slope upward from a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 14526L2 that is formed from the substantially central position in the longitudinal direction toward the front side.

The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed to be inclined downward from the back side (left side in FIG. 98(b)) toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side. Thereby, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256L, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526L1 can be guided to the smooth surface 1452L2 side by the downward slope.

Further, the bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)) of the inclined surface 14526L1. The width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-back direction is smaller than half the width of the wing member 14520L in the front-back direction. That is, the width of the bulging portion 15254L in the front-back direction is smaller than the width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-back direction.

As mentioned above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 is rolled toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side, so the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526L The probability that the ball will collide with the bulge 14524L can be reduced.

On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-back direction. The right wing member 14520R has a through hole 521R that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L that is recessed around the through hole 521R from the front side to the back side, and a recess 522L that extends from the vicinity of the through hole 521R to the back side. a protrusion 523R that protrudes from the through hole 521R, a recessed portion 525R that is recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R on the end surface of the through hole 521R, and a side surface 14526R of the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state. and a bulging portion 14524R protruding from the side surface 14526R thereof.

The side surface 14526R includes an inclined surface 14526R1 that is formed to slope upward from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 14526R2 that is formed from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the front side.

The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed to be inclined downward from the back side (right side in FIG. 98(c)) toward the smooth surface 14526R2 side. Thereby, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256R, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526R1 can be guided to the smooth surface 1452R2 side by the downward slope.

Further, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526R1 (on the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). The bulging portion 14524L is formed so that its width in the front-rear direction is larger than half the width of the wing member 14520L in the front-rear direction. That is, the width of the inclined surface 14526R1 in the front-back direction is made larger than the width of the bulge 14524L in the front-back direction. Therefore, the width of the bulge 14524R of the right wing member 14520R in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the bulge 14524L of the left wing member 14520L in the front-rear direction.

As mentioned above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 is rolled toward the smooth surface 14526R2, so the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526R The probability that the ball will collide with the bulge 14524R can be reduced.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is formed in such a manner that the game ball flows down from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 and is easily thrown to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the wing members 520L, 520R in an open state. Ru. To explain in detail, in the pachinko machine 10, the first through gate 66 that opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is arranged on the left side of the center frame 86, and the pachinko machine 10 has a first through gate 66 that opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. It is configured to be launched toward the left side. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game board 13 flows down the left side of the game board 13 as a whole, and is thrown from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (a pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R) to the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R. It becomes easier.

Therefore, compared to the right wing member 14520R, more game balls are thrown to the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, and the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L wears out more quickly, causing the left wing member 14520L to break easily. There was a point.

On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, sloped surfaces 14526L1, 14526R1 are formed on the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R, and bulging portions 14524L, 14524R are formed on the sloped surfaces 14526L1, 14526R1, so that the side where many game balls are thrown is formed. Since the bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are formed small in the front-rear direction, the probability that a game ball collides with the bulging portion 14524L of the wing member 14520L on the side where the ball is thrown the most is reduced, thereby reducing wear of the bulging portion 14524L. This can prevent it from happening too quickly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing members 14520L, 14520R on the side where more game balls are thrown from becoming easily broken.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, a variable prize winning device 15065 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the bulges 524L, 524R are formed on the pair of wing members 520L, 520R has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the bulges 15065b, 15065c are formed on the variable winning device 65. be done. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

99(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 99. FIG. 100(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13, and FIG. 100(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100(a).

Note that FIGS. 99(a) and 100(a) correspond to the partially enlarged view of FIG. 29. Further, FIG. 99 shows a closed state of the variable winning device 15065, and FIG. 100 shows an open state of the variable winning device 15065. In addition, in FIG. 100(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

In addition, the closed state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 formed in a board state is located approximately parallel to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game balls flowing down the gaming area win a specific prize. This is a state in which it is impossible for the ball to enter the opening (large open opening) 65a. On the other hand, the open state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is located approximately perpendicular to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game balls flowing down the gaming area are ) 65a.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed into a plate-shaped body that is elongated from side to side, and is rotatably arranged with respect to the game board 13 around one end on the back side. Further, the variable winning device 15065 is connected to a drive device (not shown) on the back side, and by applying driving force to the drive device, the variable winning device 15065 is displaced between a closed state position and an open state position. It is considered possible.

Furthermore, in the open state, the variable winning device 15065 has two protruding portions 15065b and 15065c formed on the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side. Furthermore, the side surface 15065a of the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed to be inclined downward from both left and right sides toward the center. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side surface 15065a can be rolled toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a side, and can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the end surface on the front side in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 100(b)). The bulging portion 15065c is located on the right side of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the end surface on the back side in the alveolar state (the state shown in FIG. 100(b)).

That is, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are formed on both left and right sides with the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a in between, and are formed at different positions in the front-back direction. As a result, when a game ball is thrown to both the left and right sides of the variable winning device 15065 in the open state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from colliding in front of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a and bouncing back to the left and right sides. .

To explain in detail, the game ball thrown to the left side of the side surface 15065a in front view collides with the bulging part 15065b and is guided to the back side when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a side. Ru. On the other hand, the game ball thrown to the right side of the side surface 15065a when viewed from the front collides with the bulging portion 15065c and is guided to the front side when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a side.

Therefore, the forward and backward position of the game ball thrown from both the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a can be displaced by the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. Therefore, when a game ball is thrown to the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a and the left and right game balls collide in front of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the direction of the rebound (repulsion) can be set in the front-back direction. can. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

Furthermore, when the game ball is thrown from either the left or right side of the side surface 15065a, the game ball collides with one of the bulging portions 15065b or 15065c to displace the position in the front and back direction, so that the game ball is thrown from the side surface 15065a. When rolling in the left-right direction on the front side of the game ball, the game ball can be caused to collide with the other of the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. As a result, the game ball thrown from one side of the side surface 15065a can be suppressed from rolling in front of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a and slipping out to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

The side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and has a pair of bulges. 15065b and 15065c are arranged at positions across the ball entrance in front view, and are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolling) along the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulges 15065b and 15065c, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a.

In addition, one bulging portion 15065b, 15065c and the other bulging portion 15065b, 15065c are positioned in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). By arranging them differently, when a game ball enters the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball is placed between the pair of bulges 15065b and 15065c. or one side. Therefore, a game ball that enters the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 from one side in the width direction (or the other side) passes through the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 and flows out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065. can be restrained from doing so. As a result, the player's interest can be improved by allowing the game ball to enter the specific winning hole (large opening hole) 65a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the engagement between the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 was made possible by the contact between the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third protrusion 8532e, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 is This is done by inserting the third protrusion 16532e into the recess of the portion 533a. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101(a) is a front view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 101(b) is the first electric accessory along the CIb-CIb line in FIG. 101(a). 101(c) is a sectional view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 taken along the line CIc-CIc in FIG. 101(b).

As shown in FIG. 101, a concave portion 16533a1 recessed from the back side toward the front side is formed in the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the sixteenth embodiment at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed into a horizontally long rectangle in rear view.

Further, the third protrusion 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed to protrude at a position facing the above-mentioned recessed portion 16533a1 in the front-back direction. The shape of the third protrusion 16532e when viewed from the front is a horizontally long rectangle that is slightly smaller than the recessed portion 16533a1, and has a tapered tip.

Thereby, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are in the closed state, the third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside the recessed portion 16533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged with each other.

In addition, in this case, since the engaging portion is the recessed portion 16533a1, the space required for disposing the third projection 16532e is suppressed by the amount that the third projection 16532e is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, and the size is reduced. In addition, by being inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, the third protrusion 16532e can be shielded from the outside, making unauthorized access to the third protrusion 16532e from the outside difficult.

Next, a sliding member 15732 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the standing wall 532c1 is located upstream of the sensor device SE1 disposed on the downstream path of the game ball that has entered the second prize opening 140 has been described; In the seventeenth embodiment, a case will be described in which the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged downstream of the sensor device SE1. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIGS. 102(a) and 102(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the seventeenth embodiment. FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that in FIG. 102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown as being transparent. In addition, in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, and in FIGS. 102(b) and 102(b), the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state. The respective states are illustrated. Further, FIGS. 102(a) and 102(b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment has an upright wall 17532c1 protruding from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (lower side in FIG. 102(a)). The standing wall 17532c1 has a tip thereof set at a position exceeding the lower end surface of the second case member 535, and the tip thereof is bent toward the front side.

The length of the standing wall 17532c1 on the front side is such that when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the upper and lower sides are below the sensor device SE1 disposed on the second case member 535. The length is set to the position.

Further, an opening 17535b is formed in the second case member 535 and is formed through the opening 17535b in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103(a)). The second protrusion 17532c is inserted into the opening 17535b.

Further, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-back direction is set larger than the sliding width of the sliding member 17532 that slides in the front-back direction (the driving width of the solenoid 531). Thereby, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction with the second protrusion 17532c inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the upright wall 17532c1 is located downstream of the sensor device SE1, and the game Ball insertion can be regulated. On the other hand, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the erected wall 17532c1 is arranged on the back side of the opening of the sensor device SE1 (the hole that detects the passage of the game ball). Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, a game ball can be inserted therethrough.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a case will be described in which the first electric accessory is forced into the second state due to fraud by the player. FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. Note that FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), respectively. Further, FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state, and FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened due to a fraudulent act by the player. When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the longitudinal position of the sliding member 17532 is the same as in the closed state, similarly to the first embodiment.

Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is forced into the open state, the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game balls entered from the second prize opening 140 are stagnated on the upper surface of the erected wall 17532c1.

In this case, the distance from the sensor device SE1 to the top surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension that substantially matches the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball fixed on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is brought into a state where it is constantly detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, when the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball for a predetermined period of time, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric accessory 520 has been illegally released. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating and to notify the store operator of the player's cheating.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment includes the sensor device SE1 that detects the game ball entered into the second winning opening 140, and the erected wall 17532c1 has a regulating position downstream from the sensor device SE1. At the same time, since the game ball is restricted at a position where it can be detected by the sensor device SE1, for example, if the wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened and a game ball is illegally entered from the ball entrance, the sensor device The state in which SE1 detects the game ball can be continued. Therefore, by determining whether the detection by the sensor device SE1 continues beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have been illegally entered.

Next, referring to FIG. 105, a rotating member 18812 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812 is formed at a constant distance in the radial direction from the axis of the hub 812a, but in the eighteenth embodiment, the protrusion 18812a1 is 812a at different radial spacings from the axis. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 105(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 18812 taken along the line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105(a).

As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the 18th embodiment has a protrusion 18812a1 that protrudes semispherically toward the edge 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 disposed opposite to it. Have multiple pieces.

The protrusions 18812a1 are formed with different radial distances from the axis of the adjacent protrusions 18812a and the hub 812a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow generated by the first protrusion 18812a1 (the tip located on the rotation side) is directed to the second protrusion 18812a1 (the tip located on the rotational rear side of the first protrusion 18812a1). You can easily cause a collision. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, airflow can be easily generated. As a result, air can be sent between the opposing inner reel 811 and outer reel 821 to clean the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the relationship among the accommodation unit 880, inner reel unit 810, and outer reel unit 820 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the side wall portion 881 of the storage unit 880 is formed in a plate shape, but the side wall portion 881 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed with a plurality of openings. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 106(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of a decorative pattern display device 800 in the nineteenth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b) each illustrate a state in which the outer reel unit 820 is transitioned (rotationally displaced). Further, in FIG. 106(b), an opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), a side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30(a)) disposed on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 800 when viewed from the front is provided with a plurality of openings 19881d extending in the left-right direction. be done.

The openings 19881d are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The forming angles of the adjacent openings 19881d are set to be substantially the same as the forming angles of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 and the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820. Further, the circumferential opening dimension of the opening 19881d is set smaller than the circumferential width dimension of the spoke 812c and the spoke 822. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106(a), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c) can be placed next to the opening 19881d. can. That is, the opening 19881d can be covered by the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812c) in a side view.

Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820) is rotated, it is possible to suppress air from flowing in through the opening 19812c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c) are arranged at a circumferential position different from the opening 19881d. be able to.

This allows air to flow in from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820) is rotated. That is, by making the air inflow path the shortest and reducing air resistance, air can easily flow into the inside of the decorative pattern display device 800 (accommodation unit 880).

Therefore, when rotating the inner reel unit 810 to perform an effect that allows the player to see other symbols decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811, the inflow of air from the opening 19881d is restricted and the inner reel 811 is rotated. The display can be easily recognized by the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 are cleaned by allowing intake air to flow in from the opening 19881d. It's easy to do.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments in any way, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. can be easily inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the portions other than the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the pair of left and right wing members 520L and 520R are formed symmetrically, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projections 523L, 523R of the wing members 520L, 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side, and the wing members 520L, 520R may have the same shape. In this case, since the wing members 520L and 520R can be formed from the same parts, the manufacturing cost of the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced by using common parts.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclined portion 625a of the reflective member 625 is formed as a smooth surface, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curved in a convex manner toward the light transmitting portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed, and can be made uniformly incident on the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In the first and eleventh embodiments described above, the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side in the case where the number of disposed components is different, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member) may have different rigidities (dimensions, materials, etc. of the constituent members), or the driving force (size, size, etc.) transmitted between one side and the other side may differ. (Transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) are different; One side and the other side have different connections between component parts (e.g. number of connecting parts, amount of play in the connecting parts, etc.); One side and the other side are different. They may have different ease of displacement toward the other party (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (sliding or rotation), etc.), or may be a combination of these.

As a result, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D shift their higher rigidity side (lower side) to the other party's lower rigidity side (higher side). can face. Therefore, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other on the side with higher rigidity, and pushes the other on the side with lower rigidity. Then, you can create a state of accepting (retreating) the other person. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

In the ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the closed state by the biasing spring, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging a magnetic body inside the first electric accessory 520 and placing a magnet on the front base 511 or the back base 512, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the closed state by the magnetic force of the magnet. It may also be something that allows you to do so.

In the first and eleventh embodiments described above, the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side in the case where the number of disposed components is different, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) are different from each other is that , materials, etc.), connection states between component members (for example, number of connected parts, amount of wobbling of connected parts, etc.) are different, or combinations of these may be used. Due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing are different, and the support manner of the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D is biased to one side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the upright wall 532c1 is formed so as to be able to slide inside the first case member 534, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the inside of the main body portion 531a, the upright wall 532c1 may be projected from the inside of the second winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning hole 140, so even if the feather members 520L, 520R are opened by unauthorized means, the inside of the second winning hole 140 (upright It is possible to suppress the game balls from being stagnated in front of the wall 532c1. As a result, fraud by players can be prevented.

In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the game ball is guided in the front-back direction by changing the side shape between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. .

For example, magnets may be disposed inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the game ball may be guided in the front and back direction by the attraction force of the magnets. This eliminates the need to narrow the distance between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512, so it is possible to suppress the game ball from being pinched between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the attraction force of the magnet is such that the game ball cannot be held on the attraction surface of the magnet. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being attracted to the side surfaces of the front base 511 and the back base 512.

In the second and eighteenth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which a plurality of protrusions 2812a1, 18812a1 are formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed on the side surface of the hub 812a facing the edge 824. In this case, as in the second and eighteenth embodiments, airflow can be generated by the uneven shape of the grooves. As a result, air can be sent between the opposing inner reel 811 and outer reel 821 to clean the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

In the fifteenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the variable prize winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the game board 13, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be slidable in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is immersed in the game board 13, and a game ball is inserted into the specific winning hole 65a. It may be configured such that the ball is not allowed to enter, and in the open state, the variable winning device 15065 is extended to the front side of the game board 13 to allow the game ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and is movable, the guide member is , a pair of protrusions are provided that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the guide surface, and the pair of protrusions allow the game balls to move along the guide surface. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the gaming machines A1 are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which they are guided.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball into the ball entrance and is movable. ing. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members that have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, are disposed across the ball entrance, and have their proximal ends rotatably supported. In this case, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-164598 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one wing member, and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other wing member. be disclosed. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the game ball simultaneously guides (rolls) the guide surface of one wing member and the guide surface of the other wing member. Even when the game balls are moved (movement), the game balls can be biased in different directions (one toward the glass plate and the other toward the game board). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance. However, the above-described conventional technology has a problem in that the game ball cannot be biased sufficiently. In addition, a game ball that enters from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass from the other side of the guide member, and in this case, the game ball does not enter the ball entrance, so the player There was a problem that interest was lost.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A1, the guide member includes a pair of protrusions that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the guide surface. Since the projecting parts are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the game ball guided (rolled) along the guide surface can come into contact with the projecting part. By doing so, it is possible to reliably bias the game ball. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, the pair of protrusions are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, so that the game ball that enters from one side of the guide member is provided with a protrusion. It can be brought into contact with the part. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls entering from one side of the guide member from passing through the guide member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the game machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members arranged to sandwich the ball entry hole and whose base end side is rotatably supported, and the pair of wing members are arranged so that the tip side thereof is close to or separated from each other. By being rotated in the direction of rotation, a closed state through which the game ball cannot pass or an open state through which the game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of protrusions protrude from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members. a direction in which the protrusion on one of the pair of wing members and the protrusion on the other wing member are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface; A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the gaming machine A2 is arranged at different positions.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entrance and whose base end side is rotatably supported, and has a pair of protrusions. The protruding portion projects from each guide surface of the pair of wing members, and the protruding portion on one wing member of the pair of wing members and the protruding portion on the other wing member extend along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which they are guided, by bringing the game balls guided (rolling) along the guide surface into contact with the protrusion, it is possible to securely hold the game balls. can be biased toward As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the ball entrance, and it is possible to prevent the ball from clogging.

In addition, the protruding portion on one wing member and the protruding portion on the other wing member are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the wing member). By arranging the game ball at different positions in the direction of It can be brought into contact with the protrusion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the proximal end side of the wing member than to the distal end side.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A2, the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip side of the wing member, so that the wing member is guided by the guide surface. A rolling area can be secured before the game ball comes into contact with the protrusion. Therefore, the reduction in the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed to that extent, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, since the protruding part protrudes from the protruding surface at a position closer to the proximal end than the distal end of the wing member, the path of the game ball that comes into contact with the protruding part and is biased is directed to the ball entrance. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from returning to the course before deflection until it reaches this side (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the guide surface to the ball entrance while remaining in the biased state.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the guide surface has a first region that is continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing member, and the game ball that is guided through the first region does not come into contact with it. The protruding portion is formed to have a size, and the first region of the guide surface on one wing member of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface on the other wing member are equal to the size of the guide surface. A game machine A4 characterized in that the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface.

According to the game machine A4, in the game machine A2 or A3, the guide surface has a first region that is continuous from the distal end side to the base end side of the wing member, and the game ball guided through the first region has a non-continuous region. Since the protruding portion is formed with a size that causes contact, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface rolls in the first area, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball, The ball can enter the ball entrance smoothly.

In this case, the first region of the guide surface on one of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface on the other wing member are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. Since they are arranged at different positions in the directions of However, the game balls can be biased in different directions, allowing the balls to smoothly enter the ball entrance.

Any one of gaming machines A2 to A4 includes a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, and the base member includes a regulating portion that comes into contact with the wing member to restrict rotation of the wing member, A game machine A5 characterized in that a protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with a regulating portion of the base member.

According to the game machine A5, any of the game machines A2 to A4 includes a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, and the base member restricts the rotation of the wing member by coming into contact with the wing member. Since the regulating portion is provided and the protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the protruding portion is a portion that protrudes from the wing member (guide surface), the relatively rigid portion of the wing member can be used as a stopper for bringing it into contact with the regulating portion of the base member. Accordingly, damage to the wing member can be suppressed.

In gaming machine A5, the protruding portion has a side surface formed substantially flush with a side surface on the proximal end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the protruding portion is substantially flush with the proximal side surface of the wing member. A game machine A6 characterized in that a side surface of the protruding portion that is formed abuts at least a regulating portion of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A5, the side surface of the protruding portion is formed to be substantially flush with the side surface on the proximal end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the protruding portion is formed on the proximal end side of the wing member. Since the side surface of the protruding part formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base member contacts at least the regulating part of the base member, the part that is far from the rotation axis (the side surface of the protruding part) is connected to the regulating part of the base member. The reaction force input from the regulating portion to the wing member can be reduced by the amount that the regulating portion can be brought into contact with the wing member. Therefore, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. Furthermore, for example, compared to the case where the protruding end surface of the protruding part is brought into contact with the regulating part of the base member, the regulating part of the base member can be separated from the ball entry opening, and the flow to the ball entry opening is reduced. You can secure a space for roads. In addition to the side surface of the protruding portion, the side surface of the base end side of the wing member may also be brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and damage to the wing member can be further suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6 includes an intervening wall located between the opposing protrusions in the closed state, and the pair of wing members has no protrusions when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the opposing distance between the guide surfaces in the area where the guide surfaces face each other is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the protrusions is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, the pair of wing members are arranged at a position where the facing interval of the guide surfaces in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the protruding part is provided protruding from the guide surface, the pair of wing members are further spaced apart by the height of the protruding part to prevent the game ball from being caught between the protruding parts. This increases the space required for arranging the pair of wing members.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, it is provided with an intervening wall located between the opposing protrusions in the closed state, and the pair of wing members are connected to the rotating shaft. When viewed from the direction, the opposing interval of the guide surfaces in the area where no protruding part is formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the opposing interval of the protruding part is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, The space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be reduced.

In other words, even if the pair of wing members start to close (start to transition to the closed state) while the game ball is being guided (rolling) on the guide surface, the intervening wall will not be present between the opposing protrusions. By locating the protrusion, the game ball can be ejected from between the opposing protrusions and the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the protrusions. The game ball discharged from between the opposing protrusions by the intervening wall is located between the opposing guide surfaces in the area where the protrusions are not formed, and the opposing interval at such a position is Since the diameter of the ball is larger than that of the ball, the game ball will not be caught. As a result, the distance between the protrusions facing each other can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be reduced. In other words, the pair of wing members can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for a conventional product that does not have a protruding portion protruding from the guide surface.

The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the ball entry hole in the direction of gravity. Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity, and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guide surface can be thrown to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall, the ball can enter the ball entrance.

In any of gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one wing member of the pair of wing members is placed at a position forming the closed state, and the timing at which the other wing member is placed at a position forming the closed state. A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the timing at which the game is played is different.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members is placed in a position where the other wing member forms a closed state and the timing at which the other wing member is adjusted are determined. Since the timing at which the ball is disposed at the position where the closed state is formed is different, the game ball is difficult to be caught between the pair of wing members (guide surfaces), and the opposing interval between the pair of wing members can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be reduced.

In the game machine A1, the guide member has a closed position in which the guide surface faces the ball entry hole and prevents the game ball from entering the ball entry hole, and a closed position in which the guide surface faces the ball entry hole. The guide surface of the guide member is formed to be rotatable between an open position that protrudes toward the front side of the ball entry hole and allows a game ball rolling on the guide surface to enter the ball entry hole, and the guide surface of the guide member includes: The ball is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entry hole, and the pair of protrusions are disposed at positions across the ball entry hole when viewed from the front. The gaming machine A10 is also arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is in a closed position in which it retracts below the ball entry hole and makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the ball entry port, and in a closed position in which the guide member is in a position where the guide surface is the upper surface. The guiding surface of the guiding member is slidably displaceable between an open position that extends toward the front side of the ball opening and allows a game ball rolling on the guiding surface to enter the ball opening; The pair of protrusions are formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entry hole, and the pair of protrusions are disposed at positions across the ball entry hole when viewed from the front. , a gaming machine A11 characterized in that the gaming machines A11 are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface).

According to the gaming machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, the guiding member has a guiding surface that has a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entrance opening. The pair of protrusions are arranged at positions across the ball entrance in front view, and are located in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). Since they are arranged differently, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface can be reliably biased by bringing it into contact with the protrusion. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, one protruding part and the other protruding part are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When a game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of protrusions. Therefore, the game ball that enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction can be prevented from passing through the guide surface of the guide member and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface of the guide member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
A ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entrance, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the pair of wing members to open or close the pair of wing members. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are placed in a permissible position that allows the game ball to enter the ball entry hole, and the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means. and a regulating means arranged at a regulating position that regulates entry of game balls into the ball entry hole when the wing members are closed, wherein the pair of wing members are closed or the pair of wing members are closed. A gaming machine B1, wherein the regulating means is formed so as to be maintainable at the regulating position when the wing member is opened from the outside.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry hole, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball entry hole. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means, the pair of wing members are placed in a permissible position that allows entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means disposed at a regulating position that regulates the entry of game balls into the ball entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is arranged at the permissible position, thereby preventing the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members from entering the ball entrance. You can let the ball enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is placed in the regulating position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball will be directed to the ball entrance. It is possible to restrict the ball being thrown into the ball.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so for example, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside, it is possible to displace the regulating means from the regulating position to the permissible position. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of regulating game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the arrangement of the regulating means is formed so that it can be maintained at the regulating position in the state where the pair of wing members are closed or when the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

Note that the restriction position for regulating the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance means that it is sufficient if the game ball can be stopped at a predetermined position. In other words, when the ball entrance is provided with a passage connected to the ball entrance and through which the game balls flowing from the ball entrance pass, the regulating position by the regulating means (the position at which the game balls are stopped) is further away from the ball entrance. It may be upstream or downstream from the ball entrance (that is, in the middle of the path that flows from the ball entrance and passes through the passage). In the latter case, the regulating position of the regulating means may be upstream of the detecting means (detection sensor) disposed in the middle of the passage to detect passage of game balls; It may be downstream.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism slides between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the drive means. and a slide transmission member that is rotated to an open rotation position by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to an open slide position to open the pair of wing members, and closed by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to a closed slide position. a rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotational position to close the pair of wing members, the restriction means is disposed on the slide transmission member, and when the slide transmission member is slid to the open slide position, the restriction is closed. When the means is placed in the allowable position and the slide transmission member is slid to the closed slide position, the restriction means is placed in the restriction position, and with the slide transmission member placed in the closed slide position, When the rotation transmission member is placed in the open rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. A gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1, when the rotation transmission member is placed in the open rotation position with the slide transmission member placed in the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are As a result of this engagement, sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is regulated, making it easier to prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entry opening.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members is forcibly opened from the outside, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is placed in the closed slide position. In such a state, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position, so that the restriction means can be maintained at the restriction position (if the restriction means is permissible). (This can prevent unauthorized forced displacement from the outside.) As a result, even if a pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside and a game ball is allowed to pass between the pair of wing members, the regulating means will prevent the game ball from entering the ball entrance. can.

In the game machine B2, a sliding groove is provided extending in one of the slide transmitting member and the rotation transmitting member, and a sliding protrusion is provided protruding from the other, and the sliding protrusion is slid along the sliding groove. As a result, the slide displacement of the slide transfer member is transmitted and the rotation transfer member is rotated, and the slide protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the slide groove, thereby opening the slide transfer member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that sliding displacement to a sliding position is regulated.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B2, a sliding groove is provided extending in one of the slide transmitting member and the rotation transmitting member, and a sliding protrusion is provided protruding from the other. By sliding along the sliding groove, the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted and the rotation transmission member is rotated, and the sliding protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, thereby transmitting the slide transmission. Since the sliding displacement of the member to the open sliding position is restricted, the restriction can be made less likely to be released while achieving miniaturization.

That is, the sliding groove and the sliding protrusion for transmitting the sliding displacement of the slide transmitting member to the rotation transmitting member for rotation can be used to form a means for regulating the sliding displacement of the slide transmitting member to the open slide position. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such a means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the sliding protrusion engages with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, unauthorized access to the engaged portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the restriction (engagement) can be released accordingly. It's difficult to do.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism slides between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the drive means. and a slide transmission member that is rotated to an open rotation position by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to an open slide position to open the pair of wing members, and closed by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to a closed slide position. a rotation transmitting member that is rotated to a rotational position so that at least the pair of wing members can be closed, the regulating means is disposed on the rotational transmission member, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated to an open rotational position; When the restriction means is placed in the allowable position and the rotation transmission member is rotated to the closed rotation position, the restriction means is placed in the restriction position, and the slide transmission member is placed in the closed slide position and the rotation is rotated. When the transmission member is placed in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby restricting rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1, when the slide transmission member is placed in the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is placed in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are By being engaged, rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted, so it is easier to prevent game balls from entering the ball entrance opening illegally.

That is, from the closed state of the pair of wing members, for example, by forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside or by directly operating the rotation transmitting member, the rotation transmitting member is rotated to the open position. Even if the rotation transmitting member and the slide transmitting member are engaged with each other, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position is restricted, so that the restricting means can be maintained at the restricting position (i.e., the restricting means can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance by the regulating means.

In the game machine B4, a protrusion protruding from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and an engaging portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member so as to be engageable with the protrusion. A gaming machine B5, wherein the protruding portion is protruded along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide transmission member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4, a protrusion protrudes from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member is engageable with the protrusion. Since the protrusion protrudes along the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member, the engagement between the protrusion and the engagement part is achieved by utilizing the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member. It is possible to switch between the engagement and the release of the engagement, and the structure can be simplified.

Note that the engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or rotation transmission member) that the protrusion can come into contact with, or a hole or a recess into which the protrusion can be inserted (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or rotation transmission member). It may be a hole or a recess formed in one of the members. That is, any structure may be used as long as it can restrict the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position by the protruding portion coming into contact with the engaging portion. In this case, it is preferable that the engaging portion be a hole or a recess. Since the protruding part is inserted into the engaging part, the space required for disposing the protruding part can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the size of the protruding part. This is because the protrusion can be shielded from the outside, making unauthorized access to the protrusion from the outside difficult.

In the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member has an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position, and an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the closed rotation position. A game machine B6 characterized in that it includes a closing side abutting part that abuts the pair of wing members and closes the pair of wing members when the game machine B6 is closed.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member has an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. , and a closing-side contact portion that contacts and closes the pair of wing members when rotated toward the closed rotation position, so that it is possible to suppress the pair of wing members from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, Unauthorized access to the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the wing member is externally displaced in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing member, and the rotation transmission member attempts to rotate toward the open rotation position. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member, so that the displacement of the wing member can be controlled by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member. It can be regulated by the department. That is, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, and to make it difficult to illegally access the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member from the outside.

The game machine B4 or B5 includes a biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmitting member contacts the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. a game machine comprising an opening-side contact portion that opens when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward a closed rotation position, and the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means. B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4 or B5, it is provided with a biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position. The blade member is provided with an opening-side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means. When the pair of wing members are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members do not come into contact with the rotation transmission member, and external force due to such forced opening can be prevented from being applied to the rotation transmission member. As a result, damage to the pair of wing members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member can be suppressed.

Examples of the biasing means include a spring (torsion spring or coil spring) that biases the pair of wing members in the closing direction with elastic recovery force, and a magnet that biases the pair of wing members in the closing direction with attractive force. be done.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B7 includes a detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the regulation means has a regulation position downstream of the detection means, and A game machine B8 characterized in that game balls are restricted at a position that can be detected by a detection means.

According to the gaming machine B8, any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7 includes a detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the regulating means has a regulating position downstream from the detecting means. At the same time, since the game ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the detection means, for example, if the wing member is forcibly opened and a game ball is illegally entered from the ball entrance, the detection means will detect the game ball. This state can be continued. Therefore, by determining whether the detection by the detection means continues beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have been illegally entered.

<About the concept of the invention using the decorative pattern display device 800 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a first reel formed to be rotatable and a second reel disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and formed to be rotatable, the first reel has a cylindrical shape. The second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape and includes a first side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the first outer circumferential wall, and the second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape and has an outer surface. a second outer circumferential wall that faces the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall at a predetermined distance; and a second outer circumferential wall that extends radially inward from one side in the axial direction of the second outer circumferential wall, and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall faces the inner surface of the first side wall. and a second side wall facing each other at a predetermined interval, and a standing portion is provided to stand from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall toward the other. Machine C1.

Here, the first reel is rotatably formed, and the second reel is disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and is rotatably formed (i.e., a double reel structure is provided). (e.g., Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-230693). There is also a known technique for cleaning the display surface of the reel by removing dust attached to it by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-28241).

However, the dual reel structure has a problem in that it is difficult to clean. That is, in the double reel structure, it is not possible to secure space for arranging the above-mentioned rotating brush between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel), so the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel Also, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel includes a first outer circumferential wall formed in a cylindrical shape and a first side wall extending radially inward from one side in the axial direction of the first outer circumferential wall. The second reel has a second outer wall formed in a cylindrical shape and whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the first outer wall at a predetermined interval, and a second reel having a diameter from one side in the axial direction of the second outer wall. a second side wall that projects inward in the direction and whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the first side wall at a predetermined interval; Since the installed portion is erected, wind pressure is generated by displacing the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, and using this wind pressure, the first Air can be made to flow between the inner surface of the outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. Thereby, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall can be cleaned. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a continuous surface in the circumferential direction.

Here, if an opening is formed in at least one of the first side wall or the second side wall or a part of the circumferential direction is partially separated, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall The wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the gaps escapes through the openings and divided portions, which weakens the wind pressure, and the difference between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall increases accordingly. It becomes difficult for the air between them to flow.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a continuous surface in the circumferential direction. The wind pressure generated by displacing the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of air between the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall. As a result, by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall are Allows air to flow easily between the outer surface and the outer surface.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel is rotatably supported at the center and includes a first support wall that supports the first side wall, and the second reel is rotatably supported at the center. A game machine C3 comprising a second support wall that is supported and supports the second side wall, and an opening is formed in at least one of the first support wall and the second support wall.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1 or C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the support wall that supports the first side wall and the second support wall that supports the second side wall. Through the opening, air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside, or air is introduced from the outside between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Can be inhaled. That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air can flow (outflow or inflow) between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall accordingly. As a result, by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall are Allows air to flow easily between the outer surface and the outer surface.

In the gaming machine C3, when the upright portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the opening is formed at least in the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, when the upright portion is provided on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the first reel or Since at least an opening is formed in the other first support wall or second support wall of the second reel, the effect of reducing flow resistance by exhausting or inhaling air through the opening can be easily achieved. . That is, when rotating one of the first reel and the second reel on which the upright part is provided, the other reel, on which the opening part is formed, is stopped, thereby preventing air from flowing through the opening part. Flow (exhaust or intake) resistance can be reduced.

Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, wherein the upright portions are erected at different positions in the radial direction on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, respectively. C5.

In the gaming machine C5, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the upright portions are provided on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall at different positions in the radial direction, so that the first reel Alternatively, no matter which of the second reels is rotated, wind pressure can be generated by displacing the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Therefore, in the production by rotating the first reel or the second reel, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of symbols are formed on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the upright portions are arranged along the circumferential direction and are erected on a second side wall of the second reel.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer circumferential wall of the first reel is formed to have optical transparency, and the second outer circumferential wall of the second reel is formed so as to be transparent. Since a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction, the player can visually recognize the fluctuations in the symbols as the second reel rotates through the first reel. In this case, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, which rotates more frequently than the first reel. , it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall when the first reel or the second reel is rotated.

<About the concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
It includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and a transmitting member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means, and the transmitting member is formed in a curved manner, and the plurality of light emitting means A gaming machine D1 arranged along a curve, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Here, the substrate includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and a transmitting member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means, the transmitting member is formed in a curved manner, and the plurality of light emitting means Gaming machines are known that are arranged along the lines (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-106672). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals when the transparent member is viewed from the front. That is, the light emitting means are equally spaced along the direction of the line segment (chord) connecting both ends of the curved line (arc) formed by the plurality of light emitting means. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the distance between some of the plurality of light emitting means and adjacent light emitting means is narrowed, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. Therefore, heat is concentrated on some light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between each light emitting means and the adjacent light emitting means can be constant, and the heat emitted by the light emitting means can be distributed. can be equalized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the concentration of heat on some of the light emitting means, and to improve the life of each light emitting means.

The gaming machine D1 includes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of sectioned surfaces corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means. , a gaming machine D2 characterized in that the partition widths of the plurality of partition screens when viewed from the front of the transparent member are set to be substantially the same.

Here, when a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals along the curve of the transparent member (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction), the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at unequal intervals when the transparent member is viewed from the front. The Rukoto. That is, when the transparent member is viewed from the front, a region where the distance between the light emitting means is narrow and a region where the distance is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes uneven along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, it is equipped with a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member is compatible with a plurality of light emitting means. It has a plurality of partitions divided into sections, and the partition widths of the plurality of partitions when viewed from the front of the transparent member are set to be approximately the same, so that the amount of light of each partition that is visually recognized when viewed from the front of the transmission member is approximately the same. It can be the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D2, wherein a light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Since diffusivity can be ensured (light can be emitted over a wider angle), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one section.

Note that the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the light emitting surface having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front means that the shape of the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front) is rectangular.

A game machine D4 in which at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged in such a direction that one side of the light emitting surface is along a tangential direction of the curved shape of the transparent member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D3, at least some of the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in such a direction that one side of the light emitting surface is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the transparent member. The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curve of the transmitting member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transparent member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In any one of gaming machines D2 to D4, the dividing surface is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transparent member and is recessed toward a side away from the back surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed as a curved surface facing the back surface of the transparent member. A gaming machine D5, characterized in that it faces between the member and the dividing screen.

According to the gaming machine D5, in any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the dividing surface is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transparent member and is recessed toward the side away from the back surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. faces between the transparent member and the dividing surface, so that the substrate can be disposed perpendicularly to the transparent member. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit including the transmitting member, the substrate, and the reflecting member can be increased. In this case, the dividing screen is arranged in such a manner that it surrounds the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the light emitting means from a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light, so that the light reflected on the dividing screen is directed to the back surface of the transmitting member. It can be made uniformly incident. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transparent member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D5, the reflective member includes a continuous surface that is continuous with the division screen and faces the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means, and the continuous surface is convex toward the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that it is formed as a curved surface.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the reflective member is provided with a continuous surface that is continuous with the partition screen and faces the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means, and the continuous surface is connected to the light-emitting means. Since the light emitting surface is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the light emitting surface, the light reflected from the continuous surface can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the transmitting member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transparent member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

<About the concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
A plurality of rotating drums formed to be rotatable and arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals, and a decorative member disposed between the plurality of rotating drums and at least a part of which is transparent. and a substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and the substrate is arranged in an attitude such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. A game machine E1 provided therein includes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member.

Here, a plurality of drums are formed to be rotatable and are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and the drums are disposed between the plurality of drums and at least a part thereof has optical transparency. A decorative member and a substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, the board being arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means are mounted substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. A gaming machine that is installed is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-5927). According to this gaming machine, not only can the space between the spinning drums be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern can be formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light from the light emitting means that has passed through the decorative member. It is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to visually recognize the pattern of the decorative member integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, the board is arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member, so the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently directed onto the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there was a problem that the production effect was insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means is made small while the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is made large, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotation drum will be hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since it is provided with a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member, the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. Even when the substrate is disposed, it is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back surface of the decorative member by the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Further, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that a sense of unity can be created between the decorative member and the rotating drum.

In the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer circumferential surface of the rotating drum, and is formed with an outer edge extending to a position overlapping the outer circumferential surface of the rotating drum when viewed from the front. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer circumferential surface of the spinning drum and extends its outer edge to a position overlapping the outer circumferential surface of the spinning drum when viewed from the front. Since it is formed so as to protrude, the axial end surface of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible). Further, since the pattern of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means and the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the drum can be brought closer together, the decorative member and the drum can be integrated. It makes it easier to create a sense of experience.

In the gaming machine E2, the reflective member connects the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the region on the board where the light emitting means is mounted and the pattern on the decorative member are connected. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the back surface of the reflective member is inclined in a direction away from an axial end surface of the drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the reflective member connects the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, thereby reducing the area on the board where the light emitting means is mounted. The back surface of the reflective member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end face of the drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means While ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by the (proximity to). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (making it difficult to see), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be easily formed.

A gaming machine E4, which is the gaming machine E2 or E3, wherein the light emitting means is mounted on both sides of one side and the other side of the board.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the light emitting means is mounted on both one surface and the other surface of the board, so that the light emitting means mounted on one surface Different designs can be independently formed (displayed) on the decorative member depending on the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the other side.

In this case, the number of substrates disposed between the drums arranged in parallel can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the board can be suppressed, the drum can be moved deeper into the back of the decorative member (the drum can be moved closer to the board). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (making it difficult to see), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be easily formed.

<About the concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
A game machine comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, which are disposed opposite to each other and are movable in the direction toward or away from each other, and are movable in the same direction with opposing sides in contact with each other. The base member includes a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that displaceably support the first displacement member and the second displacement member, respectively, on the base member, and the support mode of the first support mechanism is the same as the first support mechanism. The second displacement is biased toward one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member and is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the second displacement member that is in contact with one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member. A game machine F1 characterized in that the support aspect of the second support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing side of the member.

Here, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged opposite to each other and are formed to be movable in the direction toward or away from each other, and are also formed to be movable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other. A gaming machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-106844). According to this gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to each other to a position where their opposing sides abut, an object located on the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, , a liquid crystal display device or a presentation member) and displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be visually recognized. You can perform a performance that In addition, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is possible to maintain the shielding of the object. , it is also possible to perform a presentation (a presentation that draws attention to the operation of removing the mask) before the mask is removed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to make the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member come into close contact with each other due to the dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members, and the space between the opposite sides There was a problem that a gap may be formed between the two. When a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can see the object on the back side through the gap, which impedes the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that displaceably support the first displacement member and the second displacement member, respectively, and the first support mechanism The support mode of the mechanism is biased to one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member, and is on the opposite side to the other side of the opposite side of the second displacement member that comes into contact with one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member. Since the support aspect of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposite side of the second displacement member, when the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism The support mode and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased to sides opposite to each other (sides rotated by 180 degrees around the centers of one side and the other side of the opposing sides). Thereby, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Examples of ways in which the support state is biased to one side include, for example, when the rigidity of the constituent members on one side and the other side is different (dimensions, number of constituent members, materials, etc.) The driving force transmitted between the two sides (e.g., size, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) is different, and the state of connection between component parts on one side and the other side (e.g., the number of connecting parts, the difference in the number of connecting parts, etc.) The ease with which one side and the other side can be displaced toward the other side (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (sliding or rotation), etc.) is different. , a combination of these, etc. are exemplified.

Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism shift their higher rigidity side (lower side) to the other party's lower rigidity side (higher side). ) can be faced. Therefore, when the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (moves forward) the other on the side with higher rigidity, and On the less rigid side, a state can be formed in which the opponent is accepted (retreats). As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means that generates a driving force, a pair of first connecting members that connect the first displacement member to the base member, and a pair of first connecting members. The second support mechanism includes a first side transmission member and a first other side transmission member that respectively transmit the driving force of the first driving means and have different configurations, and the second support mechanism includes a first side transmission member and a first other side transmission member that respectively transmit the driving force of the first driving means and have different configurations. 2 driving means, a pair of second connecting members that connect the second displacement member to the base member, and transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the pair of second connecting members, respectively, and having mutually different configurations. A game machine F2 comprising a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means that generates a driving force, and a pair of first connecting members that connect the first displacement member to the base member. , a first side transmission member and a first other side transmission member that respectively transmit the driving force of the first drive means to the pair of first connection members and have mutually different configurations, and the second support mechanism includes: A second driving means that generates a driving force; a pair of second connecting members that connect the second displacement member to the base member; Since the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member are provided with different configurations, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and there is no gap between the opposite sides. Formation can be suppressed.

That is, in a state where the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism is positioned on the side where the driving force is larger or the transmission timing of the driving force is, for example, It is possible to create a state in which the opponent is pushed (moved forward) on the earlier side, and the opponent is accepted (retracted) on the side where the driving force is smaller or the transmission timing of the driving force is later. As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Here, as an aspect in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) have different configurations, for example, the rigidity (structure Examples include items with different dimensions, number of parts, materials, etc.), items with different connections between component parts (e.g. number of connecting parts, amount of play in connecting parts, etc.), and combinations of these. be done. That is, due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the timing of transmission are different, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are each biased to one side.

In the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is connected to the base member. A gaming machine F3 is rotatably supported on the same axis as the gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are connected to the base member and coaxially rotatably supported by the base member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. In this case, even when using bias in the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

In the game machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body made of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged so that the opposite sides thereof are connected to each other. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state when they are brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, an elastic body made of a rubber-like elastic material is disposed on at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member, and the first displacement member When the second displacement member has its opposite sides in contact with each other, the elastic body is interposed between the first connection member and the second connection member in an elastically compressed state, so that the first displacement member and When the second displacement member is reciprocated in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when using the bias of the support mode.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first drive means that generates a driving force, and is driven by the first drive means and connects the first displacement member to the base member. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members, a first side biasing member and a first other side biasing member that respectively apply different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, and the second support mechanism a second driving means for generating a force; a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; A game machine F5 comprising a second one-side biasing member and a second other-side biasing member that apply a biasing force.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means that generates a driving force, and is driven by the first driving means and A pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first side urging member and a first other side urging member that respectively apply different urging forces to the pair of first connecting members, The second support mechanism includes a second driving means that generates a driving force, a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second driving means and connects the second displacement member to the base member, and a second connecting member that connects the second displacement member to the base member. Since the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member each apply different biasing forces to the two connecting members, it is possible to easily bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other, It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between opposing sides.

That is, in a state where the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism, for example, pushes the other party (moves forward) on the side where the biasing force is large. ), it is possible to form a state in which the side with the smaller urging force accepts (retreats) the opponent. As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Note that the first one-side biasing member and the first other-side biasing member may have the same configuration. That is, the urging forces applied to the pair of first connecting members may be made different by having different positions where the urging forces are applied or by having different amounts of elastic deformation. The same applies to the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first drive means that generates a driving force, and is driven by the first drive means and connects the first displacement member to the base member. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members, and the second support mechanism includes a second driving means that generates a driving force. a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; and a second connecting member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of second connecting members. 2. A game machine F6 comprising: 2 biasing members.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates a driving force, and the first supporting mechanism The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; and a pair of second connecting members that are attached to one of the pair of second connecting members. Since the second biasing member that applies force is provided, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

That is, when the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes the other on the side where the biasing force is applied (for example). At the same time, the side on which the biasing force is not applied can accept the opponent (retreat). As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

In the game machine F3 or F4, the game machine is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the first connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member. one of the first torsion springs as the first connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member. A game machine F7 characterized in that at least one of a connecting position between the leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or a connecting position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is spaced apart from the winding part.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3 or F4, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the first connecting member, the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member Since the first torsion spring applies a biasing force in the direction of bringing the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member, when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction closer to the second displacement member, the first connecting member must be rotated. The driving force of the first driving means necessary for this purpose can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position where it is separated from the second displacement member to the contact position where it is in contact with the second displacement member, the displacement can be smoothly started. can.

In this case, as the first connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or the position of the first torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where force is applied is longer, and the first displacement member is moved closer to the second displacement member. It is possible to weaken the biasing force in the direction of Therefore, for example, when stopping the first displacement member brought close to the second displacement member, the displacement can be reliably stopped, and damage caused by collision can be suppressed. Furthermore, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement is reduced. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine F7, the direction is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member approaches the first displacement member. a second torsion spring that applies a biasing force to one leg of the second torsion spring as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member; The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that at least one of a connecting position between the and the second connecting member and a connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is spaced apart from the winding part.

According to the game machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as the first torsion spring in the game machine F7. In particular, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is particularly effective because the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed on both sides. Become. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are at the same height (arranged in the gravity direction position), and the position where they contact is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the gravity direction, and the distance between the two is The configuration of gaming machine F8 is particularly effective when the position (retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the direction of gravity.

A gaming machine F9 in the gaming machine F7, characterized in that the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F7, the first displacement member is brought closer to the second displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, so that the first displacement member is moved downward in the direction of gravity. The more the first displacement member is positioned, the stronger the biasing force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the direction of gravity can be. ).

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the first displacement member upward in the direction of gravity from a stopped state, the displacement (rise) can be smoothly started, and the raised first displacement member can be stopped. In some cases, the displacement can be reliably stopped not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the biasing force. As a result, damage caused by collision with the second displacement member can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the first displacement member that has been displaced (descended) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened to counteract the action of gravity that attempts to continue the downward movement. be able to. As a result, the first displacement member can be reliably stopped.

In the gaming machine F9, the direction is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member. the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by upward displacement in the direction of gravity; As the second connecting member is rotated in the direction of approaching the second connecting member, the connecting position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member A gaming machine F10 characterized in that at least one of the connecting positions is spaced apart from the winding part.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F9, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is connected to the second connecting member. The second displacement member is provided with a second torsion spring that applies a biasing force in a direction to separate the second displacement member from the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity. When displacing the second displacing member in a direction away from the first displacing member, that is, when it is necessary to displace (raise) the second displacing member against the direction of gravity, the first connecting member is rotated. The driving force of the second driving means can be assisted by the urging force of the second torsion spring. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the position of the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where force is applied becomes longer, and the second displacement member is spaced apart from the first displacement member. It is possible to weaken the biasing force in the direction of raising (in the direction of raising upward in the direction of gravity). Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the reciprocating displacement is reduced. The displacement speed can be increased and the performance effect can be improved.

A gaming machine K1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine K2 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Features of gaming machine K3. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board 140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance)
15065 Variable winning device (guidance member)
15065a Side (guide surface)
15065b Swelling part (protruding part)
15065c Swelling part (protruding part)
65a Specific winning opening 510 Base member 511b2 Engagement part (regulation part)
511b1 Standing part (intervening wall)
520 First electric accessory (guide member)
520L Wing member 520R Wing member 524L Swelling part (projection part)
524R Swelling part (protruding part)
526L Side (guide surface)
526R Side (guide surface)
531 Solenoid (driving means)
532 Second protrusion (regulating means)
532,8532 Sliding member (slide transmission member)
532d Engagement groove (sliding groove)
8532e Third protrusion (protrusion)
533, 7533, 8533, 9533 Rotating member (rotation transmission member)
533a Connecting part (engaging part)
533b Protrusion (sliding protrusion)
8533e Second protrusion (regulating means)
621 Light transmitting member (transmitting member, decorative member)
624 Base member (base)
624a LED (light emitting means)
625 Reflection member 625a1 Reflection surface (continuous surface)
625b Recess (section screen)
660 Base member 672U Displacement member (first displacement member)
672D Displacement member (second displacement member)
680U driving means (first support mechanism)
680D Drive means (second support mechanism)
684U First link member (first side transmission member)
684D First link member (second one side transmission member)
686U Second link member (first other side transmission member)
686U Second link member (second other side transmission member)
800 Decorative pattern display device (rotation)
810 Inner reel unit (second reel)
811 Inner reel (second outer peripheral wall)
812 Hub (second side wall)
812a1 Protrusion (erected part)
812c spoke (second support wall)
812c1 Inner opening (opening)
5813a Protrusion (erected part)
820 Outer reel unit (1st reel)
821 Outer reel (first outer peripheral wall)
822 Spoke (first support wall)
824 Edge (first side wall)
3824a Protrusion (erected part)
825 Outside opening (opening)
SP1 Torsion spring (biasing member, first torsion spring)
SP2 Torsion spring (biasing member, second torsion spring)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball into the ball entrance and is movable. Gaming machines are known. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members that have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, are disposed across the ball entrance, and have their proximal ends rotatably supported. Patent Document 1 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one wing member, and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other wing member.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-164598

However, the game machine described above has a problem in that the game ball cannot be biased sufficiently.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can bias a game ball.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide surface that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, and is formed to be displaceable. The guide member includes a pair of protruding portions that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the guide surface. A pair of protrusions are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface.

According to the game machine according to the first aspect, the game ball can be biased.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. FIG. 3 is a perspective front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. (a) is a front view of the winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning a prize opening unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a base member and a 1st electric accessory. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit. (a) and (b) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are front views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XVII-XVII of FIG. 10(a). (a) and (b) are front views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the XXb-XXb line in FIG. 18(b). be. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). (a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member. (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 24(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27(a). (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit in range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in range XXIX in FIG. 2. FIG. (a) is a front view of the decorative pattern display device, and (b) is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative pattern display device. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative pattern display device. (a) is a front view of the inner reel developed, and (b) is a front view of the outer reel developed. 30(a) is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative pattern display device in range XXXV in FIG. 34. FIG. 36(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 36(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). FIG. 3 is a front view of the segment display device. FIG. 3 is an exploded view of the segment display device. (a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the second segment unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second segment unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit. 42(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along the line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a). FIG. It is a side view of a base member. 42(a) is a sectional view of the second segment unit taken along the line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42(a). FIG. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) is a front view of the displacement member, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member. 51(a) is a sectional view of the displacement member taken along the line LIII-LIII in FIG. 51(a). FIG. It is a front view of a displacement member. It is a front view of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. (a) to (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit. 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line LVIIIb-LVVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a 3rd embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a 4th embodiment. 68(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 68(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). It is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a 5th embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular member taken along the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70(a). It is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device in a 6th embodiment. 72(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 72(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line LXXIIb-LXXIIb in FIG. 72(a). (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 73(a). (a) is a front view of a rotating member in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member. (a) to (c) are side views of a drive unit and a first electric accessory. (a) to (c) are front views of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in an 8th embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit in a ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of a displacement member in a tenth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit in the range XCI of FIG. 90. It is a schematic diagram of the vertical displacement unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 96(a). (a) is a perspective front view of a left wing member in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member taken along the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the left wing member in FIG. 98(b). FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc of FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 99. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the Cb-Cb line in FIG. 100(a). (a) is a front view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross section of the first electric accessory and the drive unit 8530 taken along the CIb-CIb line in FIG. 101(a). 101(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory and the drive unit taken along the line CIc-CIc in FIG. 101(b). (a) and (b) are side views of a first electric accessory and a drive unit in a seventeenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along the line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of a decorative pattern display device in an 18th embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 63, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 2 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 2. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used, for example, when changing the presentation mode displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 (see FIG. 2), or when changing the presentation content of Super Reach. operated by a person.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball lending operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and the rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly from a ball lending device etc. to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize winning machine. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 76 formed of The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (top left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change or time saving period, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140 is opened is changed, and it is longer than during the normal period. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state (open state), the access to the second prize opening 140 is greater than when the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, one winning A change may be made in which the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened is increased compared to the normal number of times. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and the first electric accessory At least one of the number of times 520 is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140 is released and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is released in one win are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased compared to the normal one.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. A second symbol display device (not shown) is composed of a segment display device 600 and a decorative symbol display device 800 that display symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 66. ) is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 are made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 of this embodiment are different from the fact that the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). , performs decorative display and displacement operations according to the display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. In addition, instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, for example, a liquid crystal display may be used to display the game status.

The second symbol display device alternately displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the first electric accessory 520 of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second winning hole can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the first electric accessory 520 per win, etc. 140, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the first electric accessory 520 may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as by displaying the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, and segment display. This may be performed using part of the device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

A first electric accessory 520 is attached to the second prize opening 140. This first electric accessory 520 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 520 It becomes an open state (enlarged state) and becomes a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving period, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change or time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 140 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 520 as in the second winning hole 140, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second prize opening 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second prize opening 140 is likely to be in an open state. Since the ball is easy to hit, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R jackpot by opening the first electric accessory 520 and winning the second prize opening 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or 37B so as to represent the symbol, and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the segment display device 600 and decorative symbol display device 800. It will be done. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, for example, It may also be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the pachinko machine 10 to perform jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, segment display device 600, and decorative symbol display device 800, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Performs the main processing of

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, which are performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110. The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The audio lamp control device 113 also monitors the input from the frame button 22, and changes the mode displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. The controller 114 instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the performance during super reach. When the display mode is changed, information regarding the changed display mode is included so that the segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800 display decorations corresponding to the changed display mode. A rear image change command is sent to the display control device 114. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 in accordance with the commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. It also controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 , the segment display device 600 , and the decorative pattern display device 800 , and controls the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 . This controls the display of the third symbol's variable effect, etc. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby controlling the display of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 and the audio from the audio output device 226. It is possible to match the output.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be explained. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 13, a state in which the winning a prize opening unit 500 is disassembled from the game board 13 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning opening unit 500 is a game machine formed by dividing two rails 76 and 77 planted on the front surface of the game board 13 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. It is inserted from the front side into an opening 13a formed below the area. In addition, the detailed structure of the winning a prize opening unit 500 will be described later.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9. FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operating unit 300. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit 300. Moreover, FIGS. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300.

8 shows a state in which the displacement members 670 disposed in pairs on the upper and lower sides of the segment display device 600 are respectively retracted on both upper and lower sides, whereas in FIG. A state in which the provided displacement member 670 is extended to the vertically central position is shown in each figure.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 includes a box-shaped rear case 400, and the inner space of the rear case 400 includes a decorative pattern display device 800, a segment display device 600, and a decorative unit 700. is accommodated.

The back case 400 includes a bottom wall portion 401 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 402 that stands from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 401 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 401a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 401, and the segment display device 600 is disposed from the back side of the back case 400 through the opening 401a.

Three decorative pattern display devices 800 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the opening 401a of the bottom wall portion 401 of the back case 400. The decorative symbol display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that are rotatably displaced in the vertical direction, and the outer peripheral surfaces of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are decorated. The player is configured to be able to visually recognize the manner in which the symbols change (rotate). Note that a detailed description of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be given later.

The segment display device 600 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 401 of the back case 400 and is configured to cover the decorative pattern display device 800. A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative pattern display device 800, and by disposing the decorative pattern display device 800 between the gaps, it is possible to , the decorative pattern display device 800 is made visible.

Further, the segment display device 600 is provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) that can be displaced in front of the gap between the opposing base members 660, and the displacement member 670 is moved to the front of the gap between the opposing base members 660. By displacing it forward, it is possible to form a presentation form in which the decorative symbol display device 800 is made invisible to the player. Note that a detailed explanation of the segment display device 600 will be given later.

The decoration units 700 are formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular box when viewed from the front, and are arranged in pairs above and below the segment display device 600. The decoration unit 700 is made of a transparent resin material and has a shape that resembles the logo, title, etc. of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, an LED base for emitting light is disposed inside the decoration unit 700, and is configured to be able to emit light to the player side.

Next, the winning a prize opening unit 500 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29. First, the configuration of the winning a prize opening unit 500 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13.

FIG. 10(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 10(b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 510 and the first electric accessory 520.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the winning slot unit 500 includes a base member 510 disposed on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 5), and a shaft rotatably mounted inside the base member 510. It is formed mainly of a supported first electric accessory 520 and a drive unit 530 that applies a driving force to the first electric accessory 520.

The base member 510 is formed by fastening a front base 511 disposed on the front side and a back base 512 disposed at a predetermined distance from the front base 511.

The front base 511 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is also formed from a transparent resin material. The front base 511 includes a first protrusion 511a that protrudes from the upper end of the center portion in the left-right direction toward the back side, a second protrusion portion 511b that protrudes from the lower end portion of the center portion in the left-right direction toward the back side, and the second protrusion portion 511b. 511b and a third protrusion 511c that protrudes at a position separated by a predetermined gap in the left-right direction.

Also. The front base 511 is disposed at a position where its front surface is visible from the player side, and a pattern is formed by unevenness on the front side.

The first protruding portion 511a is attached to the back base 512 when the first electric accessory 520, which will be described later, is in a closed state (a state in which the tips of the wing members 520L and 520R are located above the rotating shaft (shaft member JB1)). This is a plate member for preventing the game ball from being thrown into the second winning hole 140 that is formed.

That is, the first protrusion 511a is formed at the upper part between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R facing each other in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric accessory 520 and the first protrusion 511a is equal to the diameter of the game ball. is set smaller than.

Further, the first protruding portion 511a is formed such that its upper surface is inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward both left and right ends. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the 1st protrusion part 511a can roll the upper surface and fall (flow down) below.

The second protruding portion 511b is formed to protrude from the back side of the front base 511 in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the position of its upper end surface in the vertical direction is lower than the bottom surface of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. Set. In addition, the second protruding part 511b includes an upright part 511b1 that is erected in front of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512, an engaging part 511b2 that protrudes from both left and right ends of the upright part 511b1, and a bottom part. 511b3.

Furthermore, a base member 511f including an LED that irradiates light onto the lower side of the upright portion 511b1 is disposed on the second protruding portion 511b. The LED of the base member 511f is arranged in such a manner that it emits light upward. Therefore, the area around the second winning hole 140 can be illuminated by the LED.

The upright portions 511b1 are formed to stand upward from the upper end of the second protruding portion 511b, and two of the upright portions 511b1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and their upright tips are connected to each other. In addition, the upright portion 511b1 is formed so that its upper surface is inclined downward toward the second winning opening 140 (back side), and the vertical position of the end on the second winning opening 140 side is The height is set to match the bottom of the Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 can be rolled toward the second winning opening 140 side. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 can enter the second winning hole 140.

Further, the connecting portions of the upright portions 511b1 arranged in parallel are formed in a shape in which the circumferential center position is recessed downward. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 can easily stay at the center position in the left and right direction of the upright part 511b1. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning opening 140 side. As a result, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the upright part 511b1 can be prevented from colliding with the game ball thrown later and being pushed outward, making it easier to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 140. can.

The engaging portions 511b2 are portions that engage with left and right wing members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, and are formed to protrude from both left and right sides of the base end portion of the upright portion 511b1 toward the center of the shaft support 511d, which will be described later.

The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512. Thereby, a screw can be inserted into the through hole 511b4 formed through the side surface on the back side of the recessed portion 511b3.

The third protruding portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball into the first out opening 71 formed on the back base 512, and the third protruding portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball into the first out opening 71 formed on the back base 512. It is formed adjacent to both outer sides of the 1-out port 71 in the left-right direction. In other words, the third protrusion 511c is formed at a position spaced apart from the second protrusion 511b in the left-right direction by the width of the first outlet 71 in the left-right direction.

The bottom surfaces of the third protrusions 511c are formed to be inclined downward toward the adjacent first out ports 71 (towards the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10(a)), The lowermost position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first outlet 71. Therefore, the game ball thrown to the upper part of the third protrusion 511c can be rolled toward the first out port 71 and entered into the first out port 71.

The pivot supports 511d are formed to protrude in an annular shape from the back side of the front base 511, and are formed in two at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10(a)) with the standing portion 511b1 in between. . The inner diameter of the shaft support 511d is formed to be larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1, which will be described later. Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted into the shaft support 511d.

The back base 512 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped body that is larger in front view shape than the front base 511 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the player can directly view the front surface of the back base 512 that does not overlap with the front base 511 in the front-rear direction.

Moreover, since the front base 511 is formed from a transparent material, the rear base 512 can be visually recognized through the front base 511 in the portion where the front base 511 overlaps with the front. Furthermore, the player can visually recognize the game ball thrown between the back base 512 and the front base 511 through the front base 511.

The back base 512 has a first winning opening 64 formed at the upper end of the front side, a second winning opening 140 formed below the first winning opening 64, and a second winning opening 140 formed on both sides of the second winning opening 140. The main winning hole 63 is formed mainly of a first out port 71, which is a first out port 71, and a general winning port 63 formed above the first out port 71 on the right side when viewed from the front.

The first prize opening 64 is recessed downward from the upper end of the front base 511 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 10(a)), and protrudes in both front and back directions along the recessed edge. It is formed. Further, the protruding tip on the front side (the front side in the paper of FIG. 10(a)) is closed by a plate member.

The concave shape of the first prize opening 64 is formed to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted inside, and the bottom surface (inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed to be inclined toward the back side. Thereby, the game ball that entered the first prize opening 64 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13.

The second winning hole 140 is formed to penetrate below the first winning hole 64 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 10(a)). The second prize opening 140 is formed in a square shape that is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 via the second prize opening 140. In addition, the second winning opening 140 includes a recessed portion 140a recessed on the left and right inner side surfaces.

The recess 140a is curved around the axis of the shaft hole 512a. Thereby, the projections 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, which will be described later, can be housed inside thereof. That is, the inside of the second winning a prize opening 140 is made into a state where the game ball can pass through and the protrusions 523L, 523R are inserted.

The shaft hole 512a is recessed from the front to the back side on both left and right sides of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. The shaft hole 512a is a groove into which a shaft member JB1, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

The first out port 71 is formed to penetrate both left and right sides of the second winning port 140. The first out port 71 is a hole for collecting game balls that have flown down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a width in the vertical direction (short direction). The dimensions are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first out port 71 is formed so that its bottom surface (inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined toward the back side. Therefore, the game ball that entered the first out port 71 can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13.

A guide wall 512b is formed in the first out port 71, which is connected to the bottom surface of the first out port 71 and protrudes toward the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area on its upper surface and sending the ball to the first out port 71, and the upper surface thereof is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back side.

Furthermore, a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged in parallel on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b, it is possible to suppress the guide wall 512b from being damaged.

The front base 511 and the back base 512 are fastened together by the above-described through hole 511b4 and a fastening hole 512c formed through the back base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, with the front base 511 and the back base 512 assembled in the front-rear direction, a screwdriver is inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. This can be done by

The first electric accessory 520 is formed of a left wing member 520L arranged on the left side of the second winning opening 140 when viewed from the front, and a right wing member 520R arranged on the right side when viewed from the front as one unit.

In addition, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R differ only in the positions of bulges 524L and 524R, which will be described later, and the other members are formed symmetrically across the second winning opening 140, so the bulges are different. Regarding the parts other than the projecting portions 524L and 524R, only the left wing member 520L will be described, and a detailed explanation of the right wing member 520R will be omitted.

Further, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are in a first state (closed state) in which a corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is located upward in the direction of gravity by driving a solenoid 531 of a drive unit 530, which will be described later. It is possible to displace the second state (open state) in which the corner on the far side from the through hole 521L is displaced to a position spaced outward in the left-right direction of the second prize opening 140, and unless otherwise specified, the first state is shall be explained. Further, in the first state, the opposing side surfaces of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R will be described with reference signs 526L, 526R.

The left wing member 520L is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed around the through hole 521L from the front side to the back side, and a recess 522L extending from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back side. A protrusion 523L that protrudes from the side, a recessed portion 525L that is recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface of the through hole 521L, a bulging portion 524L that protrudes from the side surface 526L, and an inside of the through hole 521L. The shaft member JB1 is inserted into the shaft member JB1. Note that a detailed explanation of the bulging portion 524L will be given later.

The shaft member JB1 is a cylindrical rod member formed from a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, respectively, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 521L.

Further, the length of the shaft member JB1 in the axial direction is approximately equal to or slightly shorter than the distance from the recessed end surface of the shaft hole 512a to the back side of the front base 511. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, one end of the shaft member JB1 (the end on the back base 512 side) is inserted into the shaft hole 512a, and the other end (the end on the front base 511 side) is inserted into the shaft hole 512a. ) is inserted inside the shaft support 511d, thereby allowing the shaft member JB1 to be held between the front base 511 and the back base 512.

The left wing member 520L has a dimension in the front-rear direction that is set to be smaller than the distance between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, by inserting the shaft member JB1 into the through hole 521L, the wing member 520L can be rotatably held between the front base 511 and the back base 512 facing each other. .

The recess 522L is formed around the axis of the through hole 521L from the front side, and the recess dimension is set smaller than the protruding distance of the shaft support 511d. Further, the distance from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner circumferential surface is set larger than the radius from the axis of the shaft support 511d to the outer circumferential surface.

Therefore, when the wing member 520L is disposed between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other, it is possible to suppress the front surface of the wing member 520L and the back surface of the front base 511 from coming into contact with the ground, and also to prevent the front surface of the wing member 520L and the front surface from coming into contact with the ground. The grounding portion with the base 511 can be the recess 522L and the pivot support 511d. Therefore, the wing member 520L and the front base 511 can be partially grounded. As a result, when the wing member 520L is rotated by driving the solenoid 531, which will be described later, the resistance acting on the wing member 520L is reduced, making it easier to rotate the wing member 520L.

Further, since the pivot support 511d can be housed inside the recess 522L, the distance between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 facing each other can be reduced. As a result, the distance dimension of the winning a prize opening unit 500 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

Here, there has conventionally been a gaming machine in which the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L of the wing member 520L.

However, in conventional game machines, since the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L, if the wing member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing the parts. be. Therefore, there was a problem that the cost of parts increased.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shaft member JB1 is only inserted into the through hole 521L formed in the feather member 520L, and the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 are separately attached to the winning opening unit 500. can be placed. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, only the wing member 520L can be replaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in component costs.

Furthermore, as described above, the front base 511 can be fastened to the rear base 512 from the front side of the front base 511. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, the front base 511 can be removed from the back base 512 with the winning slot unit 500 attached to the game board 13. As a result, parts of the wing member 520L can be easily replaced.

That is, when removing the front base 511 from the back side of the back base 512, it is necessary to remove the winning slot unit 500 from the game board 13 and then remove the front base 511 from the back base 512. Since it is formed so that it can be removed from the side, the front base 511 can be easily removed. As a result, parts of the wing member 520L can be easily replaced.

Here, if the front base 511 is made removable from the front side of the back base 512, the heads of screws etc. that connect the front base 511 and the back base 512 will be visible from the player side (front side), and the player , visual recognition of the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512 may spoil the player's interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front base 511 and the back base 512 are fastened together using the space of the recessed portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511. That is, by inserting a screwdriver diagonally into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, a screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c via the through hole 511b4. Therefore, even when the front base 511 is located on the front side of the through hole 511b4, the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be fastened together by inserting a screwdriver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the heads of screws or the like that connect the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be difficult to see from the player's side (front side). As a result, the player's interest can be prevented from being lost due to the player visually recognizing the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512.

Further, normally, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600, which are visible through an opening formed in the center of the game board 13, are set at the level of the player's eye level. Therefore, the winning a prize opening unit 500 is arranged below the player's eye level. As a result, the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512 are difficult to see from the player's side, and it is more interesting for the player to see the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512. can be prevented from being damaged.

Note that since the front base 511 is made of a transparent resin material, the heads of the screws can be visually recognized through the front base 511, but as described above, the front base 511 also has unevenness on the front side. Since a pattern is formed, light can be emitted in different directions depending on the thickness of the plate. Thereby, the heads of the screws that are visible through the front base 511 can be obscured. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

Next, the drive unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. 15(a) and 15(b) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. 16(a) and 16(b) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520.

Note that FIGS. 15(a) and 16(a) illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, and FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b) illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state. A state in which the accessory 520 is located in the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, and a rotating member 533 and a sliding member 533 connected to the sliding member 532. It is formed mainly of a first case member 534 in which a member 532 is movably disposed, and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534.

The solenoid 531 includes a main body 531a that has an electric wire inside and generates electromagnetic force when electric power is passed through the wire, a movable body 531b that is slidably disposed inside the main body, and the movable body. The engagement portion 531c is attached to the distal end portion of the holder.

The main body portion 531a is formed in a prismatic shape that is elongated in the front-rear direction, and has electric wires disposed therein. A recessed portion recessed toward the back side is formed on the front side of the main body portion 531a, and a movable body 531b formed in a cylindrical shape is disposed inside the recessed portion.

The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can slide toward the back side (inside the main body 531a) by applying electric power to the electric wire of the main body 531a and generating electromagnetic force.

The engaging portion 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b on the opposite side to the main body portion 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed into a disk shape with an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b, and is disposed such that its axis is located approximately in the same line as the axis of the movable body 531b.

The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of a sliding member 532, which will be described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 15(a)) as the movable body 531b is displaced.

The sliding member 532 is formed into a substantially E-shape when viewed from above, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction, and two first pieces protruding toward the front from both left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a. It is formed mainly of a protrusion 532b and a second protrusion 532c located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding toward the front side.

In the sliding member 532, the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension between opposing sides in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential surface of a first case member 534, which will be described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534.

The connecting portion 532a includes a recess 532a1 recessed on the back side, an engagement groove 532a2 connected to the front side of the recess 532a1 and recessed from the upper surface side, and formed on both left and right sides of the base end of the second protrusion 532c. It is formed mainly with a notch 532a3.

As described above, the recess 532a1 is a recess that prevents the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a when the engaging portion 531c of the solenoid 531 is inserted into the engaging groove 532a2. That is, the recessed portion 532a1 has a recessed surface formed in an arc shape larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. This can prevent the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a.

The engagement groove 532a2 is formed to be connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the depth of the recess in the direction of gravity from the upper surface side is set to be larger than the diameter of the engagement part 531c. Further, the engagement groove 532a2 has a width dimension in the left-right direction set to be larger than a diameter of the engagement part 531c, and a width dimension in the front-rear direction is approximately the same as a thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement part 531c, or The thickness is larger than the thickness of the portion 531c in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the engaging portion 531c can be inserted inside the engaging groove 532a2.

The cut portion 532a3 is a cut for making it easier to elastically deform the sliding member 532 when connecting the first protrusion 532b to the rotating member 533, which will be described later. It is formed on both sides, and a cut is formed toward the back side.

The first protrusion 532b includes an engagement hole 532d formed to penetrate in the left-right direction. The engagement hole 532d is formed in the shape of an elongated hole that is long in the front-rear direction, and has a first opening 532d1 recessed downward in the direction of gravity from the end on the front side and downward in the direction of gravity from the end on the back side. The second opening 532d2 is formed in a recessed manner. Note that detailed explanations of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be given later.

The engagement hole 532d is set such that the width in the vertical direction at the central portion in the front-rear direction (portion other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is larger than the width in the vertical direction of a protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, which will be described later. be done. Thereby, the protrusion 533b can be arranged inside the engagement hole 532d.

The second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b as described above, and is also formed to protrude from the front side. Further, the second protrusion 532c includes an upright wall 532c1 erected downward on the distal end side opposite to the connecting portion 532a. Note that a detailed explanation of the erected wall 532c1 will be given later.

The rotating member 533 is formed by two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and connecting the opposing ends on one end side by a connecting part 533a. Ru. The gap between the two opposing plate-shaped bodies of the rotating member 533 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. Ru. Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532.

The rotating member 533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both left and right sides from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes to both left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and The driving portion 533d is formed in a recessed manner at the tip of the other end of the L-shape.

The rotating shaft 533c is formed to protrude from both left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces thereof is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Further, the protruding dimension of the rotating shaft 533c is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Therefore, by receiving the rotating shaft 533c inside a recess 534a of the first case member 534, which will be described later, and assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534, the rotating member 533 can be connected to the first case member 534 and the second case member 534. It can be held in a rotatable state relative to the second case member 535.

The protrusions 533b are formed to protrude on both left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces is equal to the distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. The dimensions are set to be approximately the same as the dimensions. Further, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 533b is set larger than the width dimension in the left-right direction of the first protrusion 532b. Therefore, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected by inserting the protrusion 533b into the engagement hole 532d of the first protrusion 532b.

Note that the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected by elastically deforming the two first projections 532b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the distance between the two first projections 532b. can. In this case, as described above, since the notch 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, the distance between the two first protrusions 532b facing each other can be easily widened. As a result, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be easily connected.

Furthermore, the distance between the opposing inner surfaces in the left-right direction of the first case member 534 is approximately the same as the distance between the opposing outer surfaces of the first protrusions 532b, or the outer surfaces of the first protrusions 532b are opposite to each other. The distance dimension is set slightly larger than the distance between the two. Thereby, in a state where the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are arranged inside the first case member 534, it is possible to suppress the first protrusion 532b from elastically deforming outward in the left-right direction. As a result, disconnection between the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be suppressed.

The drive portion 533d is formed in a concave manner from the front side toward the back side. The drive portion 533d can house the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing member 520L inside. That is, the driving portion 533d is set to have a larger dimension in the vertical direction than the projections 523L and 523R. By accommodating the protrusions 523L and 523R in the drive part 533d, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced between the first state and the second state as the drive part 533d is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be given later.

The first case member 534 is formed into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front with an open interior, and is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The first case member 534 has a cutout formed on the lower side of the back side, and a second case member 535 can be disposed in the cutout portion.

The first case member 534 is formed to mainly include a recess 534a recessed toward the front in a notch on the back side, and an upright portion 534b erected on the bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

As described above, the recess 534a is a recess that accommodates the rotating shaft 533c of the rotating member 533 inside, and is recessed in a shape larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 533c. Therefore, by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 with the rotating shaft 533c housed inside, the rotating member 533 can be disposed inside the first case member 534.

The upright portion 534b is formed so that the lower inner circumferential surface of the second prize opening 140 of the back base 512 and the upright end surface thereof are set at the same height, extend toward the back side, and slope downward. be done. As a result, when the drive unit 530 is placed on the back surface of the back base 512, the game ball that has entered the second winning hole 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper surface of the upright portion 534b. .

The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. The second case member 535 includes a through hole 535a formed vertically.

The through hole 535a has an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball, and as described above, the game ball thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling with the upper part of the upright portion 534b is passed through the through hole 535a. The ball can be thrown downward through the ball. Thereby, the game ball that has flown down the game area and entered the second prize opening 140 can be collected.

Next, the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

As shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 16(a), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is disposed around the movable body 531b. At the same time, it is pushed out to the front side (to the left in FIG. 15(a)) by the biasing force of a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a.

In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is located on the back side (second opening 532d2 side) of the engagement hole 532d. Further, the center of gravity of the rotating member 533 in a side view is located between the drive portion 533d and the rotating shaft 533c. That is, a rotational force is always applied to the rotating member 533 around the rotating shaft 533c in a direction that pushes down the driving portion 533d.

Therefore, even when the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is located on the back side of the engagement hole 532d (on the second opening 533d2 side), the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 remains inside the second opening 533d2 (below the engagement hole 532d (see FIG. 15(a)). ) can stagnate above it without being guided by the lower side )).

Further, since the driving portion 533d is pushed down, the respective protrusions 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R housed inside the driving portion 533d are pushed down. As a result, the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are placed in a state in which the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L, 521R are located above the through holes 521L, 521R (first state (see FIG. 16(a))). Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 15(b) and 16(b), when electric power is applied to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531, the movable body 531b is pulled into the main body 531a by the electromagnetic force generated in the main body 531a. It will be done.

Therefore, as the movable body 531b is displaced, the sliding member 532 connected to the distal end side of the movable body 531b is slid rearward (to the right in FIG. 15(b)). As described above, since the rotating member 533 is always subjected to a rotational force around the rotating shaft 533c in the direction of pushing down the driving portion 533d, the engagement hole 532d of the sliding member 532 The protrusion 533b accommodated inside the second opening 533d2 is slid inside the second opening 533d2 without being caught in the proximal end portion thereof.

At the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, the protrusion 533b that slides inside the second opening 533d2 comes into contact with the end of the engagement hole 532d on the front side (first opening 532d1 side) and on the back side (FIG. 15). (b) right side). In this case, since the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the axis of the rotating shaft 533c, the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

Further, since the rotating member 533 rotates around the rotating shaft 533c, the driving portion 533d can be displaced upward (to the upper side in FIG. 15(b)). As a result, the wing member 520L is rotated around the axes of the through-holes 521L, 521R, and the corner portions on the far side from the through-holes 521L, 521R are displaced to the left and right outside (second state (FIG. 16(b)). ))).

On the other hand, the displacement from the second state to the first state is performed by cutting off the supply of power to the main body portion 531a of the solenoid 531. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body part 531a disappears, so that a biasing spring (not shown) disposed around the movable body 531b and interposed between the main body part 531a and the connecting part 532a is activated. Due to the biasing force, the movable body 531b is extended to the front side (left side in FIG. 15(a)). As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the position of the first state.

As described above, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape that corresponds to the displacement of the protrusion 533b, so that the recess depth of the first opening 532d1 toward the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 15(b)) is reduced. It is formed deeper toward the back side (right side in FIG. 15(b)).

As a result, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 collides with the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b is moved in the direction of gravity. It can be easily displaced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the operation of the second protrusion 532c will be described. 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 10(a). In addition, FIG. 17(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, and FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the second state. .

As shown in FIG. 17(a), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the far corners of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are connected to the first protrusion 511a. placed nearby. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down between the left and right wing members 520L, 520R facing each other.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b protrudes from the inside of the main body portion 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engaging portion 531c) is positioned on the front side (left side in FIG. 17(a)). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is arranged near the second winning opening 140.

In this case, the distance dimension from the erected tip of the erected wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17(a))) to the upper end surface of the erected part 534b formed on the first case member 534 L1 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, even if the first electric accessory 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes forward, the game ball can flow between the opposing left and right wing members 520L and 520R. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second prize opening 140 and rolling. That is, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 collides with the upright wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, even if the player continues playing the game when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged, it is possible to prevent the store from being at a disadvantage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sensor device SE1 that detects that a game ball has entered the second winning a prize opening 140 is arranged in the downstream path of the game ball of the second case member 535. Therefore, in order to detect that the game ball has passed through the inside of the second winning opening 140, it is necessary to roll the game ball to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the game ball inside the first case member 534, it is possible to suppress the pachinko machine 10 from detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 140.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the far corners of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are in the first state. The ball is also spaced apart from the first protrusion 511a, and the distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right feather members 520L, 520R, and can be rolled into the second prize opening 140. That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state, it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second winning hole 140.

Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b is drawn inside the main body portion 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engaging portion 531c) is positioned on the back side (right side in FIG. 17(b)). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is arranged at a position farther away from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

In this case, the distance dimension from the erected tip of the erected wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17(b))) to the upper end surface of the erected part 534b formed on the first case member 534 L2 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are displaced to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the second prize opening 140. At the same time, the game ball entered into the second winning hole 140 can be sent to the second case member 535 by rolling the upright portion 534b formed on the first case member 534.

Furthermore, since the displacement direction of the standing wall 532c1 can be slid in a direction that substantially coincides with the rolling direction of the game ball entering the second winning hole 140, the feather member 520L, When 520R is damaged (or due to fraudulent activity) and released, the game ball that collided with the standing wall 532c1 and stopped is pushed out in the opposite direction to the rolling direction due to the displacement of the standing wall 532c1. can be suppressed. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened by the drive of the solenoid 531 and the game ball can enter the second winning port 140, the game ball is prevented from becoming clogged in the second winning port 140. can. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the game ball can be smoothly guided inside the second winning opening.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, a case will be described in which the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state due to a fraudulent act by a player. 18(a) and 18(b) are front views of the winning a prize opening unit 500. 19(a) and 19(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.

Note that in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent in order to facilitate understanding. Further, in FIG. 19(a), the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state are illustrated, and in FIG. 19(b), when only the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state The state of is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state due to a cheating act by the player , the projections 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are displaced inside the second opening 532d2 of the engagement hole 532d. That is, since a space is formed in which the protrusions 523L and 523R can be displaced, it is possible to suppress damage to the first electric accessory 520 when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly displaced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 20(a) and 11(b), a description will be given of the displacement of the upright portion 523c1 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced due to a fraudulent act by the player. 20(a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the player's energizing action, the solenoid of the drive unit 530 531 and the sliding member 532 are not displaced, and only the first electric accessory 520 and the rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

As described above, when the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, the first electrically-driven accessory 520 is located at A distance L1 from the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, conventionally, a second winning hole 140 formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members 520L and 520R arranged across the second winning hole 140, and a pair of wing members 520L and 520R are provided. When a pair of wing members 520L, 520R is opened by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) that applies a driving force to open or close the driving means (solenoid 531), the second prize opening 140 is opened. When the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), the game ball enters the second prize opening 140. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means disposed at a regulating position for regulating a ball.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so for example, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from the outside, the regulating means is displaced from the regulating position to the permissible position. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of regulating game balls from being illegally entered into the second winning hole 140 was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement of the standing wall 532c1 is maintained at the restricted position when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside. Since the erected wall 532c1 can be formed so as to be able to be formed, it is possible to suppress the erected wall 532c1 from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the second winning hole 140.

That is, in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are closed or in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to The distance dimension L3 from the lower side (lower side in FIG. 20(b)) to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. . Therefore, even if the first electric accessory 520 is allowed to throw a game ball into the second winning hole 140 due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball will enter the second winning hole 140 and roll. can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the upright wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (a game ball can be thrown to the second winning hole 140) due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning hole 140. It is possible to easily control the ball being thrown into the ball.

In addition, in this case, since the standing wall 532c1 that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the second prize opening 140 can be formed in series with the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the second There is no need for a separate member to prevent balls from being illegally entered into the prize opening 140. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and an increase in manufacturing costs can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a case will be described in which the second protrusion 532c is further pushed into the back side when the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the second state due to a fraudulent act by the player. . 21(a) and 21(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 22(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and FIG. 22(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, a protrusion 532d3 protruding from the inner surface on the front side (left side in FIG. 22(a)) is formed inside the second opening 532d2. Further, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is formed with a notch 533b1 formed by cutting the outer circumferential surface in a side view.

The protrusion 532d3 and the notch 533b1 are formed to have corresponding outer diameters. That is, the protruding shape of the protrusion 532d3 and the notch shape of the notch 533b1 in side view are substantially the same.

Therefore, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed into the back side from the state where only the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state due to fraudulent activity, as shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 22(a). Then, the projection 532d3 is accommodated inside the notch 533b1, and the displacement of the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) toward the back side is restricted. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the second state due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball enters the second prize opening 140 and the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 This can prevent the ball from rolling and being thrown.

Further, in this embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined upward toward the back side (see FIG. 22(a)). Thereby, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1.

That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined upward toward the back side, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further moved toward the back side while the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the notch 532b1. When a pushing force is applied to the notch 532b1, the direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the protrusion 532d3 and the notch 532b1 can be set to the direction in which the protrusion 532d3 enters the inside of the notch 532b1. Therefore, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball enters the second prize opening 140 and the upright part 534b of the first case member 534 It is possible to reliably prevent the ball from rolling and being thrown.

In other words, it is equipped with a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and the transmission mechanism is moved to the open slide position (FIG. 17) by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531). The sliding member 532 is slid between the position shown in FIG. 17(a)) and the closed sliding position (the position shown in FIG. a rotating member 533 that is rotated to the position to open the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and rotated to the closed rotation position by sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closed slide position to close the pair of wing members 520L, 520R; The standing wall 532c1 is disposed on the sliding member 532, and when the sliding member 532 is slid to the open sliding position, the standing wall 532c1 is placed in the permissible position, and the sliding member 532 is closed. When the standing wall 532c1 is slid to the slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is placed in the restriction position, and when the rotating member 533 is placed in the open rotating position with the sliding member 532 being placed in the closed sliding position, the rotating member 533 By engaging the sliding member 532 with the sliding member 532, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is restricted, and therefore illegal entry of game balls into the second prize opening 140 is restricted. It's easy to do.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside, the rotating member 533 rotates to the open rotating position while the sliding member 532 is placed in the closed sliding position. be done. In this state, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position, so that the restricting means can be maintained at the restricting position (restricting means can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are forcibly opened from the outside and a game ball is passed through between the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, the game ball enters the second prize opening 140. Balling can be regulated by regulatory means.

Furthermore, an engagement hole 532d is provided extending in one of the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533, and a protrusion 533b is protruded from the other, and the protrusion 533b is slid along the engagement hole 532d. The sliding displacement of the member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size and make it difficult for regulations to be lifted.

That is, a means for regulating the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open sliding position is provided by utilizing the engagement hole 532d and the protrusion 533b for transmitting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the rotating member 533 for rotation. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, by adopting a structure in which the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, unauthorized access to the engagement portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the restriction (engagement) can be released accordingly. It's difficult to do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R will be described in detail. FIG. 23(a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and FIG. 23(b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 24(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 24(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 24(a).

Note that in FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b), the left-right direction when viewed from perspective is reversed between FIG. 23(a) and FIG. 23(b). Further, in FIG. 24(a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent. Furthermore, in FIG. 24(b), the front base 511, which was seen as transparent in FIG. 24(a), is shown as opaque. Further, in FIG. 24(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the through hole 521L side, and on the front side (FIG. 24(b) arrow F side). On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed at the end on the through hole 521R side, and is continuous with the end surface on the back side (arrow B side in FIG. 24(b)). be done.

That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 24(b)).

Furthermore, a first region is formed on the side surfaces 526L, 526R, which is continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, and has a size that does not abut the game ball guided through the first region. The bulges 524L, 524R are formed, and the first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R of one of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) and the other wing are formed. The first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. Ru.

In addition, the end of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L is inclined toward the through hole 521L from the front side (lower side in FIG. 24(b)) to the back side (upper side in FIG. 24(b)). It is formed by On the other hand, the end of the bulging portion 524R on the far side from the through hole 521R is formed so as to be inclined from the back side toward the front side toward the through hole 521R side.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, a description will be given of a case where a game ball is thrown to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R. FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. 26(a) and 26(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit 500.

In addition, FIG. 25(a), FIG. 25(b), FIG. 26(a), and FIG. 26(b) correspond to the sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 500 in FIG. 24(b). Further, in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown from both sides of the first electric accessory 520 are sequentially illustrated. In FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), transition states of the game ball when the game ball is thrown only to the left wing member 520L are sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), when the game ball is thrown to both sides of the first electric accessory 520, it rolls on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R. The game ball can be rolled to different positions in the front and back direction by the bulges 524L and 524R.

To explain in detail, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed to be connected to the front end surface. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is rolled toward the back side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L.

In this case, the end of the bulging portion 524L on the far side from the through hole 521L extends from the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) to the back side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)). Since it is formed to be inclined, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulging portion 524L, it is possible to suppress the resistance in the rolling direction from increasing and the rolling of the game ball to be stopped.

On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is connected to the end surface on the back side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is rolled toward the front side by rolling on the side surface 526R while contacting the bulged portion 524R.

In this case, the end of the bulging portion 524R on the far side from the through hole 521R extends from the back side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)) to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) toward the through hole 521R side. Since it is formed to be inclined, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R comes into contact with the bulging portion 524R, it is possible to suppress the resistance in the rolling direction from increasing and the rolling of the game ball to be stopped.

Therefore, the game ball rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be brought to the back side, while the game ball rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be brought to the front side. As a result, when the game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on.

Here, conventionally, it has a ball entrance (second prize opening 140) that is formed to allow the game ball to enter, and a guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, and also has a displacement A gaming machine is known that includes a guide member (first electric accessory 520) that is configured to be movable. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members (wing members 520L, 520R) that have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, are disposed across the ball entrance, and have their base ends rotatably supported. ) is exemplified.

In addition, a first groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R), and the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of the other wing member A technique is disclosed in which second grooves are provided on the entire surface of each of the two grooves. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) on one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) And even if the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R), the game balls are guided (rolled) in different directions ( One side is on the glass plate side and the other side is on the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the second winning hole 140.

However, the above-described conventional technology has a problem in that the game ball cannot be biased sufficiently. In addition, a game ball that enters from one side of the guide member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) and passes through the other side of the guide member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R). In this case, the game ball is not entered into the ball entry hole (second winning hole 140), so there is a problem that the player's interest is lost.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 has a pair of bulges that protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R. 524L, 524R, and the pair of bulges 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R. By bringing the game ball guided (rolled) into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, the pair of bulges 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, so that the pair of wing members 520L, 520R A game ball entering from one side can be brought into contact with the bulges 524L and 524R. Therefore, a game ball that enters from one side of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) passes through the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (to the other of the wing members 520L, 520R). can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, the first electric accessory 520 is formed as a pair of wing members 520L, 520R that are disposed across the second prize opening 140 and whose base end sides are rotatably supported, and a pair of bulges 524L, 524R. are protruding from the respective side surfaces 526L, 526R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and are connected to the bulges 524L, 524R of one wing member 520L, 520R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R and the other wing member. Since the bulging parts 524L and 524R in 520L and 520R are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are guided (rolled). By bringing the game ball to be moved) into contact with the bulging portions 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, the bulges 524L, 524R in one wing member 520L, 520R and the bulges 524L, 524R in the other wing member 520L, 520R are arranged in the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R (wing By arranging the members 520L, 520R at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction from the distal end side to the proximal end side, a game ball that enters the side surfaces 526L, 526R of one wing member 520L, 520R will be disposed of on the other side. When reaching the side surfaces 5.26L, 526R of the wing members 520L, 520R, the game ball can be brought into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R of the other wing member 520L, 520R. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L, 526R of one wing member 520L, 520R can be prevented from passing through the side surface 526L, 526R of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the second winning hole 140, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In other words, the bulges 524L, 524R are formed on the left and right wing members 520L, 520R at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that game balls rolled from the left and right can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction. can be moved. Therefore, when game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, it is possible to prevent the game balls thrown from the left and right from colliding head-on. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of time it takes for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

In other words, by setting the collision positions of the game balls at different positions in the front and back direction on the left and right sides, the left game ball that has been brought to the back side will be moved to the back side (Fig. 25(b) upper side). On the other hand, the game ball on the right side that has been brought to the front side tends to bounce back to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) due to the collision.

Therefore, one of the game balls (in this embodiment, rolling the left wing member 520L) can easily enter the second winning hole 140, and the other game ball can be bounced back to the front side, thereby preventing collision. When doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being too far away from the second winning hole 140. Therefore, the second game ball that enters the second winning hole 140 later can enter the second winning hole 140 quickly. As a result, when game balls are thrown to both the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 520, the time required for the game balls on both sides to enter the second prize opening 140 can be shortened, and the game progresses smoothly. You can proceed.

In addition, since the bulging portions 524L, 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at positions closer to the proximal end side (through hole 521 side) than the distal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L, 526R. A rolling area can be ensured before the game ball comes into contact with the bulges 524L and 524R. Therefore, the reduction in the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed to that extent, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the second prize opening 140.

Further, since the bulging portions 524L, 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at positions closer to the proximal end side than the tip side of the wing members 520L, 520R, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are biased by contacting the bulging portions 524L, 524R. It is possible to suppress the path of the game ball from returning to the path before deflection before it reaches the ball entrance (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the side surfaces 526L, 526R to the ball entry hole while keeping it in the biased state.

In addition, as described above, the side surfaces 526L, 526R are formed with first regions that are continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L, 520R, and the game ball guided through the first region does not come into contact with the wing members 520L, 526R. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed with a size such that when a game ball that enters the side surfaces 526L and 526R rolls in the first area, it is assumed that the rolling speed of the game ball will decrease. This can be avoided and the ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning hole 140.

In this case, the first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R of one of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) and the other wing member (either of the wing members 520L, 520R) Since the first regions of the side surfaces 526L, 526R on the side surfaces 526L, 526R are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, The game ball simultaneously guides the first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R on the other wing member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) and the first region of the side surfaces 526L, 526R on the other wing member (the other wing member 520L, 520R). (Rolling) Even when the game balls are rolled, the game balls can be biased in different directions from each other, and the balls can be smoothly entered into the second winning opening 140.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 26(a) and 26(b), when the game ball is thrown to one of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, the other left and right wing members 520L, 520R By bringing the game ball into contact with the bulging portion 524L or 524R, the game ball is prevented from rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the other left and right wing members 520L, 520R and falling from the tips thereof. can.

To explain in detail, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed to be connected to the front end surface. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is rolled toward the back side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be brought closer to the bulging portion 524R formed on the right wing member 520R.

In other words, the bulges 524L, 524R formed on the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, so either the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R is The game ball rolling toward the winning opening can be rolled (pushed) to a position that matches the bulges 524L, 524R formed on either the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. .

Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled toward the back side (pushed together) and substantially coincides with the bulge 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. It can be made into a position. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball is rolled toward the front side (pushed together) and approximately coincides with the bulge 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. It can be made into a position.

This prevents the game ball from riding on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other left wing member 520L or right wing member 520R when the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on either the side surface 526L or the side surface 526R is high. It can be suppressed.

Here, in the conventional winning a prize opening unit 500, since the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the first electric accessory 520 are formed as smooth surfaces, the game ball thrown from one of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown from the other one. There is a problem in that the ball rides on the wing members 520L, 520R and is thrown from the tip of the other wing member 520L, 520R into the downstream region.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is formed with bulges 524L and 524R at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball rolled from one wing member is It can be rolled to a position that substantially coincides with the bulges 524L and 524R formed on the other wing member in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by causing the game ball rolling on one wing member 520L, 520R to collide with the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the other wing member 520L, 520R, the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L, It is possible to prevent the ball from riding on the ball 526R and being thrown into the game area from the tips of the wing members 520L and 520R.

Next, the recessed portion 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27(a). FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). Note that in FIG. 28(a), the first electric accessory 520 is shown in the first state, and in FIG. 28(b), the first electric accessory 520 is shown in the second state.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portion 511b2 formed on the second protruding portion 511b of the front base 511 is arranged inside the recessed portions 525L, 525R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, respectively. .

Further, in the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the concave portions 525L, 525R on the side of the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are in contact (see FIG. 28(a)). In the second state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the ends of the recessed portions 525L, 525R on the side opposite to the bulged portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are in contact with each other.

That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 comes into contact with the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R. By doing so, the amount of displacement can be regulated.

Furthermore, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axes of the through holes 521L, 521R causes the corners of the feather members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R to move toward the second prize opening 140 side due to their own weight. It is considered to be the direction of rotation. Therefore, the engagement portions 511b2 and the ends of the recessed portions 525L, 525R on the side of the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) are brought into contact, so that the wing members 520L, 520R rotate by their own weight. In addition, the wing members 520L and 520R can be held in the first state.

In addition, in the first state, since the ends of the concave portions 525L, 525R on the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side are brought into contact with the engaging portions 511b2, the bulging portions of the wing members 520L, 520R The side surfaces of 524L and 524R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Therefore, the rigidity of the abutting portions can be increased by the amount that the bulging portions 524L, 524R are formed, so it is possible to suppress damage to the wing members 520L, 520R due to abutting the engagement portions 511b2.

That is, this embodiment includes a base member 510 that rotatably supports the wing members 520L and 520R, and the base member 510 prevents the rotation of the wing members 520L and 520R by coming into contact with the wing members 520L and 520R. Since the regulating engagement portion 511b2 is provided, and the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the wing members 520L, 520R are brought into contact with the engagement portion 511b2 of the base member 510, damage to the wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed. That is, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are portions that protrude from the wing members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R), the portions of the wing members 520L and 520R whose rigidity is relatively high are connected to the base member 510. Since it can be used as a stopper that is brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are formed such that their side surfaces are substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the wing members 520L, 520R, and in the closed state, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are substantially flush with the proximal side surfaces of the wing members 520L, 520R. Since the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R that are formed together are in contact with at least the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the portion (the bulging portion 524L) that is far from the rotation axis (through holes 521L and 521R) , 524R) can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the reaction force input from the engaging portion 511b2 to the wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. Also, for example, the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is spaced apart from the second prize opening 140, compared to the case where the protruding tip surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. This makes it possible to secure a space that serves as a flow path to the second winning opening 140. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the proximal side surfaces of the wing members 520L and 520R may also be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and damage to the wing members 520L, 520R can be further suppressed.

When the wing members 520L, 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L, 524R are arranged below the upright portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (lower in FIG. 28(a)). In other words, the upright portion 511b1 is arranged between the opposing bulges 524L and 524R.

Here, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are arranged at a position where the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L, 526R in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the bulging portions 524L, 524R are provided protruding from the side surfaces 526L, 526R, the height of the bulging portions 524L, 524R is increased to prevent the game ball from being caught between the bulging portions 524L, 524R. It becomes necessary to arrange the pair of wing members 520L, 520R further apart, and the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R increases.

On the other hand, this embodiment includes an upright portion 511b1 located between the opposing bulges 524L and 524R in the closed state, and the pair of wing members 520L and 520R have the bulge 524L when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. , 524R are not formed, the opposing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the bulges 524L and 524R is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced.

That is, even if the pair of wing members 520L, 520R begin to close (start to transition to the closed state) while the game ball is guided (rolling) along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, the bulging portions 524L, By positioning the upright portion 511b1 between the opposing bulges 524R, the game ball can be discharged from between the bulges 524L and 524R, and the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the bulges 524L and 524R. . The game ball ejected from between the opposing bulges 524L and 524R by the upright portion 511b1 is located between the opposing sides 526L and 526R in a region where the bulges 524L and 524R are not formed. Since the opposing interval at such a position is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball will not be pinched (see FIG. 27(a)). As a result, the spacing between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced. In other words, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be disposed in a space equivalent to the space required for a conventional product in which the bulging portions 524L, 524R are not protruded from the side surfaces 526L, 526R.

On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 521L521R rotates the corners of the wing members 520L, 520R far from the through holes 521L, 521R downward in the direction of gravity due to their own weight. be done. Therefore, the engagement portion 511b2 and the ends of the concave portions 525L, 525R on the side opposite to the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) come into contact with each other, so that the wing members 520L, 520R are free from their own weight. Rotation can be suppressed and the wing members 520L and 520R can be held in the second state.

Therefore, the displacement of the wing members 520L, 520R can be regulated at locations other than the above-mentioned drive section 533d and projections 523L, 523R, so damage to the drive section 533d and projections 523L, 523R can be suppressed. Therefore, since there is no need to make the parts large in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533, the rotating member 533 can be made smaller. As a result, the drive unit 530 can be downsized.

In addition, in the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is located lower in the direction of gravity than the lower ends of the side surfaces 526L and 526R, and is located higher in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the second winning opening 140, so the side surfaces 526L, The game ball guided by 526R can be thrown to the upper surface of the upright portion 511b1, and by rolling the upper surface of the upright portion 511b1, the ball can enter the second winning hole 140 (FIG. 28(b) )reference).

Furthermore, as described above, the base member 511f equipped with an LED that irradiates light to the wing members 520L, 520R side (second winning opening 140 side) is arranged on the second protrusion 511b. As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the first state, the recessed portions 525L and 525R are located on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 511f can be easily made to enter the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R.

That is, by irradiating the LED light onto the recessed portions 525L and 525R, it is possible to suppress the LED light from being reflected on the outer surfaces of the wing members 520L and 520R. As a result, it is possible to easily allow light to enter the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the inside of the wing members 520L, 520R toward the player can be increased. As a result, the wing members 520L and 520R can be easily seen by the player even through the front base 511 formed from a transparent material.

Furthermore, when the wing members 520L, 520R are in the second state shown in FIG. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning hole 140 can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f.

That is, the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L, 525R are located at substantially the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L, 521R, thereby increasing the gap between the opposing first electric accessories 520. . Therefore, the game ball thrown to the front side of the second winning opening can be easily illuminated by the LED of the base member 511f. As a result, even through the front base 511 formed from a transparent material, the game ball entering the second prize opening 140 can be easily recognized by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the manner in which the prize opening unit 500 is arranged on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in range XXIX in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 29, the winning a prize opening unit 500 is arranged at a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76.

A first out port 71 is formed inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 to collect game balls flowing down the conventional game area. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 is formed with a curved portion 76a that is curved with a larger curvature than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to facilitate gathering of game balls.

Therefore, the gap between the winning opening unit 500 and the inner rail 76 is increased at the lower end portion of the inner reel (the portion where the curved portion 76a is formed). As described above, the front base 511 and the back base 512 of the winning a prize opening unit 500 are fastened together by diagonally inserting a screwdriver or the like into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511.

The through hole 511b4 is formed in the second protrusion 511b formed at approximately the center position of the front base 511 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 can be located above the curved portion 76a (upper side in FIG. 29). Therefore, when inserting a screwdriver or the like diagonally into the recessed part 511b3 from below the front base 511, the gap between the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved part 76a can be used, so the front base can be inserted from the front side of the game board 13. 511 can be easily attached and detached from the rear base 512.

In addition, since the interior of the recessed portion 511b3 is made difficult for the player to see due to the inner rail 76, the player's interest may be reduced if the player sees the screws etc. that connect the front base 511 and the back base 512. can be restrained from doing so.

Next, the decorative pattern display device 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36.

First, the configuration of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. 30(a) is a front view of the decorative pattern display device 800, and FIG. 30(b) is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative pattern display device 800, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative pattern display device 800. 33(a) is a front view of the inner reel 811 developed, and FIG. 33(b) is a front view of the outer reel 821 developed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative symbol display device 800 includes an inner reel unit 810 configured to be rotatable, an outer reel unit 820 that accommodates a part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. and a housing unit 880 that houses the outer reel unit 820 therein, a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the housing unit 880 and rotates the inner reel unit 810, and a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the housing unit 880 and drives the outer reel unit 820. It mainly includes a drive motor KM2 that rotates and a backlight unit 830 disposed inside the inner reel unit 810.

The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 disposed at one end of the opening of the inner reel 811 (on the left side in FIG. 30(a)), and a rotating member 812 of the inner reel 811. and an annular member 813 disposed on the other end side of the opening (right side in FIG. 30(a)).

The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a belt-shaped sheet made of transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the inner reel 811 has decorative symbols arranged at equal intervals with the longitudinal direction oriented vertically. Note that the inner reels 811 of the three decorative symbol display devices 800 arranged in parallel have different arrangements of decorative symbols.

The rotating member 812 connects a hub 812a formed in a substantially disk shape, a rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape with a larger diameter than the hub 812a, and an outer circumferential surface of the hub 812a and an inner circumferential surface of the rim 812b. It is formed mainly of spokes 812c.

The hub 812a and the rim 812b have respective axes formed in the same straight line, and are arranged at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spokes 812c are formed to be inclined in the axial direction toward the radially outer side of the hub 812a.

The rim 812b is a portion to which one end side of the inner reel 811 is attached to its outer circumferential surface, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner reel 811. In other words, the distance dimension in the circumferential direction at the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812b is set to be approximately the same as the dimension in the longitudinal direction of the unfolded inner reel 811. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be disposed (attached) on the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without any gaps.

The hub 812a is arranged inside the inner reel 811. That is, the spokes 812c that connect the hub 812a and the rim 812b are formed so as to be inclined toward the other end of the opening of the inner reel 811 (an annular member 813, which will be described later) as they go radially inward. Thereby, the hub 812a can be placed inside the inner reel 811. Furthermore, the spokes 812c are formed from a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and include inner openings 812c1 that open between circumferentially adjacent spokes 812c.

The hub 812a is located at approximately the same position in the axial direction as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. Thereby, a space closer to the annular member 813 than the hub 812a can be secured. A drive motor KM1 that applies rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810 is connected to the hub 812a.

In the drive motor KM1, the thickness of the inner reel 811 in the axial direction is approximately half of the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. As described above, the hub 812a is located at approximately the same position in the axial direction as the center position in the left-right direction of the inner reel 811, and is located at the inner portion of the opening of the inner reel 811 on the other end (ring member 813) side. Since the space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be disposed inside the inner reel 811. As a result, the dimensions of the inner reel unit 810 and the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

Further, the drive motor KM1 has a rotating shaft coaxially arranged in a straight line with the axis of the hub 812a. That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As described above, since the axis of the hub 812a and the axis of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the inner reel 811 can be rotated about the axis of the inner reel 811 by rotation of the drive motor KM1. Thereby, the symbols decorated on the inner reels 811 can be visually recognized by the player as being displaced in the vertical direction.

The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape with an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the rim 812b. The inner peripheral surface of the annular member 813 on the other end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (the right side in FIG. 30(a)) is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.

Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed from a transparent resin sheet as described above, its rigidity is relatively low. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, it may be deformed by the centrifugal force or wind pressure of the rotation, making it impossible for the player to accurately recognize the symbols decorated around it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the inner reel 811 has the rim 812b of the rotating member 812 connected to one end and the annular member 813 connected to the other end, so that the inner reel unit 810 can rotate. In this case, the centrifugal force and wind pressure make it difficult to displace. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, the player can accurately recognize the symbols decorated around the inner reel 811.

Furthermore, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the load on the inner reel 811 can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor KM1 when rotating the inner reel unit 810 can be reduced. As a result, rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can be started smoothly.

The outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape, a hub 823 formed in a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer reel 821, and one end side of the opening of the outer reel 821 (FIG. 30(a)). ) left side) and spokes 822 that connect the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

The outer reel 821 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the inner reel 811 and a width dimension in the axial direction to be larger than the axial direction dimension of the inner reel 811 . Furthermore, the inner reel 811 is made of a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. Note that the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 is decorated with a pattern, and the decoration mode will be described later.

The hub 823 is arranged so that its axis is coaxial with the outer reel 821 and is arranged at approximately the center of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. Further, a drive motor KM2 that provides rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820 is connected to the hub 823.

The spokes 822 are formed to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the radially outer side of the hub 823, so that one end side of the opening between the spokes 822 and the outer reel 821 (left side in FIG. 30(a)) A space can be created between the two. Furthermore, the spokes 822 are formed from a plurality of rod-like bodies extending from the hub 823 to the edge 824, and include openings 822a that open between spokes 822 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction.

In the drive motor KM2, the thickness dimension of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction is approximately half of the axial dimension of the outer reel 821. As described above, the hub 823 is located at approximately the same position in the axial direction as the center in the left-right direction of the outer reel 821, and has a space at one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left in the left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)). , most of the drive motor KM2 can be disposed inside the outer reel 821. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

The housing unit 880 is formed into a box-like body with an open front side, and can house the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 therein. The storage unit 880 mainly includes a pair of left and right side walls 881, and an upper wall 882, a lower wall 883, and a back wall 884, which are disposed at the edges between the pair of side walls 881 facing each other. It is formed.

The side wall portion 881 is formed from a plate-shaped body that is substantially rectangular in side view, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30(a)), and has a larger outer diameter than the outer diameter in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 30(b)). It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the left-right direction).

A drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 is disposed on the right surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 30(a)), and on the right side in front view (left side in FIG. 30(a)). ) A drive motor KM1 that drives the inner reel unit 810 is disposed on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 (right side). That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced with respect to the side wall portion 881.

Further, the side wall portion 881 includes a bulge portion 881a that bulges out in a curved shape corresponding to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 on the front side surface. Thereby, light emitted from the backlight unit 830 (described later) can be prevented from escaping from the left and right outer sides of the inner reel 811.

Moreover, the side wall portion 881 is formed from a metal material. Thereby, the rigidity of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. Further, by being formed from a metal material that generally has higher thermal conductivity than a resin material, heat generated inside the accommodation unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the accommodation unit 880. As a result, it is possible to prevent parts from being broken due to heat accumulating inside the housing unit 880.

The upper wall part 882 and the lower wall part 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the storage unit 880, and the upper part (upper part in FIG. 30(b)) of the side wall part 881 and the lower part (in FIG. 30(b)) along the edges of the lower part).

The width dimension of the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is smaller than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction (axial direction). Thereby, the distance dimension between the opposing sides of the side wall portions 881 can be secured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be arranged between the opposing sides.

Further, a plurality of through holes are formed in the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883, which penetrate in the radial direction with respect to the axis of the outer reel 821. Thereby, the fluidity of air between the inside and outside of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from accumulating inside the accommodation unit 880, and it is possible to suppress parts from being broken due to the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

The back wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms the side surface on the back side of the storage unit 880, and is disposed along the edge of the back side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)) of the side wall portion 881.

The back wall portion 884 has an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position intersecting the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(b)), and both left and right end portions where the opening 884a is formed. and an upright portion 884b bent toward the front side.

The width of the opening 884a in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is larger than the width of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. Thereby, when the outer reel 821 moves (swings) in the front-rear direction due to the inertia of rotational movement, vibration, etc., it is possible to suppress the outer reel 821 from colliding with the back wall portion 884.

That is, when the outer reel 821 is operating (swinging) in the front-rear direction due to the inertia of the rotation operation, vibration, etc., a part of the rear side (the right side in FIG. 30(b)) of the outer reel 821 is closed to the opening 884a. can be inserted inside. As a result, the outer reel 821 can be prevented from colliding with the rear wall portion 884.

Further, the opening 884a can improve the fluidity of air between the inside and outside of the housing unit 880. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from remaining inside the accommodation unit 880, and it is possible to prevent parts from being broken due to the heat of the accommodation unit 880.

Here, if an opening 884a that is larger than the width in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 is formed in the back wall portion 884, the rigidity of the back wall portions 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a becomes low. Therefore, there was a risk that the rear wall portion 884 would bend.

Further, in this case, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a by increasing the distance between the opposing sides of the side wall portions 881. There was a problem in that the unit itself of the device 800 became large.

In contrast, in this embodiment, upright portions 884b are formed on both left and right sides of the rear wall portion 884 at the position where the opening 884a is formed. Thereby, the rigidity of the rear wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, bending of the rear wall portion 884 can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, the back wall portion 884 is formed of a metal material, and the distance from both left and right ends of the opening 884a to both left and right ends of the back wall portion 884 is made sufficiently small. Therefore, the rate of plastic deformation when forming both the left and right ends of the back wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, rigidity can be increased.

The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from inside the inner reel 811 in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the symbols on the inner reel 811, and is disposed on the front inner side of the inner reel 811.

The backlight unit 830 is formed into an arc shape when viewed from the side, and the axis of the arc is coaxial with the axis of the inner reel 811. Further, the width dimension of the backlight unit 830 in the axial direction is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the inner reel 811 in the axial direction.

Further, the length L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to have a length equivalent to three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, which will be described later.

Further, in the backlight unit 830, three recesses 831 are arranged in parallel in the circumferential direction on the outer circumferential surface and are recessed inward in the radial direction. Therefore, between each of the recesses 831, a partition plate 832 is formed, which stands upright on the outside of the backlight unit 830 in the radial direction.

A base member 833 including an LED for emitting light is disposed on the radially inner side surface of each recess 831, and the LED can emit light toward the outer side of the backlight unit 830 in the radial direction.

Electric power can be supplied to each base member 833 independently, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, each base member 833 is arranged in a region (recess 831) surrounded on four sides, so that the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 enters the front region of the other base member 833. can be restrained from doing so. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause the inner reel 811 to partially emit light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be explained. 33(a) is a front view of the inner reel 811 developed, and FIG. 33(b) is a front view of the outer reel 821 developed.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), a plurality of symbols are drawn on the inner reel 811 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). Note that, as described above, the circumferential dimension L5 of one symbol is set to one third of the circumferential length L4 of the backlight unit 830 (L5×3=L4).

Furthermore, the inner reel 811 is entirely formed of a material that can transmit light. In particular, the light transmittance of the pattern portion (for example, the display of "7") is set higher than that of the surrounding blank area. Therefore, by irradiating light from the LED of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811, the light from the LED can pass through the inner reel 811 and make the symbol part stand out. Therefore, if the LEDs of the backlight unit 830 are set to emit light, the inner reels 811 can be illuminated even if the inner reels 811 are not irradiated with outside light (light inside the store or light from other LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10). The symbols can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, ten symbols of five types are drawn consecutively in the circumferential direction, and a maximum of three symbols can be visually recognized from the player side by a segment display device 600, which will be described later. As described above, each decorative symbol display device 800 is decorated with symbols arranged in a different manner, and the player can see up to nine symbols.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3×3 symbols using the inner reel 811, thereby setting a total of 5 active jackpot lines, 3 horizontally parallel and 2 diagonally crosswise. be done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three "7" symbols line up on any of the active lines, the player can be informed of the occurrence of a jackpot state.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the outer reel 821 includes a non-decorative surface 821a that is not decorated, and a non-transparent surface 821b that is decorated so as not to transmit light.

The non-decorative surface 821a is not decorated so that light can pass therethrough. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (in this embodiment, a transparent resin material), a non-decorative surface 821a through which light can pass is formed. Note that the non-decorative surface 821a only needs to be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and for example, may be provided with a semi-transparent decoration that can transmit light.

The decorative symbol display device 800 allows the player to visually recognize the symbols on the inner reel 811 arranged inside the outer reel 821 by rotating the outer reel unit 820 and turning the non-decorative surface 821a toward the player. can. That is, the player can visually recognize the symbols on the inner reels 811 through the non-decorative surfaces 821a of the outer reels 821.

The non-transparent surface 821b is made non-transparent to light by applying black decoration to the outer circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 (on the near side in FIG. 33(b)). Further, the non-transparent surface 821b is formed so that its length in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)) is equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811.

As described above, in this embodiment, three symbols on the inner reel 811 can be displayed on the player side. Therefore, by setting the length of the non-transparent surface 821b in the circumferential direction to be equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, the player can rotate the outer reel unit 820 to expose the non-transparent surface of the outer reel 821 to the player. By arranging it on the side, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side.

Note that the length of the non-transparent surface 821b in the circumferential direction is not limited to three or more symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, but is limited to a length in the circumferential direction that makes the decoration of the inner reel 811 invisible from the player side. It is sufficient if the length is formed. That is, it is sufficient that the non-transparent surface 821b is formed for the circumferential length of the inner reel 811 that can be viewed from the player side.

Further, the non-transmissive surface 821b includes a transmissive region 821b1 that can partially transmit light, and a pattern 821b2 decorated with a pattern.

The transmission area 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 33) when viewed from the front. The transmission area 821b1 is a part that displays 7 segments by being combined with a segment display device 600 to be described later, and can partially transmit the light passing through the inner reel 811 to the player side. This makes it possible to form part of a 7-segment display to be described later.

The symbols 821b2 are formed with a circumferential length equal to three of the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, and the outer reel is arranged so that three symbols 821b2 of each decorative symbol display device 800 are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. By stopping 821, the player can be informed of the occurrence of a jackpot state.

Further, as described above, since the area around the symbol 821b2 is non-transparent, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the symbols on the inner reel 811 stop on the active line while producing an effect in which three symbols of the symbols 821b2 line up. Therefore, after the player is made to look at the outer reel 821 due to the rotation performance of the outer reel 821, the player can be made to look at the inner reel 811 almost at the same time as the performance on the outer reel 821 ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. 30(a). FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in range XXXV of FIG. 34. 36(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and FIG. 36(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 812 taken along the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the opposing inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820. Further, a predetermined gap is formed between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 protruding radially from one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 (left side in FIG. 34). A gap is formed.

A hub 812a of the rotating member 812 is formed with a protrusion 812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, they are formed on an extension line of the spokes 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a chevron shape with both sides inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the protrusion 812a1.

Here, conventionally, a first reel (outer reel unit 820) formed to be rotatable and a reel arranged approximately concentrically inside the first reel (outer reel unit 820) and formed to be rotatable. A gaming machine equipped with a second reel (inner reel unit 810) (that is, equipped with a double reel structure) is known. There is also a known technique for cleaning the display surface of the reel by removing dust attached to it by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. There is.

However, the dual reel structure has a problem in that it is difficult to clean. That is, in the double reel structure, there is a space between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)) to arrange the rotating brush described above. Therefore, the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel and the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

That is, since the opposing space between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 is formed narrowly, in order to remove dust (dust) that has entered and stuck between the opposing surfaces, it is necessary to display a decorative pattern. The device 800 is difficult to clean because it requires disassembly.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the protrusion 812a1 can push out air and generate wind. The pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the opposing gap between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

In this case, the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 is narrower than the space on the inner circumferential side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a. 824 and the space on the inner circumferential side of the hub 812a to the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the present embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape and an edge 824 projecting radially inward from one side of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction. 810 is formed into a cylindrical shape and has an outer surface facing the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined interval. It includes a hub 812a whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the edge 824 at a predetermined interval, and the protrusion 812a1 is erected from the outer surface of the hub 812a toward the inner surface of the edge 824, so that the inner surface of the edge 824 and Wind pressure is generated by displacing the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction between the outer surface of the hub 812a and the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 is made to flow using this wind pressure. be able to. Thereby, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

Here, if an opening is formed in at least one of the edge 824 or the hub 812a, or if a part of the circumferential direction is partially separated, there is a gap between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. The wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes from the openings and the divided parts, which weakens the wind pressure and causes the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 to flow accordingly. It becomes difficult to do so.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the edge 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a continuous surface in the circumferential direction, so that the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a are By displacing the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction between the two, the wind pressure generated can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be made to flow more easily. As a result, the gap between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 is created by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. This allows the air to flow more easily.

Further, the protrusion 812a1 partially narrows the opposing distance between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811. Therefore, the projection 812a1 can easily change the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate wind by utilizing changes in atmospheric pressure, and the wind is caused to flow between the opposing surfaces of the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, thereby causing the inner reel 811 to generate wind. Dust (dirt) stuck to the outer circumferential surface or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

To explain in detail, air has a property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure, and by narrowing the distance between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820, the pressure is partially increased. be able to. Therefore, the air pressure in the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, where changes in air pressure are less likely to occur, is reduced between the opposing tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. is lower than the atmospheric pressure of As a result, air can be easily sent to the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, and dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. can.

Furthermore, since the atmospheric pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 facing each other can be increased, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 812a1 from displacing (wobbling) toward the edge 824 or the edge 824 toward the protrusion 812a1. It can be suppressed.

Further, since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in the spoke 822 that supports the edge 824 and the spoke 812c that supports the hub 812a, the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 can be used to Air between the inner surface of the portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be exhausted to the outside (or air can be drawn in from the outside between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a). That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air can flow (outflow or inflow) between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a accordingly. As a result, the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 are connected by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. This allows the air between them to flow more easily.

Further, a protrusion 812a1 is provided upright on the hub 812a (crotch edge 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820), and the spoke 822 (or spoke 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed in the outer opening 825, the effect of reducing flow resistance by taking in (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825 can be easily achieved. That is, when rotating one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 on which the protrusion 812a1 is erected, the other one on which the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 is formed is stopped. , resistance to air flow (exhaust or intake) through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

The outer reel 821 is formed to be slightly inclined radially outward (with its diameter expanded) from the edge 824 (one end) side to which the spokes 822 are connected toward the other end side. Therefore, it is possible to easily send air flowing from one end side to the other end side between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of air flowing between the opposing surfaces of the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped. can prevent sticking.

Furthermore, the inclination angle θ1 of the spokes 812c from the axis of the inner reel 811 to the outside in the radial direction is made larger than the inclination angle θ2 of the spokes 822 from the axis of the outer reel 821 to the outside in the radial direction (θ1>θ2). Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) where they overlap in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 34), they face each other outward in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 34). The dimension in between is increased.

Therefore, by rotationally displacing one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the difference in the distance between the opposing spokes 812c and 822 causes the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 to The wind can be easily generated between the inner circumferential surface and the opposing inner circumferential surface.

To explain in detail, the distance between opposing spokes 812c and spokes 822 is increased toward the radially outer side of inner reel 811 and outer reel 821. Therefore, when the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 are rotationally displaced to a position where they overlap in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is higher between the opposing spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the radially inner portions of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. be made expensive.

As mentioned above, air has the property of flowing from high pressure to low pressure. Therefore, it is possible to form a flow of air from the radially inner portion toward the radially outer portion. That is, an air flow can be formed from the shaft side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the side between the hub 812a and the edge 824 facing each other. Therefore, air can be easily sent to the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In addition, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the fluctuations in the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, that is, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which rotates more often than the outer reel unit 820. In the production by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

Note that by rotating the inner reel unit 810, the timing for cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is determined without any operation by the player (the game ball is not launched into the gaming area). It is preferable to perform this when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at high speed to generate wind, the switching of the symbols on the inner reel 811 can attract the player's interest.

Further, the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while performing the effect of rotationally displacing the non-transparent surface 821b of the outer reel 821 toward the player. In this case, since the inner reel 811 is made invisible to the player, cleaning can be performed without making the cleaning state visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Further, since cleaning can be performed during the gaming state, the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned even when the game is continued for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dirt such as dust from accumulating on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 63. First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side in front view, a vertical displacement unit 600R disposed on the right side in front view, and left and right vertical displacement units 600L. , 600R are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and the connecting member 601 is fastened and fixed from the back side.

In addition, since the configurations of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R are almost the same, in the following, only the vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side when viewed from the front will be described, and the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R will be explained. Detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be explained with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG. 39(a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39(b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

Note that FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 illustrate a state in which the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled.

As shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable, and a first segment unit 610 and a second segment unit 620 disposed on the left and right sides of the displacement unit 650. The system will be equipped with:

Note that the first segment unit 610 is a unit that can display one segment in the left-right direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit that can display two segments in the left-right direction. be. Furthermore, since the first segment unit 610 is formed by simply halving the second segment unit 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below, and the configuration of the second segment unit 620 will be explained below. A code is similarly given to the first segment unit 610.

Each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R is formed with a first segment unit 610 and a second segment unit 620 arranged differently, and the vertical displacement unit 610C has a second segment unit 620 only on the right side when viewed from the front. In the vertical displacement unit 610R, a second segment unit 620 is disposed on the right side when viewed from the front.

Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the left side when viewed from the front, and display two segments on the right side when viewed from the front. Further, the vertical displacement unit 600C can display two segments only on the right side when viewed from the front. Further, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment only on the right side when viewed from the front. In other words, one segment can be formed on both the left and right sides of each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R.

Next, the second segment unit 620 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. 42(a) is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 42(b) is a rear view of the second segment unit 620. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmitting member 621 disposed on the front side, a partition member 622 disposed on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, and a partition member 622 disposed on the rear side of the light transmitting member 621. Mainly includes a plurality of diffusion members 623 disposed on the back surface of the camera, a base member 624 disposed between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and reflection members 625 disposed on both sides of the base member 624. It is formed by

The light transmitting member 621 is made of a translucent light transmitting resin material through which light can pass. The light transmitting member 621 mainly includes a light transmitting portion 621a formed in the shape of an arcuate plate convex toward the front side, and a flat portion 621b continuously formed above and below the light transmitting portion 621a. Ru.

The light transmitting part 621a includes an erected wall 621a1 erected from the left and right ends to the back side, a fastening part 621a2 projecting in an annular shape from the top and bottom ends to the back side, and a fastening part 621a2 extending in the vertical direction at the left and right center position on the front side. The decorative portion 621a3 is formed continuously from the decorative portion 621a3, which is recessed on the back side.

The standing wall 621a1 is formed to stand up from the left and right ends of the light transmitting part 621a on the back side. The dimension between the facing walls 621a1 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of the partition member 622, which will be described later. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a, it is possible to restrict the partition member 622 from moving from side to side.

The fastening part 621a2 is a protrusion that forms a hole in which a reflecting member 625 (described later) is fastened with a screw, and is formed to protrude in an annular shape from the back side of the light transmitting part 621a. Therefore, the reflective member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of the screw into the inner edge of the fastening portion 621a2.

As described above, the decorative portion 621a3 is recessed continuously in the vertical direction at the horizontally central position of the light transmitting portion 621a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the light that passes through the left side when viewed from the front from being reflected inside the decorative portion 621a3 and emitted from the right side when viewed from the front. Note that a detailed explanation of the light passing through the decorative portion 621a3 will be given later.

The plane portion 621b is a plate member for fastening to a base member 660 of a displacement unit 650, which will be described later. The flat part 621b is formed into a plate-shaped body having substantially the same shape in front view as the base member 660, and the displacement unit 650 and the second segment unit 620 are fastened by fastening a screw through the flat part 621b. can do.

Furthermore, an elastic piece 621b1 is formed to protrude from the plane portion 621b and protrudes from the opposite side. The elastic pieces 621b1 are formed to protrude from opposing side surfaces of the pair of upper and lower plane parts 621b, and protrude in a curved shape convex toward the front side. Further, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape with a smaller radius than the light transmitting part 621a, and its protruding tip is attached to the upper wall part 882 or the lower wall of the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside the displacement unit 650. 883. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven, it is possible to suppress the decorative symbol display device 800 from vibrating.

The partition member 622 is made of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is formed into a curved plate shape when viewed from the side. The radius of the curved outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the width in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42) is equal to the width in the vertical direction of the light transmitting portion 621a. is set smaller than. Therefore, the partition member 622 can be disposed with the outer circumferential surface of the partition member 622 in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the light transmitting portion 621a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the partition member 622 has a first recessed portion 622a that is recessed toward the center from both left and right end surfaces (left and right in FIG. 42), and a first recessed portion 622a that is recessed toward the center from the upper and lower end surfaces (top and bottom in FIG. 42). It is formed mainly of a second recessed part 622b provided therein, and a protrusion part 622c projected from the left and right center position on the back side.

Two first recessed portions 622a are formed in parallel in the vertical direction on both left and right sides. That is, the first recessed portions 622a are formed at four locations in the partition member 622.

The second recessed portion 622b is formed by being recessed from both upper and lower ends. The dimension between the opposing ends of the second recessed portions 622b is set to be approximately the same as the vertical separation distance of the fastening portions 621a2 formed on the light transmitting member 621. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting member 621, by inserting the fastening part 621a2 inside the second recessed part 622b, it is possible to suppress the partition member 622 from moving in the vertical direction. .

The protruding portion 622c is formed at the horizontally central position of the partition member 622 and extends in the vertical direction. Further, the protruding portion 622c includes a recessed portion 622c1 formed in the distal end surface of the protruding portion. The width of the recess 622c1 in the left-right direction is larger than the thickness of the base member 624, which will be described later. Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 on the partition member 622, the distal end side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside the recess 622c1. As a result, when arranging the base member 624, the base member 624 can be positioned, and the base member 624 can be prevented from moving in the left-right direction.

The diffusion member 623 is made of a cloudy-white resin material and can diffuse light that enters inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed into a curved plate shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of its outer circumferential portion (front side) is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner circumferential portion (back side) of the partition member 622. Therefore, the diffusion member 623 can be placed on the back side of the partition member 622 in a grounded state.

Further, two diffusion members 623 are arranged vertically in parallel, and two are arranged horizontally at a predetermined distance apart. That is, four diffusion members 623 are arranged on the back side of the partition member 622.

The width dimension of the diffusion member 623 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the dimension between the facing wall 621a1 of the light transmitting member 621 and the protruding portion 622c of the partition member 622. Thereby, when the diffusion member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the diffusion member 623 from moving from side to side.

Further, the diffusion member 623 is formed with a protrusion 623a that protrudes toward the front side, and a recessed portion 623b that is recessed on the back side of the protrusion 623a.

The protruding part 623a is formed in a protruding manner at a position corresponding to the first recessed part 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is inserted into the first recessed part 622a. will be established. Thereby, when the diffusion member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the partition member 622 from shifting in the left-right and up-down directions.

Furthermore, the protrusion distance of the protrusion 623a is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622. That is, the protruding portion 623a is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the protruding tip surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

The recessed portion 623b is formed on the opposite side of the protruding portion 623a (on the back side of the diffusion member 623) in a shape that is slightly smaller than the shape of the protruding portion 623a when viewed from the front. is formed. Thereby, the thickness of the plate of the diffusion member 623 can be made substantially constant, and distortion when molding the diffusion member 623 can be suppressed. Further, by forming the recessed portion 623b in a slightly smaller shape than the protruding portion 623a, the area on the back side of the end of the protruding portion 623a can be increased. Therefore, more light can be incident on the diffusion member 623 from the LED 624a, which will be described later, at the end of the protrusion 623a. As a result, the mode of light that is visible to the player via the diffusion member 623 can be made clearer, and the player's interest can be prevented from decreasing.

The base member 624 is formed from a crescent-shaped plate whose front side is curved, and includes an LED 624a that irradiates light on the side surface. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the recessed end surface of the recessed portion 622c1 formed in the partition member 622. Therefore, when disposing the base member 624 on the back side of the partition member 622, by inserting the base member 624 inside the recess 622c1 of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the base member 624 from shifting in the left-right direction. can.

A plurality of LEDs 624a are disposed on both left and right side surfaces of the base member 624, and the irradiation direction thereof is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624. That is, the direction of light emitted from the LED 624a is the left-right direction. Note that a detailed explanation of the light irradiation from the LED 624a will be given later.

One reflecting member 625 is disposed on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624. The reflective member 625 is made of a white resin material and has an arcuate shape convex toward the front side. Further, the radius of the arc of the reflecting member 625 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the diffusing member 623. Thereby, when the reflecting member 625 is disposed on the back side of the diffusing member 623, the reflecting member 625 and the diffusing member 623 can be grounded.

The reflective member 625 is formed in a plate-like body that is spaced from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the back side toward the front side, and includes an inclined portion 625a that is inclined from the back side toward the front side, and the inclined portion 625a. It mainly includes a plurality of recesses 625b formed in the front side in the vertical direction, and wall parts 625c formed protruding toward the front side at the upper end, lower end, and middle part of the recess 625b. It is formed by

The front side of the inclined portion 625a is a reflective surface 625a1 that reflects the light from the LED 624a of the base member 624 toward the front side, and is formed to be inclined at approximately 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624. As described above, the light irradiation direction of the LED 624a is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624, so the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined with respect to the side surface of the base member 624, so that the LED 624a It is possible to reflect the light emitted from the front side. Note that the manner in which the light from the LED 624a travels will be described later.

The recessed portion 625b is formed in a convex curved shape on the back side. Further, the recessed portion 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, thereby making it possible to make the amount of light from the LED 624a visible to the player via the diffusion member 623 uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the progress of the light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along the line XLV-XLV in FIG. 42(a). Note that in FIG. 45, a part of the mode of light emitted from the LED 624a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Further, the outer shape of the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed on the left and right rear sides of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 45, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflective surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle). The direction of reflection can be directed outward. In this case, since the reflecting member 625 is formed from a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the space on the opposite side of the reflecting surface 625a1 (the back side of the reflecting member 625) can be increased. Thereby, the end portion of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be placed on the back side of the second segment unit 620.

Here, a rotation device (decorative pattern display device 800) is formed to be rotatable and a plurality of rotation cylinders are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and at least one of the rotation cylinders is arranged along between the plurality of rotation cylinders. A decorative member (light transmitting member 621) whose portion is light transmitting, and a substrate (base member 624) disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted. A game machine is known in which a board is arranged with a surface on which means is mounted substantially perpendicular to the back surface of a decorative member. According to this gaming machine, not only can the space between the spinning drums be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern can be formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light from the light emitting means that has passed through the decorative member. It is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to visually recognize the pattern of the decorative member integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, the board is arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member, so the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently directed onto the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there was a problem that the production effect was insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means is made small while the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is made large, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotation drum will be hindered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the reflecting member 625 that reflects the light emitted from the LED 624a to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is provided, so that the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. Even if the base member 624 is disposed in the same orientation, it is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 with the light emitted from the LED 624a. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Further, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that a sense of unity can be created between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side of the outer circumferential surface of the decorative pattern display device 800, and extends its outer edge to a position overlapping the outer circumferential surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 when viewed from the front. Since the decorative pattern display device 800 is formed to extend, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible). Further, since the pattern of the light-transmitting member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be brought closer to each other, the pattern of the light-transmitting member 621 It is possible to easily create a sense of unity between the display device 800 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Furthermore, the reflecting member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, thereby forming a region on the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and a pattern on the light transmitting member 621. Since the back surface of the reflective member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 as it goes from the light transmitting member 621 toward the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a The back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is brought close to the outer circumferential surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 while ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed). The decorative pattern display device 800 can be moved to the back side (the decorative pattern display device 800 can be brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible), and a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Further, since the LED 624a is mounted on both the one side surface and the other side surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on one side surface and the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on the other side surface are different from the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on the one side surface. Different patterns can be independently formed (displayed) on the light transmitting member 621 depending on the light emitted from the LED 624a.

In this case, the number of base members 624 disposed between the decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged in parallel can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the base member 624 can be suppressed, the decorative pattern display device 800 can be moved deeper into the back side of the light transmitting member 621 (the decorative pattern display device 800 can be moved closer to the base member 624). be able to) As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible), and a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Furthermore, as described above, since the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflective surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle), The direction of reflection can be directed outward. Thereby, the reflective member 625 can be made smaller (compared to the case where the reflective surface 625a1 is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624). Therefore, the space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 can be secured accordingly. As a result, the second segment unit 620 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be placed close to each other, so that it becomes easier to form a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46 is a side view of the base member 624. FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along the line XLVII-XLVII in FIG. 42(a).

As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed into a square shape when viewed from the side, and can emit light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged at intervals of an inclination angle θ1 in the circumferential direction about an axis that is substantially the same as the curved axis on the front side of the base member 624. Thereby, the heat accumulated in the base member 624 due to the irradiation of the LED 624a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base member 624 from becoming partially heated and damaging the LED 624a.

Note that in this embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are distributed in the circumferential direction. Further, the LED 624a is arranged in such a direction that one side of the square light emitting surface is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the base member 624.

Here, a substrate (base member 624) on which a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted, and a transmitting member (light transmitting member 621) that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are conventionally provided. A gaming machine is known in which a light transmitting portion 621a) of a transmitting member 621 is formed in a curved manner and a plurality of light emitting means are arranged along the curve of the transmitting member. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals when the transparent member is viewed from the front. That is, the light emitting means are equally spaced along the direction of the line segment (chord) connecting both ends of the curved line (arc) formed by the plurality of light emitting means. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the distance between some of the plurality of light emitting means and adjacent light emitting means is narrowed, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. Therefore, heat is concentrated on some light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the LEDs 624a are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between each LED 624a and the adjacent LED 624a can be constant, and the distribution of the heat emitted by the LEDs 624a can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from concentrating on some of the LEDs 624a, thereby increasing the lifespan of each LED 624a.

As shown in FIG. 47, one recess 625b is formed on the back side (right side in FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. Further, the separation distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of the first recess 625b is set to be the same.

Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of inclination θ1. Therefore, the distance between the LEDs 624a in the vertical direction is narrower on the center side in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) than on the outer side in the vertical direction. Therefore, the amount of light reflected by the reflective member 625 and irradiated to the player side increases toward the center in the vertical direction (the center in the vertical direction becomes darker), making the light uniformly visible to the player. The problem was that it could not be done.

In other words, when a plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals along the curve of the light transmitting portion 621a (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction), the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at unequal intervals when the light transmitting portion 621a is viewed from the front. It will be arranged as follows. That is, in a front view of the light transmitting portion 621a, a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is narrow and a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a reflecting member 625 is provided that reflects the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmitting portion 621a, and the reflecting member 625 has a plurality of recesses 625b partitioned corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. Since the division widths of the plurality of recesses 625b in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a are set to be approximately the same, the amount of light of each recess 625b visually recognized in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a can be approximately the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a can be made uniform.

That is, since the separation distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of the first recess 625b is set to be the same, the player The area of light emitted to the side can be made substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of light irradiated onto the player side from increasing toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, the light can be uniformly visible to the player.

In addition, since the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular shape (square) when viewed from the front, it is possible to ensure light diffusivity (light can be emitted at a wider angle) than when the light emitting surface is circular, for example. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in the first concave portion 625b.

Note that the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the light emitting surface having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front means that the shape of the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front) is rectangular.

Furthermore, at least a part of the plurality of LEDs 624a is arranged in such a direction that one side of the light emitting surface is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the light transmitting portion 621a, so that the light emitted from the LED 624a is transmitted to the light transmitting portion 621a. This makes it easier to spread the particles uniformly along the curvature of the surface. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

Further, the recess 625b is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the light transmitting section 621a and is recessed toward the side away from the rear surface of the light transmitting section 621a, so that the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is located between the opposing light transmitting section 621a and the recess 625b. Since the base member 624 faces the light transmitting portion 621a, it is possible to arrange the base member 624 in a position perpendicular to the light transmitting portion 621a. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit including the light transmitting portion 621a, the base member 624, and the reflecting member 625 can be increased. In this case, since the recess 625b is arranged to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED 624a from a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the recess 625b is transmitted to the back surface of the light transmitting part 621a. can be made uniformly incident on the target. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the mode of light emitted by the LED 624a will be described. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In addition, in FIG. 48, the light irradiated by the LED 624a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and is also illustrated with the reference numeral of irradiation region SR1.

As shown in FIG. 48, by emitting light from the LED 624a, the first segment unit 610 is irradiated with light from two irradiation regions SR1 arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). Further, the second segment unit 620 is irradiated with light from the irradiation areas SR1 arranged in a 2×2 pattern vertically and horizontally. Note that the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light transmitting member 621.

Therefore, by using the irradiation area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620, it is possible to display both the left and right sides of numbers in a 7-segment display. Note that the upper, lower, and center positions of the numbers in the 7-segment display will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Note that FIGS. 49 and 50 show the disassembled state of the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 includes a pair of left and right base members 660, a displacement member 670 rotatably supported by the base members 660, and a displacement member 670 disposed on the base member 660. The displacement member 670 mainly includes a drive means 680 for transmitting the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670.

The base member 660 is formed from a pair of left and right plate members having a space in the center that is larger than the decorative pattern display device 800 described above. Furthermore, a first segment unit 610 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front, and a second segment unit 620 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the right side when viewed from the front. Note that the base members 660 are arranged vertically and horizontally oppositely on the left and right sides, and in this embodiment, only the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front will be described, and a description of the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front will be omitted.

The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the side, and includes a protrusion portion 661 that curves and protrudes from the front side surface in a convex shape toward the front side. The base member 660 also has a through hole 662, through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 is inserted, which is disposed at one end (upper end) in the vertical direction, and a connection hole 662, which is disposed at both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction. An insertion hole 663 through which a rod 681 is inserted, a recess 664 in which a displacement member 670 (described later) is supported, a sliding groove 665 formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the recess 664, and a sliding groove 665 located above and below the recess 664. and an engaging portion 666 that protrudes into the venue.

The radius of the protruding tip of the protruding portion 661 is set to be smaller than the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the reflecting member 625 described above, and its curved axis is set to be substantially colinear with the curved axis of the reflecting member 625. Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are arranged on the base member 660, it is possible to suppress the protrusion 661 and the reflective member 625 from coming into contact with each other, and the heat of the base member 624 is Intrusion between the opposing base members 660 can be suppressed. As a result, the temperature of the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside the opposing base member 660 increases, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that rotationally drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be prevented from being broken.

The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and the gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. Set. Therefore, the drive motor KM3 can be disposed on the base member 660 with the gear 682 connected to the drive motor KM3. Note that the drive motor KM3 is attached to the base member 660 from the opposing side of the base members 660 arranged to face each other.

The through hole 662 is a hole into which a connecting rod 681 of a driving means 680 to be described later is inserted, and is formed larger than the external shape of the connecting rod 681 and is formed at both upper and lower ends of the base member 660.

The recessed portion 664 is formed in a circular shape recessed outward from the opposing side of the base member 660 . The recess 664 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of a connecting protrusion 671b of a displacement member 670, which will be described later. Thereby, the connecting protrusion 671b can be inserted and disposed inside the recess 664.

By inserting the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 into the sliding groove 665, the displacement member 670 and the driving means 680 disposed outside the pair of base members 660 can be connected. Further, by inserting the connecting protrusion 671b into the sliding groove 665, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided. Therefore, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposite side of the base member 660 so that its tip has a gap larger than the diameter of the opposite side surface of the base member 660 and one end of a torsion spring SP1 to be described later. Thereby, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engaging portion 666.

The displacement members 670 are arranged in opposite directions in a pair of upper and lower positions. The displacement member 670 is formed from an extending member 671 whose one end is pivotally supported by the base member 660, and a decorative unit 672 connected to the other end of the extending member 671.

The extension members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape, and are arranged in pairs with left and right opposite directions. The extension member 671 has a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction at one end of the longitudinal side, a connecting protrusion 671b protruding leftward and rightward at a substantially central position on the longitudinal side, and a shaft support hole 671a extending from the side surface of the longitudinal side. The extension member 671 mainly includes a protrusion 671d projecting in the circumferential direction, and an elastic member 671f made of an elastic material and disposed on the side surface of the extension member 671.

The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. Therefore, by inserting the collar C into the shaft support hole 671a and fastening and fixing the collar C inside the recess 664 of the base member 660 with a screw, the displacement member 670 is rotatably connected to the base member 660. can.

Further, by arranging the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 on the same axis, and by inserting the collar C into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastening and fixing it to the base member 660, the upper and lower A displacement member 670 is arranged to be rotatable on the same axis.

Furthermore, the left and right extending members 671 are formed with a bulging portion 671a1 that bulges outward in the left-right direction around one of the shaft support holes 671a. The outer diameter of the bulged portion 671a1 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the recessed portion 664 of the base member 660. Further, the bulging portions 671a1 are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670.

That is, in this embodiment, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the right shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side, the right shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side is formed. , is placed inside the bulge 671a1. On the other hand, the left shaft support hole 671a has a bulging portion 671a1 formed in the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side, so that the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side supports the left shaft support hole 671a. The hole 671a is placed inside the bulge 671a1 (see FIG. 49).

Thereby, the collar C allows the bulge 671a1 to be inserted into the recess 664 when the displacement member 670 is disposed on the base member 660. As a result, when a force is applied in the radial direction of the shaft of the shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670, the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner peripheral surface of the recessed portion 664 come into contact with each other, so that the shaft support hole 671a or Damage to the collar C can be suppressed.

That is, in this embodiment, since the pair of displacement members 670 are disposed coaxially with the base member 660, the axial length of the collar C is increased accordingly. Therefore, when a force is applied in the radial direction to the rotating shaft of the displacement member 670, a large force tends to act on the rotating shaft. Therefore, although the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is easily damaged, the force acting in the radial direction on the rotational shaft of the displacement member 670 is maintained by the contact between the bulged portion 671a1 and the recessed portion 664. can do. As a result, damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

A through hole 671d1 that penetrates in the longitudinal direction of the extending member 671 is formed in the protrusion 671d. The through hole 671d1 is a hole into which torsion springs SP1 and SP2, which will be described later, are inserted, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

The elastic member 671f is disposed on a side surface of an extending member 671 on the side in which a pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, which will be described later, approach each other. Further, when the upper and lower extending members 671 are disposed close to each other, the sizes are set so that the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f are in contact with each other. Thereby, it is possible to absorb the impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to adjacent positions.

The drive means 680 is means for transmitting the power of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670. The drive means 680 includes a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, a large-diameter gear 683 that meshes with the gear 682, and a rod-shaped body with one end connected to the side surface of the large-diameter gear 683 and the other end. a first link member 684 that is connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 that transmits power to the opposite side through the base member 660, and a cam member 685 that is connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotates; The second link member 686 is formed into a rod-shaped body, one end of which is rotatably connected to the cam member 685, and the other end of which is connected to the displacement member 670.

As described above, the gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3, and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

The large-diameter gear 683 is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the side, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface that meshes with the gear 682, and a protrusion 683b that protrudes in an annular shape from the side surface in the rotation axis direction. It is formed by Since the gear surface 683a of the large diameter gear 683 meshes with the gear 682, the large diameter gear 683 is rotated when the gear 682 is rotated. That is, it is rotated by rotationally driving the drive motor KM3.

The protrusion 683b is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683. Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The first link member 684 is formed into a rod-shaped body, and insertion holes 684a and 684b are formed at both ends thereof to pass through in the left-right direction.

The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 683b. A protrusion 683b is inserted into the insertion hole 684a, and the tip of the protrusion 683b is fastened with a screw whose head has a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a, so that the first link member 684 can be rotated into the large diameter gear 683. Can be linked in the state.

The insertion hole 684b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The first link member 684 can be rotated to the displacement member 670 by inserting the connecting projection 671b into the insertion hole 684b and fastening the tip of the connecting projection 671b with a screw whose head has a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in a state.

Therefore, when the large diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced around the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683 due to the rotational displacement of the large diameter gear 683, and the projection 683b is rotated. The first link member 684 connected to one end is displaced, and the displacement member 670 connected to the other end of the first link member 684 is displaced.

One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted into the insertion hole 663 of the base member 660 disposed on the left side in front view, and is fitted into the rotating shaft portion of the large diameter gear 683. On the other hand, the other end of the connecting rod 681 is connected to a cam member 685. Therefore, the connecting rod 681 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3, and the cam member 685 is rotated.

The cam member 685 is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the side, and the connecting rod 681 is fitted into the shaft portion thereof. The cam member 685 also includes a protrusion 685a that protrudes outward in an annular shape from its axial side surface. The protrusion 685a is formed to protrude in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis of the cam member 685. Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The second link member 686 is formed to have the same shape as the first link member 684, which is horizontally reversed. The second link member 686 includes insertion holes 686a and 686b at both longitudinal ends thereof.

The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the protrusion 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 685a. The protrusion 685a is inserted into the insertion hole 686a, and the tip of the protrusion 685a is fastened with a screw whose head has a larger outer diameter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a, so that the second link member 686 can be rotated by the cam member 685. You can connect with .

The insertion hole 686b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670 by inserting the connecting projection 671b into the insertion hole 686b and fastening the tip of the connecting projection 671b with a screw whose head has an outer diameter larger than the inside diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in a state.

Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced around the rotation axis of the cam member 685 as the cam member 685 is rotated, and one end is attached to the protrusion 685a. The connected second link member 686 is displaced, and the displacement member 670 connected to the other end of the second link member 686 is displaced.

That is, this is performed by displacing the displacement member 670, the first link member 684, and the second link member 686. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, it is possible to suppress tilting when the displacement member 670 is displaced. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be smoothly displaced.

Next, the displacement member 670 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. 51(a) is a front view of the displacement member 670, and FIG. 51(b) is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member 670 taken along the line LIII-LIII in 51(a).

As described above, the displacement member 670 includes an extension member 671 rotatably supported by the base member 660 and a decoration unit 672 connected to the extension member 671.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extension member 671 includes a connecting portion 671c formed in a plate shape on the shorter side (the connecting side of the decorative unit 672). A stepped portion 671c1 that partially protrudes in a step-like manner is formed on the surfaces of the pair of left and right extension members 671 where the connecting portions 671c face each other. The stepped portions 671c1 are formed alternately on the left and right, and the stepped portions 671c1 are engaged with each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Thereby, dimensional errors can be absorbed when the extending member 671 is molded.

The decoration unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that emits light inside and emits light to the player side. The decoration unit 672 includes a back cover 673 disposed on the back side, a front cover 676 covering the back cover 673 and disposed on the front side of the back cover 673, and the back cover 673 and the front cover 676. It is formed mainly of a base member 674 disposed between opposing sides of the base member 674, and a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 disposed between the base member 674 and the front cover 676.

The back cover 673 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a connecting portion 671c of the extension member 671 is fastened to the back side. Thereby, the decoration unit 672 and the extension member 671 can be fastened together.

Further, the back cover 673 is made of a resin material that is difficult to transmit light (non-transparent). The back cover 673 includes a reflecting portion 673a that is recessed and formed on the back side at a position facing a diffusion member 675, which will be described later.

The reflective portion 673a is formed at the lower edge of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and its inner surface is painted white with high light reflectivity. Thereby, the light irradiated to the inside of the reflection part 673a can be reflected inside the reflection part 673a and irradiated to the diffusion member 675 side.

The front cover 676 has substantially the same shape as the rear cover 673 when viewed from the front, and is disposed to cover the front side of the rear cover 673. Further, the front cover 676 is made of a resin material that can transmit light, and can emit light emitted from a first LED 674a and a second LED, which will be described later, to the front side (player side).

The base member 674 is formed into a laterally elongated rectangular plate-shaped body that is smaller than the back cover 673 when viewed from the front. On the front side of the base member 674, there are first LEDs 674a that are arranged side by side on the lower edge in the left and right direction and emit light to the diffusion member 675 side, and are arranged above the first LED 674a and emit light to the lens member 677. A second LED 674b that emits light.

The first LED 674a is disposed at a position facing the upper end of the diffusion member 675, and is disposed so as to be able to irradiate light downward to the base member 674. Thereby, the light emitted from the first LED 674a can be suppressed from entering the lens member 677, which will be described later. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side via the diffusion member 675 and the light emitted to the front side via the lens member 677, thereby preventing the player's interest from being lost. It can be suppressed.

The second LED 674b is arranged above the first LED 674a. Therefore, the light from the second LED 674b can be made to enter the lens member 677 disposed above the diffusion member 675.

The diffusion member 675 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the lower end of the front cover 676 on the back side. The diffusion member 675 is made of a cloudy-white resin material that can diffuse the light incident therein. Thereby, the light emitted from the first LED 674a and incident on the diffusion member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform throughout and emitted to the front side (player side).

The lens member 677 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the upper end of the front cover 676 on the back side. The lens member 677 is made of a transparent resin material and has a plurality of protrusions formed on the back side (not shown). Thereby, the light emitted from the second LED 674b can be easily made to enter the inside through the protrusion on the back side. As a result, even if the amount of light emitted from the second LED 674b is reduced, the light can be made to enter the lens member 677, and the light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the mode of light emitted by the first LED 674a to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 will be described. FIG. 54 is a front view of displacement member 670. Note that in FIG. 54, the area of light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and is indicated by the reference numeral irradiation area SR2.

As shown in FIG. 54, the area of light emitted toward the player by the first LED 674a has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction at the lower end of the decoration unit 672 (front cover 676). Since the displacement member 670 is disposed at both the upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, the displacement member 670 forms the irradiation region SR2 at a position separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Therefore, the irradiation areas SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 can display upper and lower numbers in a 7-segment display.

Next, the seven segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. In addition, in FIGS. 55 and 56, a state in which the transparent area 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated toward the player side is illustrated, and the irradiation area SR1, the irradiation area SR2, and the transmission area 821b1 are illustrated with two-dot chain lines. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 55, the irradiation areas SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are formed in two lines in the vertical direction and six lines in the left and right direction. It is said to be in a state of

The irradiation area SR1 is formed as a set of four lights with the decorative pattern display device 800 sandwiched between them, and three sets of the lights are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Between one set of irradiation regions SR1, irradiation regions SR2 are arranged above and below, and a transmission region 821b1 is arranged at an intermediate position between the upper and lower sides. Therefore, the seven irradiation regions SR1, SR2 and the transmission region 821b1 can display numbers in seven segments.

As described above, three sets of four radiation areas SR1 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, so each set forms a 7-segment display. That is, three 7-segment displays are arranged side by side in the left and right direction.

Therefore, numbers can be displayed on the 7-segment displays arranged in parallel in the left-right direction as valid lottery lines for jackpots in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the segment "7" can be displayed on all 7-segment displays). ) Thereby, it is possible to display not only the jackpot by the above-mentioned decorative symbol display device 800 but also the jackpot by the 7-segment display. As a result, the player can view a plurality of display formats, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Here, the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are curved in a convex shape toward the front side, so that the player cannot visually recognize the display of the seven segments. At this time, the display at the center in the vertical direction closer to the player becomes larger, and the display at both ends in the upper and lower direction farther from the player becomes smaller. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was not possible for the player to clearly see the display of the numbers in seven segments.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the width of the 7-segment display in the left-right direction is gradually increased from the vertical center position toward the upper and lower ends. This makes it possible to uniformize the overall display of the seven segments at the upper and lower ends and at the upper and lower center positions. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment numbers displayed.

Further, the 7-segment display formed on both the left and right sides is formed such that the center portion in the vertical direction is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. This allows the player to clearly see the seven segment displays formed on both the left and right sides.

That is, the player's viewpoint is normally located at the center position of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the segment display device 600 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is located in front of the seven segments displayed in the center. Therefore, due to the curved shapes of the light transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620, the 7-segment display is viewed by the player in a curved manner as the distance from the player's viewpoint to the left and right increases. Since the center portion of the 7-segment display in the vertical direction is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction, the 7-segment display is curved and difficult to visually recognize from the player's viewpoint. As a result, the player can clearly see the 7-segment display.

Next, the displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIGS. 57(a) to G01(c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 58(a), FIG. 59(a) and FIG. 60(a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 58(b), FIG. 59(a) and FIG. 60(b) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG.

Note that in FIGS. 57(a), 58(a), and 58(b), the displacement member 670 is shown in a retracted state, and FIGS. 57(b), 59(a), and 59 In (b), the displacement member 670 is shown in an intermediate state, and in FIGS. 57(c), 60(a), and 60(b), the displacement member 670 is shown in an extended state. The condition is illustrated.

In addition, the retracted state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the displacement members 670 disposed in a pair of upper and lower sides are spaced apart from each other upwardly and outwardly, and the extended state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the displaceable members 670 disposed in an upper and lower pair are separated from each other. The member 670 is in contact with each other at an intermediate position between the upper and lower sides, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed between the retracted state and the extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, in the position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state, the displacement member 670 disposed in the upper part (upper part in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower By positioning the link member 684 and the second link member 686 upward, the decorative unit 672 is positioned upward with the shaft support hole 671a as the rotation axis.

Further, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above is engaged with the through hole 671d1 at the base end portion on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). It is said that Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the displacement member 670 to maintain the state in which the decoration unit 672 is disposed on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

On the other hand, the displacement member 670 arranged in the lower part (lower part in FIG. 57) of the pair of upper and lower parts has the shaft support hole 671a because the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are located in the lower part. The decorative unit 672 is positioned below as a rotating shaft.

Further, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed below is engaged with the through hole 671d1 at the base end portion on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). It is said that Therefore, the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, the decorative unit 672 can be easily displaced upward in the direction of gravity by the displacement member 670.

In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the opposing decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player's side in the vertical direction.

When rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM3 from the state shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 58, the large diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. As a result, the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are displaced to approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Therefore, the displacement member 670 connected to the insertion holes 684b and 686b of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 671a, and the state shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 59 is displaced to the states shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60.

As shown in FIG. 57(b) and FIG. 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the intermediate state position, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above passes through the displacement member 670. The engagement position with the hole 671d1 is an intermediate position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP1, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than at the engaged position in the retracted state.

Further, similarly to the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is set on the other end side (the position where the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is inserted into the through hole 671d1). side). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP2, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than at the engaged position in the retracted state.

In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than that in the retracted state is formed between the facing decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, and the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. . In this case, one symbol decorated on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed to the player.

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 670 from the retracted state in which three symbols are displayed vertically to be decorated on the inner reel 811, to the intermediate state in which one symbol is displayed in the vertical direction to be decorated on the inner reel 811. , it is possible to create a plurality of performance modes, thereby increasing the player's interest. Further, by displaying one figure side decorated on the inner reel 811 in the vertical direction, it is possible to draw the player's attention to one symbol. Therefore, it is possible to clarify the part to which attention should be drawn, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

As shown in FIGS. 57(c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above passes through the The engagement position with the hole 671d1 is the tip position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP1, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the intermediate engagement position.

Further, similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side has its engagement position with the through hole 671d1 on the other end side (inserted into the through hole 671d1). The position of the tip of the Therefore, by deforming the torsion spring SP2, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased, and by changing the engagement position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the intermediate engagement position.

That is, the biasing force of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear with the displacement of the displacement member 670. Thereby, depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670, the necessary biasing force can be easily applied from the torsion springs SP1 and SP2. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

In the extended state, the decoration units 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are brought into contact with the vertical displacement unit 600L at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. In this case, the decorative unit 672 is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 800, and the display of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be made invisible from the player side (front side).

Therefore, by setting the displacement member 670 in the extended state, rotating and displacing the inner reel unit 810 and outer reel unit 820, and then displacing the displacement member 670 to the intermediate state or the retracted state, the symbols are aligned to the player ( It is easy to create a sense of anticipation (a lottery was held for a jackpot). As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

Note that in the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair of upper and lower positions are displaced by the same amount, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the two drive motors KM3 provided is rotated. In this way, only one side of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 can be displaced to an intermediate position or an extended position.

Further, the maximum displacement amount of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is not set at an intermediate position, but can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. 60. That is, it can be vertically displaced while the pair of displacement members 670 are in contact with each other.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. 61 to 63 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Note that in FIGS. 61 to 63, transition states of the displacement member 670 are sequentially illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the displacement member 670 disposed above the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670 are given a suffix U, and The displacement member 670 disposed on the side and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670 will be described with a letter D added to the end of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the vertical displacement unit 600L, extending members 671 of the displacement member 670 are disposed on both left and right sides. The pair of extension members 671 have a driven side to which the driving force of the drive motor KM3 is transmitted via the connecting rod 681, and a driving side to which the driving force of the drive motor KM3 is transmitted by the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683. connected to either one.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the displacement members 670 arranged vertically are displaced, the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, the decorative units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction with their side surfaces in contact with each other. .

Here, a first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) and a first displacement member (decoration unit 672U), which are disposed facing each other and are formed to be movable in the direction toward or away from each other, and are also formed to be movable in the same direction with opposing sides in contact with each other. A gaming machine equipped with two displacement members (decoration unit 672D) is known. According to this gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to each other until their opposing sides contact each other, objects located on the back sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, , a liquid crystal display device or a presentation member) and displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other. You can perform a performance that In addition, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is possible to maintain the shielding of the target object. , it is also possible to perform a performance before the shield is removed (a performance that draws attention to the shield release operation).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is difficult to bring the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other due to the dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members, and the space between the opposite sides There was a problem that a gap may be formed between the two. When a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can see the object on the back side through the gap, which impedes the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base member 660 is provided with a driving means 680U and a driving means 680D that displaceably support the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D, respectively, and the driving means 680U is supported. The opposite side of the decorative unit 672D is biased toward one side of the opposite side of the decorative unit 672U and is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the decorative unit 672D that is in contact with one side of the opposite side of the decorative unit 672U. Since the supporting manner of the driving means 680D is biased to one side, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, the supporting manner of the driving means 680U and the supporting manner of the driving means 680D are different. They can be biased to opposite sides (sides rotated by 180 degrees around the centers of one side and the other side of the opposing sides). Thereby, the opposite sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides (see FIG. 63).

In this embodiment, since the number of disposed components is different on one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction), the driving force transmitted to the left and right sides of the decoration unit 672 is different, and the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are , one's more rigid side (lower side) can face the opponent's less rigid side (higher side). Therefore, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other on the side with higher rigidity, and pushes the other on the side with lower rigidity. Then, you can create a state of accepting (retreating) the other person. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

The drive means 680U is a drive motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that connect the decorative unit 672U to the base member, and transmits the drive force of the drive motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U, respectively. The driving means 680D includes a first link member 684U and a second link member 686U that have different configurations from each other. The decoration unit 672U and The opposing sides of the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of gaps between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D may be on the side where the driving force is larger or on the side where the driving force is transmitted earlier, for example. In addition to pushing the opponent (moving forward), it is possible to create a state in which the opponent is accepted (retreating) on the side where the driving force is smaller or when the driving force is transmitted later. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Further, the extension member 671U and the extension member 671D are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D, and the other end side rotates coaxially with the base member 660. Since the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other, even if the bias of the support mode is used, the opposing sides are not in contact with each other. This makes it easier to maintain contact.

Further, an elastic member 671f made of a rubber-like elastic material is provided on the extending member 671U or 671D, and when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other on opposite sides, the elastic member 671f is made of a rubber-like elastic material. Since the body is interposed between the extending member 671U and the extending member 671D in an elastically compressed state, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. Even when using bias in the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

Further, as described above, the driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extending members 671U that are driven by the driving motor KM3U and connects the decorative unit 672U to the base member 660, and The driving means 680D includes two torsion springs SP1 that apply different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671U, and the driving means 680D is driven by a driving motor KM3D that generates driving force and a decorative unit 672D. and two torsion springs SP2 that apply different urging forces to the pair of extension members 671D, so that the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are opposed The sides can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of gaps between opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other party on the side where the urging force is large, and also The side with less power can form a state of accepting (retreating) the other party. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Note that the two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration. That is, the biasing forces applied to the pair of extension members 671U may be made different by different positions where the biasing forces are applied or by different amounts of elastic deformation. The same applies to the two torsion springs SP2.

Further, the drive means 680U includes a drive motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that are driven by the drive motor KM3U and connects the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and the pair of extension members 671U. The driving means 680D includes a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the decorative units 671U, and a drive motor KM3D that generates a driving force. 660, and a second biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of extension members 671D, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are connected to each other. can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and formation of gaps between opposing sides can be suppressed.

That is, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are brought into contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D, for example, pushes (advances) the other on the side where the biasing force is applied, and , it is possible to form a state in which the side to which the biasing force is not applied accepts (retreats) the opponent. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

As described above, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671U, and the other leg is connected to the base member 660, and exerts a biasing force in the direction of bringing the decorative unit 672U closer to the decorative unit 672D. Since the torsion spring SP1 is provided, when displacing the decoration unit 672U in the direction approaching the decoration unit 672D, the driving force of the drive motor KM3U required to rotate the extension member 671U is applied to the torsion spring SP1. It can be assisted by a biasing force. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position where it is separated from the decoration unit 672D to the contact position where it is in contact with the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be smoothly started.

In this case, as the extending member 671U is rotated in a direction that brings the decorative unit 672U closer to the decorative unit 672D, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extending member 671U or the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 changes. Since at least one of the connection positions with the base member 660 is spaced apart from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where force is applied becomes longer, and the decoration unit 672U is attached in the direction closer to the decoration unit 672D. power can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when stopping the decoration unit 672U brought close to the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be reliably stopped, and damage caused by a collision can be suppressed. Furthermore, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, thereby increasing the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement. It is possible to improve the production effect.

On the other hand, the torsion spring is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the extension member 671D, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and applies a biasing force in the direction of bringing the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U. As the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction of bringing the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connecting position of one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other position of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. Since at least one of the connection positions between the leg and the base member is spaced apart from the winding portion, the torsion spring SP2 exhibits the same effect as the torsion spring SP1. In particular, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed in both, which is particularly effective. Furthermore, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are arranged at the same height (arranged in the direction of gravity), and the position where they contact each other is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the direction of gravity, and the position where they are separated from each other. (Retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the direction of gravity, the configurations of torsion spring SP1 and torsion spring SP2 are particularly effective.

Since the decoration unit 672U is brought closer to the decoration unit 672D by being displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the lower the decoration unit 672U is located in the direction of gravity, the more the biasing force is applied in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity. can be made stronger (that is, the higher the decoration unit 672U is located in the direction of gravity, the weaker the urging force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity can be).

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the decorative unit 672U from a stopped state upward in the direction of gravity, the displacement (raising) can be smoothly started, and when stopping the raised decorative unit 672U, can reliably stop the displacement not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the urging force. As a result, damage to the decoration unit 672D due to collision can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the decorative unit 672U that has been displaced (descended) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened to counteract the action of gravity that attempts to continue the downward movement. I can do it. As a result, the decoration unit 672U can be reliably stopped.

A torsion spring SP2 is formed as a torsion spring, has one leg connected to the extension member 671D, and the other leg to the base member 660, and applies a biasing force in a direction to separate the decoration unit 672D from the decoration unit 672U. Since the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, when the decoration unit 672D is displaced in the direction away from the decoration unit 672U, that is, the decoration unit 672D is moved upward in the direction of gravity. When it is necessary to displace (raise) the extension member 671U, the driving force of the drive motor KM3D necessary to rotate the extension member 671U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671D is rotated in a direction that brings the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 changes. Since at least one of the connecting positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where force is applied becomes longer, and the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U (in the direction of gravity) is The biasing force in the upward direction can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement is reduced. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

Next, the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a chevron shape that slopes on both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. The formed protrusion 2812a is formed in a curved hemispherical shape. Note that the same parts as in the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

64(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 2812 taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64(a). Note that FIG. 64(a) corresponds to FIG. 36(a).

As shown in FIG. 64, a protrusion 2812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 2812a1 is curved into a bowl shape. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Furthermore, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, thereby flowing into the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Furthermore, since the protrusion 2812a1 of the second embodiment is curved into a bowl shape, its rigidity can be higher than that of the protrusion 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated and wobbles and the tips of the protrusions 2812a1 come into contact with the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820, damage to the protrusions 2812a can be suppressed.

Next, the outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812, but in the second embodiment, the protrusion 3824a is formed on the edge 824. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the third embodiment, FIG. 66(a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66(b) is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the third embodiment. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 taken along the line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, a protrusion 3824a that protrudes toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810 is formed on the edge 824 on the extension line of the spoke 3822 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusion 3824a is formed at the outer end (on the outer reel 821 side) of each spoke 3822.

The protrusion 3824a is formed so that both sides thereof are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Furthermore, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the opposing inner reel unit 810, thereby flowing into the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. However, the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment The protrusion 4812a formed on the hub 812a is formed to be inclined with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 67 is a sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 68(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 4812, and FIG. 68(b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 4812 taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a projection 4812a1 that projects toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is formed in such a manner that its longitudinal direction intersects with the radial direction of the hub 812a. That is, the protrusion 4812a1 is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end to the radially inner end of the hub 812a. Further, the direction of inclination thereof is inclined toward the normal rotation direction of the inner reel unit 810.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Further, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed so as to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end to the radially inner end of the hub 812a, and the direction of the inclination is the same as the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810. Since the inner reel unit 810 is positioned on the direction side, wind can be easily generated by the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, since at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810, Via the outer reel unit 820, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the fluctuations in the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, that is, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which rotates more often than the outer reel unit 820. In the production by rotating the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Next, the inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. In the first embodiment, the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are formed to be inclined toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward, but in the fifth embodiment In this case, the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are formed to be inclined toward the opposite side from the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment. 70(a) is a partially enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70(b) is a sectional view of the annular member 813 taken along the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70(a). Note that in the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment, the backlight unit 830 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in the inner reel unit 5810 in the fifth embodiment, the spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 are inclined toward the opposite side from the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they go radially outward. It is formed by Therefore, the inclination direction of the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the inclination direction of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetrical.

Further, a protrusion 5813a is formed to protrude from the surface of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810 that faces the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 70). A plurality of protrusions 5813a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813.

The protrusion 5813a is formed in a mountain shape that slopes on both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Furthermore, the pushed out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, thereby flowing into the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800, the distance between the opposing sides (between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820) As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 cannot be sufficiently cooled, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 break down. There was fear.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the protrusion 5813a can generate a flow of air flowing between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel. This makes it easier to take in air from both the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800. Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, so that failure of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be suppressed.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 812a1 is formed only on the inner reel unit 810, but in the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 6812a1, 6824a is formed on the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. . Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 71 is a sectional view of a decorative pattern display device 800 in the sixth embodiment. 72(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG. 72(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 6812 taken along the line LXXIIb-LXXIIb in FIG. 72(a). 73(a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73(b) is a sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 73(a).

As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, a protrusion 6812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Further, the protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a chevron shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

A protrusion 6824a that protrudes toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed on the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Further, the protrusion 6824a is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.

The protrusion 6812a1 is formed on the inner side of the rotating member 6812 in the radial direction than the protrusion 6824a. This can prevent the protrusion 6812a1 from colliding with the protrusion 6824a when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, wind can be generated by the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a. That is, wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820.

Further, in this case, the air pushed out by either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can collide with the other of the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the air flow can be further restricted. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the flow of air flowing between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel. Thereby, dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick can be blown away. As a result, it is possible to suppress dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a are provided on the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a at different positions in the radial direction, so that the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 Regardless of which of the two is rotated, wind pressure can be generated by displacing the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. Therefore, when the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

Slanted surfaces are formed on surfaces of the projection 6812a1 and the projection 6824a that face each other in the radial direction. Thereby, air resistance when air flows in the radial direction can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to easily blow away the dust (dust) stuck to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust trying to stick.

Further, the circumferential spacing of the protrusions 6812a1 and the circumferential spacing of the protrusions 6824a are different. Thereby, the position where the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction can be shifted. Therefore, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction, so that the positions where air is compressed can be distributed to a plurality of positions. As a result, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction and air is compressed, so that the rotational speeds of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be prevented from being slowed down.

Next, the rotating member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. In the first embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is driven symmetrically in the same manner, but in the seventh embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 is driven differently on the left and right sides. Ru. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 74(b) is a side view of the rotating member 7533.

As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 has two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, which are arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and a connecting portion 533a between opposing ends of the rotating member 7533. It is connected and formed by. Further, the plate-like bodies disposed at both the left and right ends are bent at substantially L-shape in a side view at different bending angles. In the seventh embodiment, the bending angle of the L-shape of the plate-like body formed on the left side when viewed from the front is set larger than the bending angle of the L-shape of the plate-like body formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

Therefore, the driving portion 7533d formed in a recessed manner on the other end side of the rotating member 7533 (left side in FIG. 74(b)) is formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right sides. Further, the driving part 7533d has a concave width (width in the vertical direction on the left side of FIG. 74(b)) larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 523 formed on the first electric accessory 520, and the inside of the driving part 7533d The protrusion 523 is formed to be slidable.

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 7533 in the left and right direction when viewed from the front (the dimension between opposing sides of the outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. Set. Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the rotating member 7533 is set so that the dimension between the opposing left and right plate members is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 7533 (between the two plate members facing each other).

The rotating member 7533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both left and right sides from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes to both left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and The driving portion 7533d is formed by being recessed at the tip of the other end of the L-shape.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 76, a driving mode of the first electric accessory 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 75(a) to 75(c) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520.

In addition, FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a) show the first state of the first electric accessory 520, and FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) show the second state of the first electric accessory 520. FIG. 75(b) and FIG. 76(b) each illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located between the first state and the second state. Further, in FIGS. 75 and 76, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the inside of the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is on the front side (see FIG. 75(a)). left side), and the driving portion 7533d is placed in a lower position. Thereby, the protrusion 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed down, and the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state.

In this case, a gap is created between the inside of the right drive portion 7533d and the upper side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (upper side in FIG. 75(a)). This is because the center of gravity of the right wing member 520R is switched to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521R) when viewed from the front while the protrusion 523R is pushed down to a certain position by the drive unit 7533d to bring the right wing member 520R into the first state. , is formed by rotating the right wing member 520R by its own weight to the first state.

Further, a gap is formed between the inside of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side in FIG. 75(a)).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is ) on the right side), and the drive section 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by pushing the protrusion 523 upward.

In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side in FIG. 75(a)). When the rotating member 533 is rotated (the driving part 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left driving part 7533d and the protrusion 523L is delayed by the gap. Therefore, the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the second state is started earlier.

Next, through the states shown in FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further drawn into the main body portion 531a, the rotating member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the driving portion 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward, and the first electric accessory 520 is placed in the second state shown in FIGS. 76(c) and 76(c).

In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the left driving portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (lower side in FIG. 75(c)). This is because the center of gravity of the left wing member 520L is switched to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521L) when viewed from the front while the projection 523L is pushed up to a certain position by the drive unit 7533d and the left wing member 520L is placed in the second state. , is formed by rotating the left wing member 520L by its own weight to the first state.

Further, a gap is formed between the inside of the right drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the projection 523R of the right wing member 520R (lower side in FIG. 75(a)).

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 520R can be started first, and the left wing member 520L can be displaced to the second state. It can be placed after the right wing member 520R.

The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(c) is the displacement from the first state to the second state described above. Since it is only the opposite, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L can be started first, and the right wing member 520R can be displaced to the first state. It can be placed earlier than the left wing member 520L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case will be described in which a game ball enters the winning hole unit 500 of the seventh embodiment. FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

In addition, FIG. 77(a) and FIG. 77(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 500 of FIG. 24(b). Moreover, in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L is started first, and , the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the first state is made slower than that of the left wing member 520L.

That is, it is possible to instantaneously create a state in which only the right wing member 520R of the first electric accessory 520 is opened. At this time, when a game ball enters from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is moved to the front side (lower side in FIG. 77(a)) by the bulging portion 524R. will be guided to. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause the game ball to collide with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

Since the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the front side, the game ball that collides with the bulging portion 524L is likely to bounce back toward the back side. Therefore, the game ball entering from the right wing member 520R can be easily entered into the second winning hole 140.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when displacing the first electric accessory 520 to the first state, the left wing member 520L on the side where the bulging portion 524L is formed on the front side and the right wing member 520R on the opposite side By making the displacement later than the left wing member 520L, the game ball that enters during the displacement to the first state can be smoothly thrown to the second winning hole 140.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) is placed in a position forming a closed state, and the timing when the other wing member (The other of the wing members 520L, 520R) is placed at a position that forms the closed state at a different timing, making it difficult to pinch the game ball between the pair of wing members 520L, 520R (side surfaces 526L, 526R). , the distance between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced.

Next, the rotating member 8533 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82. In the first embodiment, the sliding member 532 is provided with the second protrusion 532c that restricts the entry of the game ball, but in the eighth embodiment, the rotating member 8533 restricts the entry of the game ball. A second protrusion 8533e for regulation is formed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532. It mainly includes a first case member 534 in which a member 8533 and a sliding member 8532 are movably disposed, and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534. It is formed.

The sliding member 8532 is formed into a substantially E-shape when viewed from above, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction, and two first pieces protruding toward the front from both left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a. It is formed mainly of a protrusion 532b and a third protrusion 532e located between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding toward the front side.

The sliding member 8532 is formed such that the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension between opposing sides in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential surface of the first case member 534. Thereby, the sliding member 8532 can be housed inside the first case member 534.

The third protrusion 8532e is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, which will be described later, so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state can be restricted. That is, the third protrusion 8532e has a lower end surface formed above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

The rotating member 8533 is formed by two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and connected by a connecting part 533a between opposing sides on one end side. Ru. The gap between the two opposing plate-like bodies of the rotating member 8533 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 8533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 8533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is set smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. Ru. Thereby, the rotating member 8533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 8533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both left and right sides from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped in side view, a projection 533b that protrudes to both left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and It is formed mainly by a driving part 533d formed in a recessed manner at the tip of the other end of the L-shape, and a second protrusion 8533e protruding from the left-right center position of the connecting part 533a toward the front side. .

The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending toward the front side, and includes an upright wall 8533e1 bent downward and erected at its protruding tip. The standing wall 8533e1 is curved in a convex shape toward the front when viewed from the side, and its curved axis is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533.

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. 79(a) and 79(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 80(a) and 80(b) are front views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that in FIGS. 79 and 80, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state. 79(a), FIG. 80(a), and FIG. 81(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is different from that in FIG. 79(b), FIG. 80(b), and FIG. (b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. Further, FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pushed toward the front side (left side in FIG. 79(a)). , the drive section 533d is positioned below. Thereby, the protrusion 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed down and brought into the first state.

Further, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the tip of the upright wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned below. In this case, the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82(a)) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being thrown to the second case member 535.

Further, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is operated to shift to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third protrusion 8532e.

In other words, it is equipped with a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and the transmission mechanism is moved to the open slide position (FIG. 79 ( The sliding member 8532 is slid between the position shown in FIG. 79(a)) and the closed sliding position (the position shown in FIG. Rotation to open the pair of wing members 520L, 520R by being rotated to the closed rotation position by sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the closed slide position, so that at least the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be closed. The standing wall 8533e1 is disposed on the rotating member 8533, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the open rotation position, the standing wall 8533e1 is placed in the allowable position, and the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the closed position. When the standing wall 8533e1 is rotated to the position, the standing wall 8533e1 is placed in the regulating position, the sliding member 8532 is placed in the closed sliding position, and the rotating member 8533 is placed in the closed rotating position. By engaging the member 8532, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted, so it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from entering the second prize opening.

That is, from the closed state of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, for example, by forcibly opening the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from the outside, or by directly operating the rotating member 8533, the rotating member 8533 can be closed. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating member 8533 to the open position, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 restricts the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotating position, thereby restricting the standing wall 8533e1. position (that is, it is possible to prevent the standing wall 8533e1 from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). As a result, the erected wall 8533e1 can prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

Further, a third protrusion 8532e protruding from the sliding member 8532 (or rotating member 8533), and a connecting portion 533a formed on the sliding member 8532 (or rotating member 8533) so as to be able to engage with the third protrusion 8532e. Since the third protrusion 8532e is protruded along the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532, the engagement between the third protrusion 8532e and the connecting portion 533a and its It is possible to switch between engagement and release, and the structure can be simplified.

Note that the engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533) that the third protrusion 8532e can abut, or a hole or a recess into which the third protrusion 8532e can be inserted ( It may be a hole or a recess formed in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533. That is, any structure may be used as long as it can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position by the third protrusion 8532e coming into contact with the connecting portion 533a. In this case, it is preferable that the connecting portion 533a be a hole or a recess. Since the third protrusion 8532e is inserted into the connecting part 533a, the space required for disposing the third protrusion 8532e can be suppressed and the size can be reduced, and by being inserted into the connecting part 533a, This is because the third protrusion 8532e can be shielded from the outside, making it difficult for unauthorized access to the third protrusion 8532e from the outside.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pulled toward the back side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the drive portion 533d is moved upward. Displaced. Thereby, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into a second state in which the protrusion 533b is pushed upward.

Furthermore, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is located on the back side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the restriction on the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is released. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced by rotating the rotating member 8533.

Therefore, the driving portion 533d of the rotating member 8533 has an open side contact portion 8533d1 that contacts and opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when rotated toward the open rotation position, and an open side contact portion 8533d1 that rotates toward the closed rotation position. Since it is provided with a closing side contact portion 8533d2 that contacts and closes the pair of wing members 520L, 520R when the wing members 520L, 520R are opened, it is possible to suppress the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from being illegally forced open from the outside, and prevent rotation. Unauthorized access to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are externally displaced in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotating member 8533 is pressed by the wing members 520L and 520R, and the rotating member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. Try to turn it towards it. In this case, according to the present invention, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can restrict the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position. It can be regulated by the contact portion 8533d2. That is, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members 520L and 520R from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, making it difficult to illegally access the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside.

When the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the rotating member 8533 is rotated to extend from the tip of the upright wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534. The distance dimension L7 (see FIG. 82(b)) is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 can be thrown to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a description will be given of a case where the first electric accessory 520 is damaged. FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. Note that FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17. Further, FIG. 14(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 14(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first electric accessory 520 are broken from the base end due to fraud or deterioration over time, and the first electric accessory 520 is When the state changes from the state to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, so that the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward. Ru. Therefore, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being thrown to the second case member 535.

Therefore, the arrangement of the upright wall 8533e1 can be maintained at the restricted position in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are closed or in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are opened from the outside. It is possible to suppress the wall 8533e1 from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the second winning hole 140.

That is, in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are closed or in a state where the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated to The distance dimension L6 from the lower end (the lower end in FIG. 20(b)) to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. . Therefore, even if the first electric accessory 520 is allowed to throw a game ball into the second winning hole 140 due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball will enter the second winning hole 140 and roll. can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the upright wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is put into the second state (a game ball can be thrown to the second winning hole 140) due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball is illegally sent to the second winning hole 140. It is possible to easily control the ball being thrown into the ball.

In addition, in this case, since the standing wall 8533e1 that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the second prize opening 140 can be formed in series with the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, the second There is no need for a separate member to prevent balls from being illegally entered into the prize opening 140. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and an increase in manufacturing costs can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, a second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of a game ball and a third protrusion 8532e that suppresses displacement of the second protrusion are integrally attached to the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. Therefore, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

Next, a drive unit 9530 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the movement of the first electric accessory 520 is restricted when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, but in the ninth embodiment, the solenoid When the movable body 531b of 531 is extended from the main body portion 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is movable. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and a rotation member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532. It mainly includes a first case member 534 in which the member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 are movably disposed, and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534. It is formed.

The rotating member 9533 is formed by two plate-shaped bodies formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, arranged side by side with a predetermined width apart in the left-right direction, and connected by a connecting part 533a between opposing sides on one end side. Ru. The gap between the two opposing plate bodies of the rotating member 9533 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 9533 (between the two plate-shaped bodies facing each other).

Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 9533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the opposing dimension on the inside of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. Ru. Thereby, the rotating member 9533 can be placed between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 9533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes to both left and right sides from a bent portion that is approximately L-shaped in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes to both left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and It is formed mainly of a protruding portion 9533d that protrudes toward the front side at the other end of the L-shape, and a second protrusion 8533e that protrudes toward the front side from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 533a.

The protruding portion 9533d is formed to protrude from the front end, and has a length on its upper (upper part in FIG. 84(a)) side surface to which the protrusions 523L, 523R of the wing members 520L, 520R can abut. is set to

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. 84(a) and 84(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 85(a) and 85(b) are front views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that in FIGS. 84 and 85, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state. In addition, in FIGS. 84(a), 85(a), and 86(a), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state is different from that in FIG. 84(b), FIG. 85(b), and FIG. (b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. Furthermore, FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17.

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pushed toward the front side (left side in FIG. 84(a)). , the protruding portion 9533f is positioned downward. Thereby, the protrusion 523 of the first electric accessory 520 is pushed down and brought into the first state.

In the ninth embodiment, a biasing spring (not shown) is disposed on the rotating shaft of the first electric accessory 520, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the first electric accessory 520 to move to the first state side. A biasing force for rotational displacement is constantly applied. Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state by a force other than the drive of the solenoid 531 (for example, shaking of a pachinko machine), it can be suppressed from remaining in the second state.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pulled toward the back side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the protrusion 9533f is moved upward. is displaced. Thereby, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into a second state in which the protrusion 533b is pushed upward.

In this case, the protruding portion 9533f and the protrusions 523L, 523R of the first electric accessory 520 are always in contact with each other, so that the first electric accessory 520 can be maintained in the second state.

In addition, by projecting the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from the main body 531a from the second state and displacing the protruding portion 9533f downward, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring and 1 state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of a case where the first electric accessory 520 is fraudulently operated. FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. Note that FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17. Further, FIG. 87(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 87(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state. .

As shown in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is operated by a fraudulent act by the player. When changing from the first state to the second state, only the first electric accessory 520 is rotationally displaced.

Therefore, since the tip of the erected wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward, the erected wall 8533e1 causes the game ball to roll on the upper end surface of the erected portion 534b, and the second case member This can prevent the ball from being thrown to 535.

In this case (the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a), the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, as described above. . Therefore, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from operating the standing wall 8533e1. As a result, it is possible to suppress disadvantages to the store due to fraudulent activity by the player.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of game balls and the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses displacement of the second protrusion are integrally attached to the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532. Therefore, the number of parts of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first electric accessory 520 from being destroyed due to fraudulent activity by the player. As a result, losses to the store due to fraudulent activity by players can be suppressed.

That is, the ninth embodiment includes a biasing spring that biases the pair of wing members 520L, 520R in the closing direction, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the open rotation position, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R 520R, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the wing members 520L, 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R do not come into contact with the rotating member 9533, and external force due to such forced opening is prevented from being applied to the rotating member 9533. can. As a result, damage to the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, the rotating member 9533, or the sliding member 8532 can be suppressed.

In addition, as a biasing means that constantly applies a biasing force that rotationally displaces the first electric accessory 520 toward the first state, a spring (torsion) that biases the pair of wing members 520L, 520R in the closing direction by an elastic recovery force Examples include not only springs and coil springs, but also magnets that bias the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction with attractive force.

Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is small (or large) displaced in a non-linear manner as the displacement member 670 is displaced, but in the tenth embodiment, the rotating member 10678 is displaced. By doing so, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88(b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of displacement member 10670.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment includes an extending member 671, an extending member 10671 disposed opposite to the extending member 671, and the extending member 10671. The decorative unit 672 is connected to the extending member 671, and the rotating member 10678 is rotatably disposed on the extending member.

The extension member 10671 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and has a shaft support hole 671a that penetrates in the left-right direction when viewed from the front at the end of the longitudinal side, and a shaft support hole 671a that extends outward from the left and right at the approximately central position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side. The rotating shaft 10671e is formed in a cylindrical shape and projects from the connecting projection 671b toward the shaft support hole 671a.

The rotating member 10678 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is disposed on the extending member 10671 so that its longitudinal direction intersects the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side of the extending member 10671 at a substantially right angle when viewed from the side.

The rotating member 10678 has a shaft support hole 10678a penetrating in the left-right direction, a through hole 10678b formed to penetrate in the circumferential direction of the shaft support hole 10671a of the extending member 10671 on one end side in the longitudinal direction, and a through hole 10678b on the other end side in the longitudinal direction. It is formed mainly with an inclined surface 10678c formed by cutting out a side surface of the slanted surface 10678c.

The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotating shaft 10671e of the extending member 10671 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 10671e. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 10671e into the shaft support hole 10677a and screwing it to the rotating shaft 10671e, the rotating member 10678 can be rotatably disposed on the extension member 10671.

The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

Next, the operation of the rotating member 10678 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. FIG. 90 is a sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91(a) and 91(b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG. 90.

Note that FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 58(b). Moreover, FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b) illustrate the state when the displacement members 670, 10670 are displaced, and FIG. 91(b) shows the state where the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are in contact with each other. A cross section of is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 90, the vertical displacement unit 600L in the tenth embodiment includes a displacement member 670 on the upper side, a displacement member 10670 on the lower side, and the shafts of the displacement members 670, 10670. The axes of the supporting holes 671a are arranged coaxially. That is, in the first embodiment, of the pair of displacement members 670 arranged vertically in opposite directions, the lower displacement member 670 is changed to the displacement member 10670. Note that the driving means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 in the first embodiment, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decoration units 672 of the displacement members 670, 10670 arranged above and below are displaced in a direction toward each other, the extending members 671, 10671 are brought closer to each other.

In a state where the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are in contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91(b), the inclined surface 10678c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extending member 671. As a result, the rotating member 10678 is rotated about the shaft support hole 10678a so that the inclined surface 10678c is approximately parallel to the side surface of the extension member 671 (in FIG. 91(b), the rotary member 10678 is (rotated counterclockwise about hole 10678a).

Therefore, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 10678c and the shaft support hole 10678a is also rotated in the same way. By displacing the position of the through hole 10678b, the position where the through hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side of the torsion spring SP2 to the base end side. Therefore, the biasing force acting on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decorative unit 672 are brought into contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670, 10670 are displaced with the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the contact between the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from coming away from each other.

Further, since the extending member 10671 on which the rotating member 10678 is disposed is on the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the driving means 680 that drives the displacement member 10670, the extending member 10671 is driven by the driving motor KM3. When the force is transmitted to the drive side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683), the driving force is reduced, and the displacement of the rotating member 10678 increases the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, thereby increasing the driving force. It can compensate for the lack of power. As a result, it is possible to prevent the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from coming into contact with each other.

Next, a vertical displacement unit 11600L of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. In the first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 670 from both the left and right sides, but in the eleventh embodiment, the driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 11670 from only one side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in FIGS. 92 to 94, similarly to FIGS. 61 to 63, U is added to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 disposed above the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670. At the same time, the displacement member 670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670 will be described with a letter D added to the end of the symbol.

The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. 92 to 94 are schematic diagrams of a vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment. Note that in FIGS. 92 to 94, transition states of the displacement member 11670 are sequentially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is disposed only on one side. That is, in the first embodiment, a pair of extension members 671 are arranged symmetrically on the displacement member 670, but in the eleventh embodiment, the extension members 671 are arranged only on one side. Ru.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the driving means 680 is formed only on the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683), and the extending member 671 is connected to the driving means on the driving side. Therefore, the extension members 671 of the displacement members 11670 arranged in the upper and lower pairs in the vertical displacement unit 11600L are arranged horizontally oppositely in the upper and lower directions.

As shown in FIG. 93, when the displacement members 11670 disposed vertically are displaced, the side surfaces of the decorative units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing both from the state shown in FIG. 93 in the same direction, the decorative units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction with their side surfaces in contact with each other.

In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, the driving of the decoration unit 672 on the opposite side to the driving side becomes slow, and there is a risk that a gap may be formed between the two decoration units 672. In some cases, the extending members 671 are disposed vertically and horizontally oppositely, so that the end of one decorative unit 672 on the opposite side to the driving side is pushed by the end on the driving side of the other decorative unit 672. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672.

In this case, it is preferable to delay the timing of driving the displacement member 11670 on the side in the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672. By delaying the timing of driving the displacement member 11670 on the side in the displacement direction of the decoration unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

To explain in detail, the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 is advanced, so that the drive side end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven first becomes the decoration unit that is driven later. The end of 672 opposite the drive side can be pushed out. On the other hand, the end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven first on the opposite side to the drive side is brought into contact with the end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven later on the drive side with a stronger force. As a result, when the two displacement members 11670 are displaced with the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the extending member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is provided on one side, so that the displacement member 11670 (extending member 671) can be easily deformed. Therefore, by advancing the driving timing of the displacement members 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672, the displacement members 11670 (extension members 671) are deformed, and the elastic force when the displacement returns is By using this, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the winning opening unit 500 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the thickness of the front base 511 and the back base 512 of the winning opening unit 500 are formed to be substantially constant has been described, but in the eleventh embodiment, the thickness of the front base 511 and the back base 512 is Partially modified. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 95(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). Note that in FIG. 95(a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent, and in FIG. 95(b), the front base 511 is shown as being opaque. Further, in FIG. 95(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed with partially different thicknesses in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) on the left and right sides with the second winning opening 140 in between. That is, the front side bulge part 12511f that bulges out to the back side is provided at the upper right side of the second winning a prize opening 140.

Further, the back base 512 is formed so that the thickness in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 95(b)) is partially different on the left and right sides with the second winning opening 140 in between. That is, a back side bulging part 12512d that bulges out to the back side is provided at the upper left side of the second winning opening 140.

The front bulge 12511f and the back bulge 12512d are formed outside the displacement area of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. This prevents the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from colliding with the front bulge 12511f and the back bulge 12512d.

In addition, the front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d have their ends in the left-right direction (FIG. 95(b) left and right direction) located on the outside. Thereby, the game ball that flows down from the upstream side of the first electric accessory 520 and may be thrown to the side surfaces 526L and 526R can surely collide with the front side bulge part 12511f and the back side bulge part 12512d. I can do it.

The front bulge 12511f is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524R in the front-rear direction. In other words, the front side bulge 12511f is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524R in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the rear side bulge 12512d is formed on the side surface of the left wing member 520L opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524L in the front-rear direction. In other words, the back side bulge 12512d is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the bulge 524L in the front-rear direction.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the front side bulging part 12511f and be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be brought to the back side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R can easily collide with the bulging portion 524R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down on the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the back side bulging part 12512d and be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be brought to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can easily collide with the bulging portion 524L.

Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolling) along the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, if the game ball that entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R), , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the protrusion on the other wing member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) can be prevented from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the ball throwing speed can be slowed down by causing the game balls thrown by the wing members 520L and 520R to collide with the front side bulge portion 12511f and the back side bulge portion 12512d. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the wing members 520L, 520R can be slowed down. As a result, the impact upon collision with the bulges 524L, 524R can be reduced, and damage to the wing members 520L, 520R can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The winning opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a protrusion that protrudes between the opposing front base 511 and rear base 512 of the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 96(a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 96(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XCVIb-XCVIb of FIG. 96(a). Note that in FIG. 96(a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent, and in FIG. 96(b), the front base 511 is shown as being opaque. Further, in FIG. 96(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 is formed with a protrusion 13511g on the left side of the second winning opening 140 that protrudes toward the back base 512 side. Further, on the back base 512, a protrusion 13512e that protrudes toward the front base 511 is formed on the right side of the second winning opening 140.

The protrusion 13511g and the protrusion 13512e are formed outside the displacement area of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. This prevents the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from colliding with the projections 13511g and 13512e.

The protrusion 13511g is formed on the side surface of the right wing member 520R on the same side as the formation position of the bulging portion 524R in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512e is formed on the side surface of the left wing member 520L that faces the formation position of the bulging portion 524L in the front-rear direction.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13511g and be guided to the front side. Therefore, when a game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be brought to the front side. As a result, when a game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526R, it is difficult to collide with the bulging portion 524R. As a result, damage to the wing member 520R can be suppressed.

Moreover, the game ball thrown from the right side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526R of the wing member 520R is thrown to the side surface 526R without colliding with the protrusion 13511g formed above the wing member 520R. . In this case, the game ball can be guided to the back side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13512e and be guided to the back side. Therefore, when a game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be brought to the back side. As a result, when a game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is thrown to the side surface 526L, it is difficult to collide with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, damage to the wing member 520L can be suppressed.

Moreover, the game ball thrown from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526L of the wing member 520L is thrown to the side surface 526L without colliding with the protrusion 13512e formed above the wing member 520L. . In this case, the game ball can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L when rolling the side surface 526L.

Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolling) along the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L, 526R) into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, if the game ball that entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L, 520R), , such a game ball can be brought into contact with the protrusion on the other wing member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (either one of the wing members 520L, 520R) can be prevented from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the number of game balls colliding with the bulges 524L, 524R of the wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced by the projections 13511g and 13512e, the durability of the wing members 520L, 520R can be improved.

Next, wing members 14520L and 14520R (first variable device 14520) of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The wing members 14520L and 14520R of the fourteenth embodiment are formed so that the width dimensions of the bulging portions 524L and 524R in the front-rear direction are different from those of the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 97(a) is a perspective front view of a left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member 520R. FIG. 98(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 98(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member 520L taken along the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 98(a). ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member 520R taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 98(b).

Note that, in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the perspective directions in the left-right direction are shown reversed. Further, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24(b). In FIG. 98(a), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 14520L has a through hole 521L that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower end in the gravity direction, a recess 522L that is recessed around the through hole 521L from the front side to the back side, and a recess 522L that extends from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back side. A protrusion 523L that protrudes from the side, a recessed portion 525L that is recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface of the through hole 521L, and side surfaces of the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state. 14526L and a bulging portion 14524L protruding from the side surface 14526L.

The side surface 14526L includes an inclined surface 14526L1 that is formed to slope upward from a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 14526L2 that is formed from the substantially central position in the longitudinal direction toward the front side.

The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed to be inclined downward from the back side (left side in FIG. 98(b)) toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side. Thereby, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256L, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526L1 can be guided to the smooth surface 1452L2 side by the downward slope.

Further, the bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)) of the inclined surface 14526L1. The width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-back direction is smaller than half the width of the wing member 14520L in the front-back direction. That is, the width of the bulging portion 15254L in the front-back direction is smaller than the width of the bulging portion 14524L in the front-back direction.

As mentioned above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 is rolled toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side, so the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526L The probability that the ball will collide with the bulge 14524L can be reduced.

On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-back direction. The right wing member 14520R has a through hole 521R that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L that is recessed around the through hole 521R from the front side to the back side, and a recess 522L that extends from the vicinity of the through hole 521R to the back side. a protrusion 523R that protrudes from the through hole 521R, a recessed portion 525R that is recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R on the end surface of the through hole 521R, and a side surface 14526R of the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state. and a bulging portion 14524R protruding from the side surface 14526R thereof.

The side surface 14526R includes an inclined surface 14526R1 that is formed to slope upward from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 14526R2 that is formed from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the front side.

The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed to be inclined downward from the back side (right side in FIG. 98(c)) toward the smooth surface 14526R2 side. Thereby, among the game balls thrown to the side surface 14256R, the game balls thrown to the inclined surface 14526R1 can be guided to the smooth surface 1452R2 side by the downward slope.

Further, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526R1 (on the back side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). The bulging portion 14524L is formed so that its width in the front-rear direction is larger than half the width of the wing member 14520L in the front-rear direction. That is, the width of the inclined surface 14526R1 in the front-back direction is made larger than the width of the bulge 14524L in the front-back direction. Therefore, the width of the bulge 14524R of the right wing member 14520R in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the bulge 14524L of the left wing member 14520L in the front-rear direction.

As mentioned above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 is rolled toward the smooth surface 14526R2, so the game ball rolling on the side surface 14526R The probability that the ball will collide with the bulge 14524R can be reduced.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment is formed in such a manner that the game ball flows down from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 and is easily thrown to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the wing members 520L, 520R in an open state. Ru. To explain in detail, in the pachinko machine 10, the first through gate 66 that opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is arranged on the left side of the center frame 86, and the pachinko machine 10 has a first through gate 66 that opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. It is configured to be launched toward the left side. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game board 13 flows down the left side of the game board 13 as a whole, and is thrown from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (a pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R) to the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R. It becomes easier.

Therefore, compared to the right wing member 14520R, more game balls are thrown to the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, and the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L wears out more quickly, causing the left wing member 14520L to break easily. There was a point.

On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, sloped surfaces 14526L1, 14526R1 are formed on the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R, and bulging portions 14524L, 14524R are formed on the sloped surfaces 14526L1, 14526R1, so that the side where many game balls are thrown is formed. Since the bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are formed small in the front-rear direction, the probability that a game ball collides with the bulging portion 14524L of the wing member 14520L on the side where the ball is thrown the most is reduced, thereby reducing wear of the bulging portion 14524L. This can prevent it from happening too quickly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing members 14520L, 14520R on the side where more game balls are thrown from becoming easily broken.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, a variable prize winning device 15065 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the bulges 524L, 524R are formed on the pair of wing members 520L, 520R has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the bulges 15065b, 15065c are formed on the variable winning device 65. be done. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

99(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 99. FIG. 100(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13, and FIG. 100(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100(a).

Note that FIGS. 99(a) and 100(a) correspond to the partially enlarged view of FIG. 29. Further, FIG. 99 shows a closed state of the variable winning device 15065, and FIG. 100 shows an open state of the variable winning device 15065. In addition, in FIG. 100(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in FIG. 24(b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by an arrow F, and the back direction is shown by an arrow B.

In addition, the closed state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 formed in a board state is located approximately parallel to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game balls flowing down the gaming area win a specific prize. This is a state in which it is impossible for the ball to enter the opening (large open opening) 65a. On the other hand, the open state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is located approximately perpendicular to the plane on the front side of the game board 13, and the game balls flowing down the gaming area are ) 65a.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed into a plate-shaped body that is elongated from side to side, and is rotatably arranged with respect to the game board 13 around one end on the back side. Further, the variable winning device 15065 is connected to a drive device (not shown) on the back side, and by applying driving force to the drive device, the variable winning device 15065 is displaced between a closed state position and an open state position. It is considered possible.

Furthermore, in the open state, the variable winning device 15065 has two protruding portions 15065b and 15065c formed on the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side. Furthermore, the side surface 15065a of the variable prize winning device 15065 is formed to be inclined downward from both left and right sides toward the center. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side surface 15065a can be rolled toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a side, and can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the end surface on the front side in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 100(b)). The bulging portion 15065c is located on the right side of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the end surface on the back side in the alveolar state (the state shown in FIG. 100(b)).

That is, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are formed on both left and right sides with the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a in between, and are formed at different positions in the front-back direction. As a result, when a game ball is thrown to both the left and right sides of the variable winning device 15065 in the open state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from colliding in front of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a and bouncing back to the left and right sides. .

To explain in detail, the game ball thrown to the left side of the side surface 15065a in front view collides with the bulging part 15065b and is guided to the back side when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a side. Ru. On the other hand, the game ball thrown to the right side of the side surface 15065a when viewed from the front collides with the bulging portion 15065c and is guided to the front side when rolling toward the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a side.

Therefore, the forward and backward position of the game ball thrown from both the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a can be displaced by the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. Therefore, when a game ball is thrown to the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a and the left and right game balls collide in front of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the direction of the rebound (repulsion) can be set in the front-back direction. can. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

Furthermore, when the game ball is thrown from either the left or right side of the side surface 15065a, the game ball collides with one of the bulging portions 15065b or 15065c to displace the position in the front and back direction, so that the game ball is thrown from the side surface 15065a. When rolling in the left-right direction on the front side of the game ball, the game ball can be caused to collide with the other of the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. As a result, the game ball thrown from one side of the side surface 15065a can be suppressed from rolling in front of the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a and slipping out to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

The side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and has a pair of bulges. 15065b and 15065c are arranged at positions across the ball entrance in front view, and are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolling) along the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulges 15065b and 15065c, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a.

In addition, one bulging portion 15065b, 15065c and the other bulging portion 15065b, 15065c are positioned in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). By arranging them differently, when a game ball enters the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball is placed between the pair of bulges 15065b and 15065c. or one side. Therefore, a game ball that enters the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 from one side in the width direction (or the other side) passes through the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 and flows out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065. can be restrained from doing so. As a result, the player's interest can be improved by allowing the game ball to enter the specific winning hole (large opening hole) 65a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the engagement between the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 was made possible by the contact between the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third protrusion 8532e, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 is This is done by inserting the third protrusion 16532e into the recess of the portion 533a. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101(a) is a front view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 101(b) is the first electric accessory along the CIb-CIb line in FIG. 101(a). 101(c) is a sectional view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 taken along the line CIc-CIc in FIG. 101(b).

As shown in FIG. 101, a concave portion 16533a1 recessed from the back side toward the front side is formed in the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the sixteenth embodiment at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed into a horizontally long rectangle in rear view.

Further, the third protrusion 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed to protrude at a position facing the above-mentioned recessed portion 16533a1 in the front-back direction. The shape of the third protrusion 16532e when viewed from the front is a horizontally long rectangle that is slightly smaller than the recessed portion 16533a1, and has a tapered tip.

Thereby, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are in the closed state, the third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside the recessed portion 16533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged with each other.

In addition, in this case, since the engaging portion is the recessed portion 16533a1, the space required for disposing the third projection 16532e is suppressed by the amount that the third projection 16532e is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, and the size is reduced. In addition, by being inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, the third protrusion 16532e can be shielded from the outside, making unauthorized access to the third protrusion 16532e from the outside difficult.

Next, a sliding member 15732 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the standing wall 532c1 is located upstream of the sensor device SE1 disposed on the downstream path of the game ball that has entered the second prize opening 140 has been described; In the seventeenth embodiment, a case will be described in which the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged downstream of the sensor device SE1. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIGS. 102(a) and 102(b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the seventeenth embodiment. FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

Note that in FIG. 102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown as being transparent. In addition, in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, and in FIGS. 102(b) and 102(b), the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state. The respective states are illustrated. Further, FIGS. 102(a) and 102(b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b), respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment has an upright wall 17532c1 protruding from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (lower side in FIG. 102(a)). The standing wall 17532c1 has a tip thereof set at a position exceeding the lower end surface of the second case member 535, and the tip thereof is bent toward the front side.

The length of the standing wall 17532c1 on the front side is such that when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the upper and lower sides are below the sensor device SE1 disposed on the second case member 535. The length is set to the position.

Further, an opening 17535b is formed in the second case member 535 and is formed through the opening 17535b in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103(a)). The second protrusion 17532c is inserted into the opening 17535b.

Further, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-back direction is set larger than the sliding width of the sliding member 17532 that slides in the front-back direction (the driving width of the solenoid 531). Thereby, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction with the second protrusion 17532c inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the upright wall 17532c1 is located downstream of the sensor device SE1, and the game Ball insertion can be regulated. On the other hand, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the erected wall 17532c1 is arranged on the back side of the opening of the sensor device SE1 (the hole that detects the passage of the game ball). Thereby, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, a game ball can be inserted therethrough.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a case will be described in which the first electric accessory is forced into the second state due to fraud by the player. FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. Note that FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), respectively. Further, FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state, and FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened due to a fraudulent act by the player. When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the longitudinal position of the sliding member 17532 is the same as in the closed state, similarly to the first embodiment.

Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is forced into the open state, the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game balls entered from the second prize opening 140 are stagnated on the upper surface of the erected wall 17532c1.

In this case, the distance from the sensor device SE1 to the top surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension that substantially matches the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball fixed on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is brought into a state where it is constantly detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, when the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball for a predetermined period of time, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric accessory 520 has been illegally released. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating and to notify the store operator of the player's cheating.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment includes the sensor device SE1 that detects the game ball entered into the second winning opening 140, and the erected wall 17532c1 has a regulating position downstream of the sensor device SE1. At the same time, since the game ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the sensor device SE1, for example, if the wing members 520L, 520R are forcibly opened and a game ball is illegally entered from the ball entrance, the sensor device It is possible to continue the state in which SE1 detects the game ball. Therefore, by determining whether the detection by the sensor device SE1 has continued beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have been illegally entered.

Next, referring to FIG. 105, a rotating member 18812 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812 is formed at a constant distance in the radial direction from the axis of the hub 812a, but in the eighteenth embodiment, the protrusion 18812a1 is 812a at different radial spacings from the axis. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 105(b) is a sectional view of the rotating member 18812 taken along the line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105(a).

As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the 18th embodiment has a protrusion 18812a1 that protrudes semispherically toward the edge 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 disposed opposite to it. Have multiple pieces.

The protrusions 18812a1 are formed with different radial distances from the axis of the adjacent protrusions 18812a and the hub 812a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the airflow generated by the first protrusion 18812a1 (the tip located on the rotation side) is directed to the second protrusion 18812a1 (the tip located on the rotational rear side of the first protrusion 18812a1). You can easily cause a collision. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, airflow can be easily generated. As a result, air can be sent between the opposing inner reel 811 and outer reel 821 to clean the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the relationship among the accommodation unit 880, inner reel unit 810, and outer reel unit 820 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the side wall portion 881 of the storage unit 880 is formed in a plate shape, but the side wall portion 881 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed with a plurality of openings. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 106(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of a decorative pattern display device 800 in the nineteenth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b) each illustrate a state in which the outer reel unit 820 is transitioned (rotationally displaced). Further, in FIG. 106(b), an opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), a side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30(a)) disposed on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 800 when viewed from the front is provided with a plurality of openings 19881d extending in the left-right direction. be done.

The openings 19881d are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The forming angles of the adjacent openings 19881d are set to be substantially the same as the forming angles of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 and the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820. Further, the circumferential opening dimension of the opening 19881d is set smaller than the circumferential width dimension of the spoke 812c and the spoke 822. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106(a), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c) can be placed next to the opening 19881d. can. That is, the opening 19881d can be covered by the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812c) in a side view.

Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820) is rotated, it is possible to suppress air from flowing in through the opening 19812c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or spokes 812c) are arranged at a circumferential position different from the opening 19881d. be able to.

This allows air to flow in from the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820) is rotated. That is, by making the air inflow path the shortest and reducing air resistance, air can easily flow into the inside of the decorative pattern display device 800 (accommodation unit 880).

Therefore, when rotating the inner reel unit 810 to perform an effect that allows the player to see other symbols decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811, the inflow of air from the opening 19881d is restricted and the inner reel 811 is rotated. The display can be easily recognized by the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 are cleaned by allowing intake air to flow in from the opening 19881d. It's easy to do.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments in any way, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. can be easily inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the portions other than the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the pair of left and right wing members 520L and 520R are formed symmetrically, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projections 523L, 523R of the wing members 520L, 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side, and the wing members 520L, 520R may have the same shape. In this case, since the wing members 520L and 520R can be formed from the same parts, the manufacturing cost of the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced by using common parts.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclined portion 625a of the reflective member 625 is formed as a smooth surface, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curved in a convex manner toward the light transmitting portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed, and can be made uniformly incident on the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the light transmitting portion 621a and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In the first and eleventh embodiments described above, the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side in the case where the number of disposed components is different, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member) may have different rigidities (dimensions, materials, etc. of the constituent members), or the driving force (size, size, etc.) transmitted between one side and the other side may differ. (Transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) are different; One side and the other side have different connections between component parts (e.g. number of connecting parts, amount of play in the connecting parts, etc.); One side and the other side are different. They may have different ease of displacement toward the other party (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (sliding or rotation), etc.), or may be a combination of these.

As a result, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D shift their higher rigidity side (lower side) to the other party's lower rigidity side (higher side). can face. Therefore, when the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (advances) the other on the side with higher rigidity, and pushes the other on the side with lower rigidity. Then, you can create a state of accepting (retreating) the other person. As a result, the opposite sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

In the ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the closed state by the biasing spring, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging a magnetic body inside the first electric accessory 520 and placing a magnet on the front base 511 or the back base 512, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the closed state by the magnetic force of the magnet. It may also be something that allows you to do so.

In the first and eleventh embodiments described above, the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side in the case where the number of disposed components is different, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) are different from each other is that , materials, etc.), connection states of the constituent members (for example, number of connected parts, amount of wobbling of the connected parts, etc.) are different, or combinations of these may be used. Due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing are different, and the supporting manner of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D is biased to one side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the upright wall 532c1 is formed so as to be able to slide inside the first case member 534, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the inside of the main body portion 531a, the upright wall 532c1 may be projected from the inside of the second winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning hole 140, so even if the feather members 520L, 520R are opened by unauthorized means, the inside of the second winning hole 140 (upright It is possible to suppress the game balls from being stagnated in front of the wall 532c1. As a result, fraud by players can be prevented.

In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the game ball is guided in the front-back direction by changing the side shape between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. .

For example, magnets may be disposed inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the game ball may be guided in the front and back direction by the attraction force of the magnets. This eliminates the need to narrow the distance between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512, so it is possible to suppress the game ball from being pinched between the facing front base 511 and the back base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the attraction force of the magnet is such that the game ball cannot be held on the attraction surface of the magnet. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being attracted to the side surfaces of the front base 511 and the back base 512.

In the second and eighteenth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which a plurality of protrusions 2812a1, 18812a1 are formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed on the side surface of the hub 812a facing the edge 824. In this case, as in the second and eighteenth embodiments, airflow can be generated by the uneven shape of the grooves. As a result, air can be sent between the opposing inner reel 811 and outer reel 821 to clean the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

In the fifteenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the variable prize winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the game board 13, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variable winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be slidable in the front and back direction with respect to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is immersed in the game board 13, and a game ball is inserted into the specific winning hole 65a. It may be configured such that the ball is not allowed to enter, and in the open state, the variable winning device 15065 is extended to the front side of the game board 13 to allow the game ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
In a game machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and is movable, the guide member is , a pair of protrusions are provided that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the guide surface, and the pair of protrusions allow the game balls to move along the guide surface. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the gaming machines A1 are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which they are guided.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball into the ball entrance and is movable. ing. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members that have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, are disposed across the ball entrance, and have their proximal ends rotatably supported. In this case, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-164598 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one wing member, and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other wing member. be disclosed. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the game ball simultaneously guides (rolls) the guide surface of one wing member and the guide surface of the other wing member. Even when the game balls are moved (movement), the game balls can be biased in different directions (one toward the glass plate and the other toward the game board). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance. However, the above-described conventional technology has a problem in that the game ball cannot be biased sufficiently. In addition, a game ball that enters from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass from the other side of the guide member, and in this case, the game ball does not enter the ball entrance, so the player There was a problem that interest was lost.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A1, the guide member includes a pair of protrusions that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the guide surface. Since the projecting parts are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the game ball guided (rolled) along the guide surface can come into contact with the projecting part. By doing so, it is possible to reliably bias the game ball. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, the pair of protrusions are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, so that the game ball that enters from one side of the guide member is provided with a protrusion. It can be brought into contact with the part. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls entering from one side of the guide member from passing through the guide member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the game machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members arranged to sandwich the ball entry hole and whose base end side is rotatably supported, and the pair of wing members are arranged so that the tip side thereof is close to or separated from each other. By being rotated in the direction of rotation, a closed state through which the game ball cannot pass or an open state through which the game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of protrusions protrude from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members. a direction in which the protrusion on one of the pair of wing members and the protrusion on the other wing member are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface; A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the gaming machine A2 is arranged at different positions.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entrance and whose base end side is rotatably supported, and has a pair of protrusions. The protruding portion projects from each guide surface of the pair of wing members, and the protruding portion on one wing member of the pair of wing members and the protruding portion on the other wing member extend along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which they are guided, by bringing the game balls guided (rolling) along the guide surface into contact with the protrusion, it is possible to securely hold the game balls. can be biased toward As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball into the ball entrance, and it is possible to prevent the ball from clogging.

In addition, the protruding portion on one wing member and the protruding portion on the other wing member are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (the direction from the tip side to the base end side of the wing member). By arranging the game ball at different positions in the direction of It can be brought into contact with the protrusion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member from passing through the guide surface of the other wing member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the proximal end side of the wing member than to the distal end side.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A2, the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip side of the wing member, so that the wing member is guided by the guide surface. A rolling area can be secured before the game ball comes into contact with the protrusion. Therefore, the reduction in the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed to that extent, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, since the protruding part protrudes from the protruding surface at a position closer to the proximal end than the distal end of the wing member, the path of the game ball that comes into contact with the protruding part and is biased is directed to the ball entrance. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from returning to the course before deflection until it reaches this side (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily throw the game ball from the guide surface to the ball entrance while remaining in the biased state.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the guide surface has a first region that is continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing member, and the game ball that is guided through the first region does not come into contact with it. The protruding portion is formed to have a size, and the first region of the guide surface on one wing member of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface on the other wing member are equal to the size of the guide surface. A game machine A4 characterized in that the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface.

According to the game machine A4, in the game machine A2 or A3, the guide surface has a first region that is continuous from the distal end side to the base end side of the wing member, and the game ball guided through the first region has a non-continuous region. Since the protruding portion is formed with a size that causes contact, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface rolls in the first area, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball, The ball can enter the ball entrance smoothly.

In this case, the first region of the guide surface on one of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface on the other wing member are perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. Since they are arranged at different positions in the directions of However, the game balls can be biased in different directions, allowing the balls to smoothly enter the ball entrance.

Any one of gaming machines A2 to A4 includes a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, and the base member includes a regulating portion that comes into contact with the wing member to restrict rotation of the wing member, A game machine A5 characterized in that a protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with a regulating portion of the base member.

According to the game machine A5, any of the game machines A2 to A4 includes a base member that rotatably supports the wing member, and the base member restricts the rotation of the wing member by coming into contact with the wing member. Since the regulating portion is provided and the protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the protruding portion is a portion that protrudes from the wing member (guide surface), the relatively rigid portion of the wing member can be used as a stopper for bringing it into contact with the regulating portion of the base member. Accordingly, damage to the wing member can be suppressed.

In gaming machine A5, the protruding portion has a side surface formed substantially flush with a side surface on the proximal end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the protruding portion is substantially flush with the proximal side surface of the wing member. A game machine A6 characterized in that a side surface of the protruding portion that is formed abuts at least a regulating portion of the base member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A5, the side surface of the protruding portion is formed to be substantially flush with the side surface on the proximal end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the protruding portion is formed on the proximal end side of the wing member. Since the side surface of the protruding part formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base member contacts at least the regulating part of the base member, the part that is far from the rotation axis (the side surface of the protruding part) is connected to the regulating part of the base member. The reaction force input from the regulating portion to the wing member can be reduced by the amount that the regulating portion can be brought into contact with the wing member. Therefore, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. Furthermore, for example, compared to the case where the protruding end surface of the protruding part is brought into contact with the regulating part of the base member, the regulating part of the base member can be separated from the ball entry opening, and the flow to the ball entry opening is reduced. You can secure a space for roads. In addition to the side surface of the protruding portion, the side surface of the base end side of the wing member may also be brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and damage to the wing member can be further suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6 includes an intervening wall located between the opposing protrusions in the closed state, and the pair of wing members has no protrusions when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the opposing distance between the guide surfaces in the area where the guide surfaces face each other is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the protrusions is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, the pair of wing members are arranged at a position where the facing interval of the guide surfaces in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the protruding part is provided protruding from the guide surface, the pair of wing members are further spaced apart by the height of the protruding part to prevent the game ball from being caught between the protruding parts. This increases the space required for arranging the pair of wing members.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, it is provided with an intervening wall located between the opposing protrusions in the closed state, and the pair of wing members are connected to the rotating shaft. When viewed from the direction, the opposing interval of the guide surfaces in the area where no protruding part is formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the opposing interval of the protruding part is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, The space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be reduced.

In other words, even if the pair of wing members start to close (start to transition to the closed state) while the game ball is being guided (rolling) on the guide surface, the intervening wall will not be present between the opposing protrusions. By locating the protrusion, the game ball can be ejected from between the opposing protrusions and the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the protrusions. The game ball discharged from between the opposing protrusions by the intervening wall is located between the opposing guide surfaces in the area where the protrusions are not formed, and the opposing interval at such a position is Since the diameter of the ball is larger than that of the ball, the game ball will not be caught. As a result, the distance between the protrusions facing each other can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be reduced. In other words, the pair of wing members can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for a conventional product that does not have a protruding portion protruding from the guide surface.

The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and above the lower end of the ball entry hole in the direction of gravity. Game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity, and above the lower end of the ball entrance in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guide surface can be thrown to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall, the ball can enter the ball entrance.

In any of gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one wing member of the pair of wing members is placed at a position forming the closed state, and the timing at which the other wing member is placed at a position forming the closed state. A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the timing at which the game is played is different.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one of the pair of wing members is placed in a position where the other wing member forms a closed state and the timing at which the other wing member is adjusted are determined. Since the timing at which the ball is disposed at the position where the closed state is formed is different, the game ball is difficult to be caught between the pair of wing members (guide surfaces), and the opposing interval between the pair of wing members can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the space required for arranging the pair of wing members can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member has a closed position in which the guide surface faces the ball entry hole and prevents the game ball from entering the ball entry hole, and a closed position in which the guide surface faces the ball entry hole. The guide surface of the guide member is formed to be rotatable between an open position that extends to the front side of the ball entry hole and allows a game ball rolling on the guide surface to enter the ball entry hole, and the guide surface of the guide member is The ball is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entry hole, and the pair of protrusions are disposed at positions across the ball entry hole when viewed from the front. The game machine A10 is also arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game balls are guided along the guide surface).

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is in a closed position in which it retracts below the ball entry hole and makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the ball entry port, and in a closed position in which the guide member is in a position where the guide surface is the upper surface. The guiding surface of the guiding member is slidably displaceable between an open position that extends toward the front side of the ball opening and allows a game ball rolling on the guiding surface to enter the ball opening; The pair of protrusions are formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entry hole, and the pair of protrusions are disposed at positions across the ball entry hole when viewed from the front. , a gaming machine A11 characterized in that the gaming machines A11 are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which game balls are guided along the guide surface).

According to the gaming machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, the guiding member has a guiding surface that has a width equal to or larger than the width of the ball entrance opening. The pair of protrusions are arranged at positions across the ball entrance in front view, and are located in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). Since they are arranged differently, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface can be reliably biased by bringing it into contact with the protrusion. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In addition, one protruding part and the other protruding part are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When a game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of protrusions. Therefore, the game ball that enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction can be prevented from passing through the guide surface of the guide member and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface of the guide member. As a result, the game ball can enter the ball entrance, thereby increasing the player's interest.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning opening unit 500 as an example>
A ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entrance, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the pair of wing members to open or close the pair of wing members. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are placed in a permissible position that allows the game ball to enter the ball entry hole, and the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means. and a regulating means arranged at a regulating position that regulates entry of game balls into the ball entry hole when the wing members are closed, wherein the pair of wing members are closed or the pair of wing members are closed. A gaming machine B1, wherein the regulating means is formed so as to be maintainable at the regulating position when the wing member is opened from the outside.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry hole, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball entry hole. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means, the pair of wing members are placed in a permissible position that allows entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means disposed at a regulating position that regulates the entry of game balls into the ball entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is arranged at the permissible position, thereby preventing the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members from entering the ball entrance. You can let the ball enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is placed in the regulating position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball will be directed to the ball entrance. It is possible to restrict the ball being thrown into the ball.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so for example, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside, it is possible to displace the regulating means from the regulating position to the permissible position. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of regulating game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the arrangement of the regulating means is formed so that it can be maintained at the regulating position when the pair of wing members are closed or when the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced to the permissible position. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

Note that the restriction position for regulating the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance means that it is sufficient if the game ball can be stopped at a predetermined position. In other words, when the ball entrance is provided with a passage connected to the ball entrance and through which the game balls flowing from the ball entrance pass, the regulating position by the regulating means (the position at which the game balls are stopped) is further away from the ball entrance. It may be upstream or downstream from the ball entrance (that is, in the middle of the path that flows from the ball entrance and passes through the passage). In the latter case, the regulating position of the regulating means may be upstream of the detecting means (detection sensor) disposed in the middle of the passage to detect passage of game balls; It may be downstream.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism slides between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the drive means. and a slide transmission member that is rotated to an open rotation position by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to an open slide position to open the pair of wing members, and closed by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to a closed slide position. a rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotational position to close the pair of wing members, the restriction means is disposed on the slide transmission member, and when the slide transmission member is slid to the open slide position, the restriction is closed. When the means is placed in the allowable position and the slide transmission member is slid to the closed slide position, the restriction means is placed in the restriction position, and with the slide transmission member placed in the closed slide position, When the rotation transmission member is placed in the open rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. A gaming machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1, when the rotation transmission member is placed in the open rotation position with the slide transmission member placed in the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are As a result of this engagement, sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is regulated, making it easier to prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entry opening.

That is, when the pair of closed wing members is forcibly opened from the outside, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position while the slide transmission member is placed in the closed slide position. In such a state, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position, so that the restriction means can be maintained at the restriction position (if the restriction means is permissible). (This can prevent unauthorized forced displacement from the outside.) As a result, even if a pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside and a game ball is allowed to pass between the pair of wing members, the regulating means will prevent the game ball from entering the ball entrance. can.

In the game machine B2, a sliding groove is provided extending in one of the slide transmitting member and the rotation transmitting member, and a sliding protrusion is provided protruding from the other, and the sliding protrusion is slid along the sliding groove. As a result, the slide displacement of the slide transfer member is transmitted and the rotation transfer member is rotated, and the slide protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the slide groove, thereby opening the slide transfer member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that sliding displacement to a sliding position is regulated.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B2, a sliding groove is provided extending in one of the slide transmitting member and the rotation transmitting member, and a sliding protrusion is provided protruding from the other. By sliding along the sliding groove, the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted and the rotation transmission member is rotated, and the sliding protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, thereby transmitting the slide transmission. Since the sliding displacement of the member to the open sliding position is restricted, the restriction can be made less likely to be released while achieving miniaturization.

That is, the sliding groove and the sliding protrusion for transmitting the sliding displacement of the slide transmitting member to the rotation transmitting member for rotation can be used to form a means for regulating the sliding displacement of the slide transmitting member to the open slide position. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such a means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the sliding protrusion engages with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, unauthorized access to the engaged portion from the outside can be made difficult, and the restriction (engagement) can be released accordingly. It's difficult to do.

The game machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism slides between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the drive means. and a slide transmission member that is rotated to an open rotation position by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to an open slide position to open the pair of wing members, and closed by sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to a closed slide position. a rotation transmitting member that is rotated to a rotational position so that at least the pair of wing members can be closed, the regulating means is disposed on the rotational transmission member, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated to an open rotational position; When the restriction means is placed in the allowable position and the rotation transmission member is rotated to the closed rotation position, the restriction means is placed in the restriction position, and the slide transmission member is placed in the closed slide position and the rotation is rotated. When the transmission member is placed in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby restricting rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. Game machine B4.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1, when the slide transmission member is placed in the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is placed in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are By being engaged, rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position is restricted, so it is easier to prevent game balls from entering the ball entrance opening illegally.

That is, from the closed state of the pair of wing members, for example, by forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside or by directly operating the rotation transmitting member, the rotation transmitting member is rotated to the open position. Even if the rotation transmitting member and the slide transmitting member are engaged with each other, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position is restricted, so that the restricting means can be maintained at the restricting position (i.e., the restricting means can be prevented from being illegally forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance by the regulating means.

In the game machine B4, a protrusion protruding from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and an engaging portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member so as to be engageable with the protrusion. A gaming machine B5, wherein the protruding portion is protruded along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide transmission member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4, a protrusion protrudes from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member is engageable with the protrusion. Since the protrusion protrudes along the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member, the engagement between the protrusion and the engagement part is achieved by utilizing the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member. It is possible to switch between the engagement and the release of the engagement, and the structure can be simplified.

Note that the engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or rotation transmission member) that the protrusion can come into contact with, or a hole or a recess into which the protrusion can be inserted (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or rotation transmission member). It may be a hole or a recess formed in one of the members. That is, any structure may be used as long as it can restrict the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position by the protruding portion coming into contact with the engaging portion. In this case, it is preferable that the engaging portion be a hole or a recess. Since the protruding part is inserted into the engaging part, the space required for disposing the protruding part can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the size of the protruding part. This is because the protrusion can be shielded from the outside, making unauthorized access to the protrusion from the outside difficult.

In the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member has an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position, and an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the closed rotation position. A game machine B6 characterized in that it includes a closing side abutting part that abuts the pair of wing members and closes the pair of wing members when the game machine B6 is closed.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member has an open side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. , and a closing-side contact portion that contacts and closes the pair of wing members when rotated toward the closed rotation position, so that it is possible to suppress the pair of wing members from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, Unauthorized access to the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the wing member is externally displaced in the direction of forced opening, the closing side contact portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing member, and the rotation transmission member attempts to rotate toward the open rotation position. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member, so that the displacement of the wing member can be controlled by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member. It can be regulated by the department. That is, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members from being illegally forcibly opened from the outside, and to make it difficult to illegally access the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member from the outside.

The game machine B4 or B5 includes a biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmitting member contacts the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. a game machine comprising an opening-side contact portion that opens when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward a closed rotation position, and the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means. B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B4 or B5, it is provided with a biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position. The blade member is provided with an opening-side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means. When the pair of wing members are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members do not come into contact with the rotation transmission member, and external force due to such forced opening can be prevented from being applied to the rotation transmission member. As a result, damage to the pair of wing members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member can be suppressed.

Examples of the biasing means include a spring (torsion spring or coil spring) that biases the pair of wing members in the closing direction with elastic recovery force, and a magnet that biases the pair of wing members in the closing direction with attractive force. be done.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B7 includes a detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the regulation means has a regulation position downstream of the detection means, and A game machine B8 characterized in that game balls are restricted at a position that can be detected by a detection means.

According to the gaming machine B8, any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7 includes a detection means for detecting a game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the regulating means has a regulating position downstream from the detecting means. At the same time, since the game ball is regulated at a position where it can be detected by the detection means, for example, if the wing member is forcibly opened and a game ball is illegally entered from the ball entrance, the detection means will detect the game ball. This state can be continued. Therefore, by determining whether the detection by the detection means continues beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have been illegally entered.

<About the concept of the invention using the decorative pattern display device 800 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a first reel formed to be rotatable and a second reel disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and formed to be rotatable, the first reel has a cylindrical shape. The second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape and includes a first side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the first outer circumferential wall, and the second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape and has an outer surface. a second outer circumferential wall that faces the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall at a predetermined distance; and a second outer circumferential wall that extends radially inward from one side in the axial direction of the second outer circumferential wall, and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall faces the inner surface of the first side wall. and a second side wall facing each other at a predetermined interval, and a standing portion is provided to stand from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall toward the other. Machine C1.

Here, the first reel is rotatably formed, and the second reel is disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and is rotatably formed (i.e., a double reel structure is provided). (e.g., Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-230693). There is also a known technique for cleaning the display surface of the reel by removing dust attached to it by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-28241).

However, the dual reel structure has a problem in that it is difficult to clean. That is, in the double reel structure, it is not possible to secure space for arranging the above-mentioned rotating brush between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel), so the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel Also, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel includes a first outer circumferential wall formed in a cylindrical shape and a first side wall extending radially inward from one side in the axial direction of the first outer circumferential wall. The second reel has a second outer wall formed in a cylindrical shape and whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the first outer wall at a predetermined interval, and a second reel having a diameter from one side in the axial direction of the second outer wall. a second side wall that projects inward in the direction and whose outer surface faces the inner surface of the first side wall at a predetermined interval; Since the installed portion is erected, wind pressure is generated by displacing the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, and using this wind pressure, the first Air can be made to flow between the inner surface of the outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall. Thereby, dust can be removed by air flow, and the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall can be cleaned. That is, in the double reel structure, cleaning can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a continuous surface in the circumferential direction.

Here, if an opening is formed in at least one of the first side wall or the second side wall or a part of the circumferential direction is partially separated, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall The wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the gaps escapes through the openings and divided portions, which weakens the wind pressure, and the difference between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall increases accordingly. It becomes difficult for the air between them to flow.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a continuous surface in the circumferential direction. The wind pressure generated by displacing the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of air between the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall. As a result, by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall are Allows air to flow easily between the outer surface and the outer surface.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel is rotatably supported at the center and includes a first support wall that supports the first side wall, and the second reel is rotatably supported at the center. A game machine C3 comprising a second support wall that is supported and supports the second side wall, and an opening is formed in at least one of the first support wall and the second support wall.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1 or C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the support wall that supports the first side wall and the second support wall that supports the second side wall. Through the opening, air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside, or air is introduced from the outside between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Can be inhaled. That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air can flow (outflow or inflow) between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall accordingly. As a result, by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall are Allows air to flow easily between the outer surface and the outer surface.

In the gaming machine C3, when the upright portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the opening is formed at least in the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, when the upright portion is provided on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the first reel or Since at least an opening is formed in the other first support wall or second support wall of the second reel, the effect of reducing flow resistance by exhausting or inhaling air through the opening can be easily achieved. . That is, when rotating one of the first reel and the second reel on which the upright part is provided, the other reel, on which the opening part is formed, is stopped, thereby preventing air from flowing through the opening part. Flow (exhaust or intake) resistance can be reduced.

Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, wherein the upright portions are erected at different positions in the radial direction on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, respectively. C5.

In the gaming machine C5, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the upright portions are provided on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall at different positions in the radial direction, so that the first reel Alternatively, no matter which of the second reels is rotated, wind pressure can be generated by displacing the upright portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Therefore, in the production by rotating the first reel or the second reel, it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have optical transparency, and a plurality of symbols are provided on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the upright portions are arranged along a circumferential direction and are erected on a second side wall of the second reel.

According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer circumferential wall of the first reel is formed to have optical transparency, and the second outer circumferential wall of the second reel is formed so as to be transparent. Since a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction, the player can visually recognize the fluctuations in the symbols as the second reel rotates through the first reel. In this case, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, which rotates more frequently than the first reel. , it is possible to increase the chances of cleaning the inner surface of the first outer circumferential wall and the outer surface of the second outer circumferential wall when the first reel or the second reel is rotated.

<About the concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
It includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and a transmitting member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means, and the transmitting member is formed in a curved manner, and the plurality of light emitting means A gaming machine D1 arranged along a curve, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Here, the substrate includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and a transmitting member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means, the transmitting member is formed in a curved manner, and the plurality of light emitting means Gaming machines are known that are arranged along the lines (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-106672). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals when the transparent member is viewed from the front. That is, the light emitting means are equally spaced along the direction of the line segment (chord) connecting both ends of the curved line (arc) formed by the plurality of light emitting means. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the distance between some of the plurality of light emitting means and adjacent light emitting means is narrowed, there is a problem that the distribution of heat emitted by the light emitting means is uneven. Therefore, heat is concentrated on some light emitting means, which tends to shorten the life of the light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between each light emitting means and the adjacent light emitting means can be constant, and the heat emitted by the light emitting means can be distributed. can be equalized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the concentration of heat on some of the light emitting means, and to improve the life of each light emitting means.

The gaming machine D1 includes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of sectioned surfaces corresponding to the plurality of light emitting means. , a gaming machine D2 characterized in that the partition widths of the plurality of partition screens when viewed from the front of the transparent member are set to be substantially the same.

Here, when a plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals along the curve of the transparent member (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction), the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at unequal intervals when the transparent member is viewed from the front. The Rukoto. That is, when the transparent member is viewed from the front, a region where the distance between the light emitting means is narrow and a region where the distance is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes uneven along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, it is equipped with a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member is compatible with a plurality of light emitting means. It has a plurality of partitions divided into sections, and the partition widths of the plurality of partitions when viewed from the front of the transparent member are set to be approximately the same, so that the amount of light of each partition that is visually recognized when viewed from the front of the transmission member is approximately the same. It can be the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D2, wherein a light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Since diffusivity can be ensured (light can be emitted over a wider angle), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one section.

Note that the light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the light emitting surface having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front means that the shape of the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin when viewed from the front) is rectangular.

A game machine D4 in which at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged in such a direction that one side of the light emitting surface is along a tangential direction of the curved shape of the transparent member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D3, at least some of the plurality of light emitting means are arranged in such a direction that one side of the light emitting surface is along the tangential direction of the curved shape of the transparent member. The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curve of the transmitting member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transparent member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In any one of gaming machines D2 to D4, the dividing surface is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transparent member and is recessed toward a side away from the back surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed as a curved surface facing the back surface of the transparent member. A gaming machine D5, characterized in that it faces between the member and the dividing screen.

According to the gaming machine D5, in any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the dividing surface is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transparent member and is recessed toward the side away from the back surface of the transparent member, and the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. faces the space between the transparent member and the dividing surface, so that the substrate can be disposed perpendicularly to the transparent member. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit including the transmitting member, the substrate, and the reflecting member can be increased. In this case, the dividing screen is arranged in such a manner that it surrounds the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the light emitting means from a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light, so that the light reflected on the dividing screen is directed to the back surface of the transmitting member. It can be made uniformly incident. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transparent member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

In the gaming machine D5, the reflective member includes a continuous surface that is continuous with the division screen and faces the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means, and the continuous surface is convex toward the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that it is formed as a curved surface.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the reflective member is provided with a continuous surface that is continuous with the partition screen and faces the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means, and the continuous surface is connected to the light-emitting means. Since the light emitting surface is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the light emitting surface, the light reflected from the continuous surface can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the transmitting member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light transmitted through the transparent member and visually recognized can be made uniform.

<About the concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
A plurality of rotating drums formed to be rotatable and arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals, and a decorative member disposed between the plurality of rotating drums and at least a part of which is transparent. and a substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and the substrate is arranged in an attitude such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. A game machine E1 provided therein includes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member.

Here, a plurality of drums are formed to be rotatable and are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and the drums are disposed between the plurality of drums and at least a part thereof has optical transparency. A decorative member and a substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, the board being arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means are mounted substantially perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. A gaming machine that is installed is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-5927). According to this gaming machine, not only can the space between the spinning drums be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern can be formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light from the light emitting means that has passed through the decorative member. It is possible to perform an effect that allows the player to visually recognize the pattern of the decorative member integrally with the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, the board is arranged with the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member, so the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently directed onto the back surface of the decorative member. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. Therefore, there was a problem that the production effect was insufficient. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means is made small while the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is made large, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotation drum will be hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since it is provided with a reflecting member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member, the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member. Even when the substrate is disposed, it is possible to widen the irradiation range of the back surface of the decorative member by the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be enlarged accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Further, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light emitting means can be made larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, so that a sense of unity can be created between the decorative member and the rotating drum.

In the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer circumferential surface of the rotating drum, and is formed with an outer edge extending to a position overlapping the outer circumferential surface of the rotating drum when viewed from the front. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer circumferential surface of the spinning drum and extends its outer edge to a position overlapping the outer circumferential surface of the spinning drum when viewed from the front. Since it is formed so as to protrude, the axial end surface of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (hardly made visible). Further, since the pattern of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means and the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the drum can be brought closer together, the decorative member and the drum can be integrated. It makes it easier to create a sense of experience.

In the gaming machine E2, the reflective member connects the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the region on the board where the light emitting means is mounted and the pattern on the decorative member are connected. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the back surface of the reflective member is inclined in a direction away from an axial end surface of the drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the reflective member connects the surface of the board on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, thereby reducing the area on the board where the light emitting means is mounted. The back surface of the reflective member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end face of the drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means While ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by the (proximity to). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (making it difficult to see), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be easily formed.

A gaming machine E4, which is the gaming machine E2 or E3, wherein the light emitting means is mounted on both sides of one side and the other side of the board.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the light emitting means is mounted on both one surface and the other surface of the board, so that the light emitting means mounted on one surface Different designs can be independently formed (displayed) on the decorative member depending on the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the other side.

In this case, the number of substrates disposed between the drums arranged in parallel can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arranging the board can be suppressed, the drum can be moved deeper into the back of the decorative member (the drum can be moved closer to the board). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the rotating drum can be easily shielded from the player (making it difficult to see), and a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be easily formed.

<About the concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
A game machine comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, which are disposed opposite to each other and are movable in the direction toward or away from each other, and are movable in the same direction with opposing sides in contact with each other. The base member includes a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that displaceably support the first displacement member and the second displacement member, respectively, on the base member, and the support mode of the first support mechanism is the same as the first support mechanism. The second displacement is biased toward one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member and is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the second displacement member that is in contact with one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member. A game machine F1 characterized in that the support aspect of the second support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing side of the member.

Here, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged opposite to each other and are formed to be movable in the direction toward or away from each other, and are also formed to be movable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other. A gaming machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-106844). According to this gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to each other to a position where their opposing sides abut, an object located on the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, , a liquid crystal display device or a presentation member) and displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released along with the displacement, and the object can be visually recognized. You can perform a performance that In addition, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is possible to maintain the shielding of the object. , it is also possible to perform a presentation (a presentation that draws attention to the operation of removing the mask) before the mask is removed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to make the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member come into close contact with each other due to the dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members, and the space between the opposite sides There was a problem that a gap may be formed between the two. When a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can see the object on the back side through the gap, which impedes the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that displaceably support the first displacement member and the second displacement member, respectively, and the first support mechanism The support mode of the mechanism is biased to one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member, and is on the opposite side to the other side of the opposite side of the second displacement member that comes into contact with one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member. Since the support aspect of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposite side of the second displacement member, when the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism The support mode and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased to sides opposite to each other (sides rotated by 180 degrees around the centers of one side and the other side of the opposing sides). Thereby, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Examples of ways in which the support state is biased to one side include, for example, when the rigidity of the constituent members on one side and the other side is different (dimensions, number of constituent members, materials, etc.) The driving force transmitted between the two sides (e.g., size, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) is different, and the state of connection between component parts on one side and the other side (e.g., the number of connecting parts, the difference in the number of connecting parts, etc.) The ease with which one side and the other side can be displaced toward the other side (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (sliding or rotation), etc.) is different. , a combination of these, etc. are exemplified.

Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism shift their higher rigidity side (lower side) to the other party's lower rigidity side (higher side). ) can be faced. Therefore, when the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes (moves forward) the other on the side with higher rigidity, and On the less rigid side, a state can be formed in which the opponent is accepted (retreats). As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means that generates a driving force, a pair of first connecting members that connect the first displacement member to the base member, and a pair of first connecting members. The second support mechanism includes a first side transmission member and a first other side transmission member that respectively transmit the driving force of the first driving means and have different configurations, and the second support mechanism includes a first side transmission member and a first other side transmission member that respectively transmit the driving force of the first driving means and have different configurations. 2 driving means, a pair of second connecting members that connect the second displacement member to the base member, and transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the pair of second connecting members, respectively, and having mutually different configurations. A game machine F2 comprising a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means that generates a driving force, and a pair of first connecting members that connect the first displacement member to the base member. , a first side transmission member and a first other side transmission member that respectively transmit the driving force of the first drive means to the pair of first connection members and have mutually different configurations, and the second support mechanism includes: A second driving means that generates a driving force; a pair of second connecting members that connect the second displacement member to the base member; Since the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member are provided with different configurations, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and there is no gap between the opposite sides. Formation can be suppressed.

That is, in a state where the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism is positioned on the side where the driving force is larger or the transmission timing of the driving force is It is possible to create a state in which the opponent is pushed (moved forward) on the earlier side, and the opponent is accepted (retracted) on the side where the driving force is smaller or the transmission timing of the driving force is later. As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Here, as an aspect in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) have different configurations, for example, the rigidity (structure Examples include items with different dimensions, number of parts, materials, etc.), items with different connections between component parts (e.g. number of connecting parts, amount of play in connecting parts, etc.), and combinations of these. be done. That is, due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the timing of transmission are different, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are each biased to one side.

In the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is connected to the base member. A gaming machine F3 is rotatably supported on the same axis as the gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are connected to the base member and coaxially rotatably supported by the base member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. In this case, even when using bias in the support mode, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

In the game machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body made of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged so that the opposite sides thereof are connected to each other. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state when they are brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, an elastic body made of a rubber-like elastic material is disposed on at least one of the first connecting member and the second connecting member, and the first displacement member When the second displacement member has its opposite sides in contact with each other, the elastic body is interposed between the first connection member and the second connection member in an elastically compressed state, so that the first displacement member and When the second displacement member is reciprocated in the same direction while the opposing sides are in contact with each other, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when using the bias of the support mode.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first drive means that generates a driving force, and is driven by the first drive means and connects the first displacement member to the base member. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members, a first side biasing member and a first other side biasing member that respectively apply different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, and the second support mechanism a second driving means for generating a force; a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; A game machine F5 comprising a second one-side biasing member and a second other-side biasing member that apply a biasing force.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first driving means that generates a driving force, and is driven by the first driving means and A pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first side urging member and a first other side urging member that respectively apply different urging forces to the pair of first connecting members, The second support mechanism includes a second driving means that generates a driving force, a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second driving means and connects the second displacement member to the base member, and a second connecting member that connects the second displacement member to the base member. Since the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member each apply different biasing forces to the two connecting members, it is possible to easily bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other, It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between opposing sides.

That is, in a state where the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism, for example, pushes the other party (moves forward) on the side where the biasing force is large. ), it is possible to form a state in which the side with the smaller urging force accepts (retreats) the opponent. As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

Note that the first one-side biasing member and the first other-side biasing member may have the same configuration. That is, the urging forces applied to the pair of first connecting members may be made different by having different positions where the urging forces are applied or by having different amounts of elastic deformation. The same applies to the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member.

In any of gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first drive means that generates a driving force, and is driven by the first drive means and connects the first displacement member to the base member. The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members, and the second support mechanism includes a second driving means that generates a driving force. a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; and a second connecting member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of second connecting members. 2. A game machine F6 comprising: 2 biasing members.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates a driving force, and the first supporting mechanism The second support mechanism includes a pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member; and a pair of second connecting members that are attached to one of the pair of second connecting members. Since the second biasing member that applies force is provided, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

That is, when the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes the other on the side where the biasing force is applied (for example). At the same time, the side on which the biasing force is not applied can accept the opponent (retreat). As a result, the opposite sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the opposite sides.

In the game machine F3 or F4, the game machine is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the first connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member. one of the first torsion springs as the first connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member. A game machine F7 characterized in that at least one of a connecting position between the leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or a connecting position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is spaced apart from the winding part.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3 or F4, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the first connecting member, the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member Since the first torsion spring applies a biasing force in the direction of bringing the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member, when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction closer to the second displacement member, the first connecting member must be rotated. The driving force of the first driving means necessary for this purpose can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position where it is separated from the second displacement member to the contact position where it is in contact with the second displacement member, the displacement can be smoothly started. can.

In this case, as the first connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or the position of the first torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where the force is applied is longer, and the first displacement member is moved closer to the second displacement member. It is possible to weaken the biasing force in the direction of Therefore, for example, when stopping the first displacement member brought close to the second displacement member, the displacement can be reliably stopped, and damage caused by collision can be suppressed. Furthermore, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement is reduced. can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine F7, the direction is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member approaches the first displacement member. a second torsion spring that applies a biasing force to one leg of the second torsion spring as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member; The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that at least one of a connecting position between the and the second connecting member and a connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is spaced apart from the winding part.

According to the game machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as the first torsion spring in the game machine F7. In particular, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is particularly effective because the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed on both sides. Become. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are at the same height (arranged in the gravity direction position), and the position where they contact is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the gravity direction, and the distance between the two is The configuration of gaming machine F8 is particularly effective when the position (retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the direction of gravity.

A gaming machine F9 in the gaming machine F7, characterized in that the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F7, the first displacement member is brought closer to the second displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity, so that the first displacement member is moved downward in the direction of gravity. The more the first displacement member is positioned, the stronger the biasing force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the direction of gravity can be. ).

Therefore, when displacing (raising) the first displacement member upward in the direction of gravity from a stopped state, the displacement (rise) can be smoothly started, and the raised first displacement member can be stopped. In some cases, the displacement can be reliably stopped not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the biasing force. As a result, damage caused by collision with the second displacement member can be suppressed. On the other hand, when stopping the first displacement member that has been displaced (descended) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened to counteract the action of gravity that attempts to continue the downward movement. be able to. As a result, the first displacement member can be reliably stopped.

In the gaming machine F9, the direction is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member. the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by upward displacement in the direction of gravity; As the second connecting member is rotated in the direction of approaching the second connecting member, the connecting position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member A gaming machine F10 characterized in that at least one of the connecting positions is spaced apart from the winding part.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F9, it is formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member, and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is connected to the second connecting member. The second displacement member is provided with a second torsion spring that applies a biasing force in a direction to separate the second displacement member from the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by displacement upward in the direction of gravity. When displacing the second displacing member in a direction away from the first displacing member, that is, when it is necessary to displace (raise) the second displacing member against the direction of gravity, the first connecting member is rotated. The driving force of the second driving means can be assisted by the urging force of the second torsion spring. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the position of the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions between the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where force is applied becomes longer, and the second displacement member is spaced apart from the first displacement member. It is possible to weaken the biasing force in the direction of raising (in the direction of raising upward in the direction of gravity). Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the reciprocating displacement is reduced. The displacement speed can be increased and the performance effect can be improved.

A gaming machine K1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a variable display means that permanently displays the identification information, The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine K2 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Features of gaming machine K3. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball into the ball entrance and is movable. Gaming machines are known (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-164598). Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members that have a guide surface for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance, are disposed across the ball entrance, and have their proximal ends rotatably supported. Patent Document 1 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one wing member, and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other wing member.
However, the game machine described above has a problem in that the game ball cannot be biased sufficiently.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can bias the game ball.
<Means>
To achieve this objective, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 has a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide surface that guides the game ball to the ball entrance, and is also formed to be movable. The guide member includes a pair of protruding portions that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the guide surface. A pair of protrusions are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members arranged to sandwich the ball entry hole and whose base end side is rotatably supported. By rotating the pair of wing members in a direction in which the tip sides approach or separate, a closed state through which a game ball cannot pass or an open state through which a game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of protruding portions is protruded from each guide surface of the pair of wing members, and the protruding portion on one wing member and the protruding portion on the other wing member of the pair of wing members are connected to the guide surface. The game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls are guided.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in which the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the proximal end side than the distal end side of the wing member.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in Technical Idea 1, the game ball can be biased.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the game ball can be biased.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, it is possible to cause the ball to smoothly enter the ball entrance.
<Sign>
10 pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance)
15065 Variable winning device (guidance member)
15065a side (guide surface)
15065b Swelling part (protruding part)
15065c bulging part (protruding part)
65a specific winning opening
510 base member
511b2 engaging part (regulating part)
511b1 standing part (intervening wall)
520 1st electric accessory (guide member)
520L wing member
520R wing member
524L bulging part (protruding part)
524R bulge (projection)
526L side (guide surface)
526R side (guide surface)
531 solenoid (drive means)
532 second protrusion (regulating means)
532, 8532 sliding member (slide transmission member)
532d engagement groove (sliding groove)
8532e Third protrusion (protrusion)
533, 7533 , 8533, 9533 rotating member (rotation transmission member)
533a connecting part (engaging part)
533b protrusion (sliding protrusion)
8533e second protrusion (regulating means)
621 Light transmitting member (transmitting member, decorative member)
624 base material (base)
624a LED (light emitting means)
625 reflective member
625a1 reflective surface (continuous surface)
625b recess (section screen)
660 base member
672U displacement member (first displacement member)
672D displacement member (second displacement member)
680U drive means (first support mechanism)
680D drive means (second support mechanism)
684U first link member (first side transmission member)
684D first link member (second one side transmission member)
686U second link member (first other side transmission member)
686U second link member (second other side transmission member)
800 decorative pattern display device (rotation)
810 inner reel unit (second reel)
811 inner reel (second outer peripheral wall)
812 hub (second side wall)
812a1 protrusion (erected part)
812c spoke (second support wall)
812c1 inner opening (opening)
5813a protrusion (erected part)
820 outer reel unit (first reel)
821 outer reel (first outer peripheral wall)
822 spokes (first support wall)
824 edge (first side wall)
3824a protrusion (erected part)
825 outer opening (opening)
SP1 torsion spring (biasing member, first torsion spring)
SP2 torsion spring (biasing member, second torsion spring)

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board 140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance)
15065 Variable winning device (guidance member)
15065a Side (guide surface)
15065b Swelling part (protruding part)
15065c Swelling part (protruding part)
65a Specific winning opening 510 Base member 511b2 Engagement part (regulation part)
511b1 Standing part (intervening wall)
520 First electric accessory (guide member)
520L Wing member 520R Wing member 524L Swelling part (projection part)
524R Swelling part (protruding part)
526L Side (guide surface)
526R Side (guide surface)
531 Solenoid (driving means)
532 Second protrusion (regulating means)
532,8532 Sliding member (slide transmission member)
532d Engagement groove (sliding groove)
8532e Third protrusion (protrusion)
533, 7533, 8533, 9533 Rotating member (rotation transmission member)
533a Connecting part (engaging part)
533b Protrusion (sliding protrusion)
8533e Second protrusion (regulating means)
621 Light transmitting member (transmitting member, decorative member)
624 Base member (base)
624a LED (light emitting means)
625 Reflection member 625a1 Reflection surface (continuous surface)
625b Recess (section screen)
660 Base member 672U Displacement member (first displacement member)
672D Displacement member (second displacement member)
680U driving means (first support mechanism)
680D Drive means (second support mechanism)
684U First link member (first side transmission member)
684D First link member (second one side transmission member)
686U Second link member (first other side transmission member)
686U Second link member (second other side transmission member)
800 Decorative pattern display device (rotation)
810 Inner reel unit (second reel)
811 Inner reel (second outer peripheral wall)
812 Hub (second side wall)
812a1 Protrusion (erected part)
812c spoke (second support wall)
812c1 Inner opening (opening)
5813a Protrusion (erected part)
820 Outer reel unit (1st reel)
821 Outer reel (first outer peripheral wall)
822 Spoke (first support wall)
824 Edge (first side wall)
3824a Protrusion (erected part)
825 Outside opening (opening)
SP1 Torsion spring (biasing member, first torsion spring)
SP2 Torsion spring (biasing member, second torsion spring)

Claims (3)

A game machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a guide member which has a guide surface for guiding the game ball into the ball entrance and is movable,
The guide member includes a pair of protrusions that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls rolling on the guide surface,
A game machine characterized in that the pair of protrusions are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. The guide member is formed as a pair of wing members arranged to sandwich the ball entry hole and whose proximal end side is rotatably supported, and the pair of wing members are rotated in a direction in which the distal end sides are moved toward or away from each other. By doing so, a closed state through which the game ball cannot pass or an open state through which the game ball can pass is formed.
The pair of protrusions protrude from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members, and the protrusion part on one wing member and the protrusion part on the other wing member of the pair of wing members. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to a direction in which game balls are guided along the guide surface. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the proximal end than the distal end of the wing member.

Images